MPH Advanced Service Manual

TechnicalPublications

2165118–100Revision 4

MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2asmAdvanced Service Manual

do not duplicate

Advanced Service DocumentationProperty of GEFor GE Service Personnel OnlyNo Rights Licensed – Do Not Use or CopyDisclosure to Third Parties Prohibited

Copyright� 1999, 2002 by General Electric Co.

ATTENTION

LES APPAREILS À RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX À LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEURSI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES

Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus sévères, la source de rayonnement X représente un dangerlorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entraîne des dommages à l’organisme.

Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les personnes non autorisées ou non qualifiées utilisent cetappareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles–mêmes.

Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures deprotection établies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 26 : Recommandations de la CommissionInternationale sur la Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.

WARNING

X–RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATORUNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED

Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x–ray beam becomes a source ofdanger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x–radiation causes damage to human tissue.

Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposingthemselves or others to its radiation.

Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the Interna-tional Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 26 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.

ATENCION

LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADORCUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS

Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiación X constituye un peligro al ser manipuladopor personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposición excesiva a la radiación X puede causar daños al organismo.

Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadasutilicen este aparato, lo que sería un peligro para los demás y para sí mismas.

Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán informarse sobre lasnormas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales No 26: Recomendaciónes de la Comi-sión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.

ACHTUNG

RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FÜR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN

Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Händen unbe-fugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Orga-nismus schädlich.

Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solcheGeräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.

Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien für den ge-fahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertrautmachen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.

GE Medical Systems MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2

REV 4 asm 2165118–100

i

� THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

� IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THANENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATIONSERVICES.

� DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICEMANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.

� FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICEPROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICALOR OTHER HAZARDS.

� CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

� SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRELANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRETRADUIRE.

� NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LEMANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.

� LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LETECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DESDANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

� DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR INENGLISCHER SPRACHE.

� FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, ISTES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZUSORGEN.

� VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESESKUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDENWURDE.

� WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGENDES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTENDURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHRENKOMMEN.

� ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

� SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMAQUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UNSERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.

� NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO YCOMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.

� LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE ELPROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONESPROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRANATURALEZA.

WARNING

AVERTISSEMENT

WARNUNG

AVISO


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

ii

� ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRADISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.

� SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS,SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DOCLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.

� NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO ECOMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.

� O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DOTÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

� IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILESOLTANTO IN INGLESE.

� SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE ILMANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDEREDIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.

� SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVERCONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO.

� NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FARCOMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLAMANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONEELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

ATENÇÃO

AVVERTENZA

��

� � � ��

��&&&

��

Revision 4

��

�� ".2&-*"+1 &# +,1 -/,-"/)6 20"! *�6 �20" &+'2/6� ,/!&+$)6� 1%" &+01/2 1&,+0 %"/"&+ ,+1�&+"! 0%,2)! �"1%,/,2$%)6 /"�! �+! 2+!"/01,,! �"#,/" 6,2 �11"*-1 1, -)� " 1%&0 ".2&-*"+1 &+ ,-"/�1&,+� �%" �"+"/�) �)" 1/& �,*-�+6� �"!& �) �601"*0 �/,2-� 4&)) �" $)�! 1, �00&01 �+! ,,-"/�1" &+ -)� &+$ 1%&0 ".2&-*"+1 &+ 20"�

)1%,2$% 1%&0 �--�/�120 &+ ,/-,/�1"0 � %&$% !"$/"" ,# -/,1" 1&,+ �$�&+01 5�/�!&�1&,+ ,1%"/ 1%�+ 1%" 20"#2) �"�*��, -/� 1& �) !"0&$+ ,# ".2&-*"+1 �+ -/,3&!" ,*-)"1" -/,1" 1&,+� �,/ �+ �+6 -/� 1& �) !"0&$+ ,*-") 1%" ,-"/�81,/ 1, 1�(" �!".2�1" -/" �21&,+0 1, -/"3"+1 1%" -,00&�&)&16 ,# �+6 -"/0,+0 �/")"00)6� 2+4&0")6� ,/ 2+(+,4&+$)6 "5-,08&+$ 1%"*0")3"0 ,/ ,1%"/0 1, /�!&�1&,+�

�1 &0 &*-,/1�+1 1%�1 "3"/6,+" %�3&+$ �+61%&+$ 1, !, 4&1% 5�/�!&�1&,+ �" -/,-"/)6 1/�&+"! �+! #2))6 � .2�&+1"! 4&1%1%" /" ,**"+!�1&,+0 ,# 1%" ��1&,+�) �,2+ &) ,+ ��!&�1&,+ �/,1" 1&,+ �+! �"�02/"*"+10 �0 -2�)&0%"! &+ ��"-,/10 �3�&)��)" #/,* �� 2�)& �1&,+0� �� ,,!*,+1 3"+2"� �,,* �� "1%"0!�� /6)�+! �� +! ,#1%" �+1"/+�1&,+�) �,**&00&,+ ,+ ��!&�1&,+ �/,1" 1&,+� �+! 1�(" �!".2�1" 01"-0 1, &+02/" -/,1" 1&,+ �$�&+01 &+'2/6�

)) -"/0,+0 �21%,/&7"! 1, 20" 1%" ".2&-*"+1 *201 �" ,$+&7�+1 ,# 1%" !�+$"/ ,# "5 "00&3" "5-,02/" 1, 5�/�!&�1&,+�+! 1%" ".2&-*"+1 &0 0,)! 4&1% 1%" 2+!"/01�+!&+$ 1%�1 1%" �"+"/�) �)" 1/& �,*-�+6� �"!& �) �601"*0 �/,2-� &10�$"+10� �+! /"-/"0"+1�1&3"0 %�3" +, /"0-,+0&�&)&16 #,/ &+'2/6 ,/ !�*�$" 4%& % *�6 /"02)1 #/,* "5-,02/" 1, 5�/�!&8�1&,+�

��/&,20 -/,1" 1&3" *�1"/&�) �+! !"3& "0 �/" �3�&)��)"� �1 &0 2/$"! 1%�1 02 % *�1"/&�)0 ,/ !"3& "0 �" 20"!�

��

� � � ��

��

Blank page.


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

WARNING i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IMPORTANT X–RAY PROTECTION iii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REVISION HISTORY xiii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES xiii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 THEORY OF OPERATION 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1 Applications 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–2 Functions 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–3 Component Assemblies 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–3–1 Power Unit 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–3–2 Extension Rack 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–3–3 Console 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2 – SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–1 Background 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2 Organization 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3 – OVERVIEW 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1 CPU Communication 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2 Error handling 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4 – POWER ON/RESET DIAGNOSTICS 1–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1 PRD Test Sequence 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2 Firmware Initialization 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5 – INITIALIZATION 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–1 ON/OFF Function 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–2 On/Off sequencing: Command 1 control 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–2–1 Standby mode - 3 Phase control 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–2–2 Power ON sequence 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–2–3 Power OFF sequence 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–3 Main Power Supply Contactors and Power Control 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–3–1 LV Power Supplies DC supply 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–3–2 Contactors power on 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–3–3 AC power control 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–3–4 DC power control 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

5–4 DC Power Supply generation 1–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–5 Power Supply-related Error Codes 1–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6 – ROTOR CONTROLLER FUNCTION 1–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–1 Introduction 1–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–2 Rotor Function Sequencing 1–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–3 Rotor Controller Command 1–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–3–1 Rotor controller: Command 2 EPLD 1–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–3–2 IGBT command drivers 1–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–3–3 Phase measurements and maximum current detection 1–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–3–4 High Speed capacitors selection 1–28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4 Rotor Controller Power Inverter 1–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–1 Rotor controller inverter 1–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–2 Current measurements 1–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–3 High Speed capacitors 1–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–4 Tube housing cooling 1–31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5 Rotor Controller Error Handling 1–31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–6 Rotor Controller Thermal Protection 1–32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 – HEATER FUNCTION 1–34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1 Introduction 1–34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–2 Heater Function Sequencing 1–34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3 Heater Command 1–37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3–1 Heater control: Command 2 EPLD 1–37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3–2 IGBT command drivers 1–37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3–3 RMS heater current measure regulation 1–37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3–4 Heater inverters protection 1–38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3–5 Filament protection 1–38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–4 Heater Power inverter and HV Tank heater transformers 1–40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–4–1 Heater inverters 1–40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–4–2 High Voltage Tank heater transformers 1–41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–5 Heater Error Handling 1–41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8 – KV GENERATION FUNCTION 1–44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–1 Introduction 1–44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–2 Exposure Sequencing 1–44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–3 kV Command And Control 1–47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

vii


CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

8–3–1 Inverter command, kV regulation and safeties: Command 1 EPLDs 1–47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–3–2 Inverter command: COMMAND EPLD 1–47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–3–3 kV regulation: REGULATION EPLD 1–48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–3–4 kV function safeties: SAFETY EPLD 1–48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–3–5 Main inverter drivers 1–49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–3–6 kV measure and kV rise waveform 1–49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–3–7 Inverter current measure 1–49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–4 kV Power Inverter and HV Tank 1–51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–4–1 kV main inverter 1–51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–4–2 HV Tank transformer 1–53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–5 kV Function Error Handling 1–55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–6 kV Inverter Thermal Protection 1–55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9 – MA FUNCTION 1–57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–1 Introduction 1–57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–2 mA Measurement Circuit 1–57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–3 mA Regulation 1–58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–4 mA Error Handling 1–58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 10 – TUBE SELECTION FUNCTION 1–60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–1 Introduction 1–60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–2 Tube Selection Sequencing 1–62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–3 Tube Selection Error Handling 1–62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 11 – R/RF INTERFACE 1–63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–1 Description 1–63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–1–1 Tubes 1–63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–1–2 Tomography 1–63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–1–3 Buckies 1–63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–1–4 Collimators 1–63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–1–5 Arterio 1–63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–2 Composition 1–66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–2–1 RF/One Tube 1–67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–2–2 RF/Two Tubes 1–67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–2–3 RAD/One or Two Tubes 1–67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–3 Operation 1–67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–3–1 Wall Bucky Board MPH A6 A4 1–67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

viii


CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

11–3–2 Table Interface Board MPH A6 A2 1–68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–3–3 Table Tomo Collimator Interface Board MPH A6 A5 1–68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–3–4 ROOM IF CPU Board MPH A6 A1 1–68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–4 Workstation Decoding Principle 1–69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11–5 How can the user trigger an x-ray exposure in a RF Remote system? 1–94. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 12 – AEC/AET FUNCTION 1–95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 13 – II SENSOR FUNCTION 1–97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13–1 Description 1–97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13–1–1 Function 1–97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 14 – CONTROL CONSOLE FUNCTION 1–100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–1 Purpose 1–100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–2 Console Make–up 1–100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–3 Operation 1–100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–3–1 Console Control Board (MPH A3 A2) 1–100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–3–2 Switch–on Tests 1–103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–3–3 Console Service Test 1–103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–3–4 Multiplexed Readout 1–104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14–3–5 Communicating with the Generator 1–105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 15 – PROGRAM-X FUNCTION 1–107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15–1 Purpose of PROGRAM-X 1–107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15–2 PROGRAM-X Composition 1–107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15–3 PROGRAM-X Control Board (MPH A8 A1) 1–107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15–4 Switches, jumpers, LEDs and test points 1–111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 16 – PRINT-X FUNCTION 1–112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16–1 Purpose of PRINT-X 1–112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16–2 PRINT-X Composition 1–112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16–3 PRINT-X 1–112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16–3–1 Function equivalence chart 1–113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 17 – 0-POINT MODE 1–115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–1 Presentation 1–115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–1–1 Definition 1–115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–1–2 Purpose 1–115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–1–3 Requirements 1–115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

ix


CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

17–1–4 Sequence of Operations 1–115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–1–5 Constraints 1–116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2 Ergonomics 1–116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–1 Access 1–116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–2 Exposure-Factor Display on Control Console 1–116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–3 Focal Spots 1–116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–4 Automatic operations 1–116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–5 kV Override 1–117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–6 CVN 1–117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–7 Preprogrammed Examinations 1–117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–2–8 Sequence in 0-Point Mode 1–117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–3 Determining Rad kV Values: Rad LUT (p, kV) 1–118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–4 Technical Limitations of Image Quality and of Physician 1–118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–4–1 Limits 1–118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–4–2 Priority 1–119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–5 Using the LUTs 1–120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–6 Parameter Modification 1–120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17–7 Prestored LUT content 1–120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 1 – FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION A1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 – SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION A1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1 Introduction A1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 2 – USER INTERFACE A2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION A2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2 – USER/MACHINE INTERACTIONS A2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–1 Service Terminal, GPX Console, or Console A2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2 Program-X A2–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3 – PROGRAM OUTPUTS FOR USER INFORMATION A2–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 BLOCKS DIAGRAMS 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

x


CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

3 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 3–I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1 – LIST OF JOB CARDS 3–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 001 – Disassembly/Reassembly within the MPH Cabinet 3–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 002 – MPH A4 A1 CMD1 board replacement 3–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 003 – MPH A4 A2 CMD2 board replacement 3–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 004 – MPH A4 A3 CPU board replacement 3–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 005 – MPH A3 A1 DC Filter Board replacement 3–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 006 – MPH A3 A2 Main Power Supply Board replacement 3–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 007 – MPH A3 FL1 EMC Filter assembly replacement 3–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 008 – MPH A3 A3 Inverter replacement 3–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 009 – MPH A2 HV TANK replacement 3–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 010 – MPH A2 A2 HV tank SWITCH Motor replacement 3–29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 011 – MPH A5 A1 Heather Board replacement 3–31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 012 – MPH A5 A2 Rotor Controller Board replacement 3–33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 013 – MPH A5 A3 Option Chiller Board replacement 3–37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 014 – MPH A5 PS 1, PS 2 Power Supply replacement 3–39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 015 – MPH A6 A1 room I/F CPU Board replacement 3–41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 016 – MPH A6 A2 Table interface board replacement 3–45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 017 – MPH A6 A3 distribution board replacement 3–47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 018 – MPH A6 A4 Wall Bucky Board replacement 3–49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 019 – MPH A6 A5 Table Tomo collimator board replacement 3–51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 020 – MPH A6 A6 II Sensor Board replacement 3–53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 021 – MPH A6 PS1/ PS2 Power Supplies replacement 3–55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 022 – Replacement of program–X components 3–57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 023 – Replacement of X–ray tube and Exposure counter recording 3–65. . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 024 – Replacement of print–X components 3–69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card DR 025 – kV/mA measurement calibration 3–73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 DIAGNOSTICS 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


1–1 Overview 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–2 Block convention 4–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

xi


CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

SECTION 2 – PRD DESCRIPTION 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–1 Functional Overview 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–1–1 Functional requirements for PRD 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2 User/Operator Interface 4–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2–1 MPH Power on / Reset Diagnostics. Summary Of Switches And LEDS Utilization 4–6. . .

SECTION 3 – SLD 4–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1 Here to use 4–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–1 TAV Tests Operator Interface 4–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–2 Functional requirements for MPH SLD 4–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–3 MPH functions 4–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–4 MPH FRU’s 4–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–5 SLD design description 4–25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4 – APPLICATION ERROR CODES 4–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1 Software Processing 4–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–1 Class I Error Treatment 4–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–2 Class II Error Treatment 4–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–3 Class III Error Treatment 4–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–4 Class IV Error Treatment 4–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–5 Error transmission Mechanism 4–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2 Diagnostic error list 4–39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–3 Diagnostic error code description 4–43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5 – OPTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING 4–215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF 001 – Console display fault 4–217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF 002 – Troubleshooting on program-X 4–219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF 003 – Troubleshooting of print-X 4–225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF 004 – Diagnostic–help tests 4–229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF005 – Diagnostic–help tests ON/OFF and power supplies 4–237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF006 – Diagnostic–help tests DC bus voltage fault 4–243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF007 – Diagnostic–help tests serial links fault 4–247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF008 – Troubleshooting 0-point mode 4–251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Card VF009 – Diagnostic–help tests interface rad and fluoro 4–263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

xii

Blank page.


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

xiii

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

� ��%� �� %�$ ��"� �� !#��'�#"& � �%�&'�� &�

� ��( � �– Level M4 Prestige VH with Integrated Console.– New RF Table Interface Board: pages 1-64, 1–76, 1–77, 1–81 and 1–94 modified.

� ��$� � – M4-AM milestone.

3 �� – DR012 updated.

4 ��(�� Updated as per BUCge60859.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGENUMBER

REVISIONNUMBER

PAGENUMBER

REVISIONNUMBER

PAGENUMBER

REVISIONNUMBER

Title pageSafety Instruction

44

i thru xiv 4

1–1 thru 1–120 4

A1–1 thru A1–2 4

A2–1 thru A2–2 4

2–1 thru 2–54 4

3–1 thru 3–80 4

4–1 thru 4–276 4


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

xiv

Blank page.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–1

CHAPTER 1 – THEORY OF OPERATION

SECTION 1INTRODUCTION

This document describes the operation of the MPH Generators (50, 65 or 80 kW).

The MPH make up a line of generators which serve the following systems:

� Radiographic systems.

� RF Remote systems.

� RF Cassettless systems.

1–1 Applications

The MPH can be used in systems with one or two tubes, radiography or fluoroscopy systems,or in combination of these system types. The following restrictions apply:

� Only one tube may be used for fluoroscopy.

� Bias tubes cannot be used.

� Grid tubes cannot be used.

1–2 Functions

The main functions handled by the central unit in Application Mode are:

a. Power Unit start-up.

b. Operator Mode. Parameter selection.

c. Estimation of exposure parameters.

d. Management of tube thermal status.

e. Management of x-ray tube housing thermal status.

f. Automatic control of tube current in Radiography Mode and Fluoroscopy Mode.

g. Automatic control of Chamber Reset by kV in AET Mode.

h. Automatic Brightness Control (ABC) by kV in Fluoroscopy Mode.

i. Automatic Quality Control (AQC) in Fluoroscopy Mode .

j. Correction of film non-reciprocity effect in AEC Mode.

k. Calculation of filament temperature.

l. Filament ageing compensation.

m. Control and monitoring of rotor Control Module.

n. Management of thermal status of rotor and kV converters.

o. Control and monitoring of Heater Module.

p. X-ray exposure control.

q. Change of tube selection.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–2

r. Room interface management.

s. Console management.

t. Program-X management.

u. Printer management.

v. Management of debugging console.

w. Error handling.

The main functions handled in Setup Mode are (see Service Manual) are:

a. Management of the Service Terminal menus (one Application Menu and six SetupMenus).

b. Diagnostic menus (Menu 1 and Menu 2).

c. Room configuration input (Menu 3).

d. Tube parameter input (Menu 3).

e. kV scale parameter input (Menu 3).

f. Setup parameter input (Menu 3).

g. Selection of data to be printed (Menu 3).

h. Heating current calibration (Menu 4).

i. Fluoroscopy calibration (Menu 4).

j. AEC calibration for Ionix chamber (Menu 4).

k. Selection of Zero-Point Mode, and ionization chamber calibration (Menu 4).

l. RAM checksum update (Menu 5).

m. Post-display enable (Menu 5).

n. Calibration of kV and mA chain (Menu 6).

o. Calibration of kV divider frequency response (Menu 6).

p. Calibration of dose in Radiography Mode (Menu 6).

q. Diagnostic.

1–3 Component Assemblies

The MPH System Cabinet includes the following sub-assemblies:

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–3

1–3–1 Power Unit

Sub-Assembly Designator Function

Room Distribution Panel MPH A1 Power supply for Positionner, II, Extension rack

HV Tank MPH A2 High Voltage Transformer 80 kW

DC Filter Board MPH A3 A1 AC rectifier to DC

Main Power Supply Board MPH A3 A2 3-Phase control, on/off drivers, dc detection

Inverter Board MPH A3 A3 Main High Frequency Inverter 80 kW

EMC Filter MPH A3 FL1 Line input filter

CPU Board MPH A4 A3 Exposure control

Command 1 Board MPH A4 A1 ON/OFF control, kV control, mA measure

Command 2 Board MPH A4 A2 Rotor controller command, filament control

Rotor Controller Board MPH A5 A2 Stator power supply

Heater Board MPH A5 A1 Filament power supply

LV2 Power Supply 24 V MPH A5 PS2 Low voltage power supply (24 V)

LV1 Power Supply 15 V MPH A5 PS1 Low voltage power supply (±15 V, 5 V)

Chiller Interface MPH A5 A3 Optional control of Chiller or Local Water-Tap

1–3–2 Extension Rack

Sub-Assembly Designator Function

Room IF CPU Board MPH A6 A1 Dialog with Room and AEC Control

Table interface MHP A6 A2 Interface with Remote positionner and I. F.

Distribution Board MHP A6 A3 Power supply and interconnections

Wall Bucky Board MHP A6 A4 Interface with wall bucky and Room Door

Table Tomo Colimator MHP A6 A5 Interface with Rad Table with Tomo and automaticcollimator

I. I. Sensor Board MHP A6 A6 Supply for Photomultiplier and measure current ofphotomultiplier in I. I.

Power Supply MHP A6 PS1 Power supply � 15 V, + 5 V for Room IF/CPU

Power Supply MHP A6 PS2 Power supply 15 V RF for Interface Board

Transformer MHP A6 A7 Various AC supply for AEC, Bucky, control con-sole, etc.

Plug Panel MHP A6 A8 Plug Panel for SAS connectors

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–4

1–3–3 Console

Madrid Console MPH A7 Control Console

Program-X MPH A8 Anatomic Programs

Print-X MPH A9 Printer for Radiography parameters

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–5

SECTION 2SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

2–1 Background

The MPH software, which is run on the PU_CTRL_CPU Board, is a combination of theMPG100 and SCPU software packages.

The MPG100 software, formerly in Pascal, has been re-written in C. The entire softwarepackage is used, regardless of equipment, i.e., user interface and start-up.

The SCPU software is included for exposure management, fault processing, and diagnosis.

The SCPU and MPH generators have identical power controls.

The software segment which is specific to the 68360 microprocessor has been re-written,based on the VRTX Spectra real-time nucleus. This segment concerns task management,series links, timers, mAs, and AEC cutoffs.

2–2 Organization

The software that run on the PU_CTRL_CPU board manages MPH power functions.

Power management is broken down into several jobs.

A number is assigned to each job to indicate its priority level. A small number indicates highpriority.

Jobs communicate with each other via messages sent to message queues or mailboxes.

Management of the various jobs is performed by the VRTX-SA software component.

When a job receives a message, VRTX-SA authorizes execution if the job has higher prioritythan the current job. If not, it waits for completion of the current job before executing theother.

When there is no current job, VRTX-SA activates the IDLE background job.

The software run on the ROOM_IF_CPU Board manages room inputs and outputs.

The two programs communicate via an HDLC-type link.

Error Code Name Cause

502 ERR_RAM Checksum RAM (PU parameters) corrupted.

504 ERR_COD_TAB_FAILERR_COD_TAB_FULLERR_FLOATVRTX_ERR

Error code table corrupted.Error code table full.Error detected in floating point calculation.Error detected in VRTX operation.

505 WATCHDOG_ERR Reset due to watchdog.

515 CONNECTIC_FAULT Connection error between PU_CTRL_CPU Board andCMD1 and CMD2 Boards (checked every 10 ms).

516 ADC_FAIL A/D conversion incomplete or re–read of kV and ICH setpoints, too far from transmitted value.

550 XILINX_CONF_ERR XILINX configuration fault.

501 ERR_PILE The battery for non volatile RAM reack its maximum timeof use (3 years).RAM concerned on PU_CTRL_CPU and Program’X ifpresent.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–6

SECTION 3OVERVIEW

3–1 CPU Communication

The PU_CTRL and ROOM_IF_CPU Boards communicate via an HDLC-type link, ensuringthe room interface.

The ROOM_IF_CPU Board software reads the status of signals coming from the other Roommodules, and transmits these signals to the PU_CTRL_CPU Board.

� Tomography information received from positioner (tomography time, tomographyselected).

� DSA information (Linear Mode) received from DRS.

� Cassette size information received from positioner.

� Divided exposure information received from positioner.

� Slice information received from Image Module.

� Station information from Room.

� Exposure commands: Rad Prep, Exposure, and fluoro footswitch, received frompositioner.

� Video brightness, received from Image Module.

� Ionization chamber reset, received from positioner.

� Positioner transmission, DRS, and generator commands.

The ROOM_IF_CPU Board software receives commands from the PU_CTRL_CPU Boardsoftware, and transmits them to the other modules, as follows:

� From workstations to the various room components (selection of these components).

� Selection of pick-up fields to DRS or to positioner (AEC).

� Selection of ionization chamber to positioner.

� Photomultiplier voltage to the image module.

� Generator authorization: Rad Prep finished, ready for radiography, ready forfluoroscopy.

� X-ray emission.

3–2 Error handling


521 HDLC_ERROR Communication error with ROOM_IF_CPU

526 TST_COM_ERR Communication test with ROOM_IF_CPU Board(performed every 10 s) failed.

522 SCC3_ERROR Communication error with TAV/GPX

523 SCC4_ERROR Communication error with Control Console MADRID

524 SMCI_ERROR Communication error with APR

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–7

ILLUSTRATION 1–1JOBS AND INTERRUPTION HANDLING

CLOCKS

CHASE

VRTX JOBS

ROTOR

INTERRUPTIONHANDLING

CONTROLCONSOLE KEYS

SERVICE TERMINALKEYS

PROGRAM_XRECEPTION

CONTROLCONSOLE DISPLAY

SERVICE TERMINALDISPLAY

PROGRAM_XTRANSMISSION

APPLI_MPGMAINTENANCE &

SET-UP

THERMAL

APPLI_SCPU

ROOM I/OTRANSMISSION

ROOM I/ORECEPTION

KEYBOARD

SCREEN

HEATER

ROOMIF CPU

OTHER PROGRAMS

CONTROLCONSOLE(MADRID)

PRGX

TAVGPXTJRADIOGRAPHY &

FLUOROSCOPY

flashingLED sequence

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–8

SECTION 4POWER ON/RESET DIAGNOSTICS

The MPH PRD high frequency generator Power ON/Reset sequence is initiated by one of thefollowing conditions:

� Power applied to MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU Boards.

� Reset signal generated by board resident manual reset switch.

Either of these signals will reset the CPU Boards.

The purpose of this group of tests is to check operation of those functions on the MPH CPUBoards that are required to establish reliable communications. These diagnostic tests establishoperator confidence in the test execution sequence.

The primary functions of the Board are tested and, if these functions are within test limits, theyare used to test other Board functions.

If the primary functions are not testable, the test sequence is aborted.

The block diagram below shows the functions checked during the PU_CTRL_CPU andROOM_IF_CPU PRD sequence. Diagnosis is to a Field Replaceable Unit level (CPU Boardsfor PRD).

Board functions should be tested in the sequence specified in the following paragraph. Likethe PU_CTRL_CPU Board, the ROOM_IF_CPU Board can execute PRD sequencesindependently. This is the reason why communication between both Boards is the lastPU_CTRL_CPU (Master Board) PRD sequence which cannot be ended, because theROOM_IF_CPU PRD sequences are not finished.

PRD Leds

PRD switches

PRD Leds

PRD switches68360

68302

TAV

ROOM_IF_CPU Board

PU_CTRL_CPU Board

SCC4

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–9

4–1 PRD Test Sequence

The following tests are executed, in the order given:

1. CPU alive test: check minimum CPU functions.

2. EPROM checksum test: check the CPU Boards, flash EPROM checksum.

3. RAM test: check RAM used by the CPUs as a data and stack area.

This test can be run in three different modes: short, extended, and long. The short test isrun in normal operation; the extended or long test is run if requested by the on-boardswitch setting.

� Microprocessor tests: set of tests to check Multiprocessors 68306 (PU_CTRL) and 68302(ROOM_IF) functions:

– Processor test: check any instructions not previously tested.

– Watchdog test: check that the reset sequence following a watchdog timeout operatescorrectly.

– Internal Timers: check operation of the 68302 (ROOM_IF_CPU) internal timers.These timers are used for AEC clock and time measurement.

– Check operation of the 68360 (PU_CTRL_CPU) internal timers. These timers areused for time, mAs, bright exposure, and VRTX clock.

� DMA and serial communication test: check operation of channel of (ROOM_IF) 68302,(PU_CTRL) 68360 (used to send and receive messages over the HDLC link).

4–2 Firmware Initialization

After completion of the PRD, Microcontroller 68302 registers (ROOM_IF_CPU), 68360registers (PU_CTRL_CPU) are initialized. Next, the real time monitor, VRTX, is initialized,and the first firmware initialization task, which initiates all the others, is started.

The MPH then sends the first message to the other CPU to start communication, and waits forconsole (GPX or Control Console MADRID) commands.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–10

ILLUSTRATION 1–2ON/OFF FUNCTION

��

��

��

��#�

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��!��

��

"��

"��

"��

"�

��$��

$��$��

��

� $��!��$ �

"�

"��

"��

"��

"��

"��

"��

��

��#�

"�

"��

"��

"��

"��

"��

"�

$��!$��

��$��

� $��!��

� $��!��

"��

"��

"��

"��

"�

"��

"��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�%�

"��

"��

��

��

��

�%�

��

��!��

��

$�#�$��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

"��

��

��

��!�

�

��

��

��

"��

"��

"��

��$��

��!� ��

��

��

��#

��

"��

"�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��!��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–11

SECTION 5INITIALIZATION

5–1 ON/OFF Function

Refer to Illustration 1–2 (ON/OFF Function).

The MPH ON/OFF function affects almost all the components of the generator:

� 380/480 V ac is fed to the MPH through the EMC Filter Board, which reduces noisepassing from the generator to the line during x-ray exposures.

� The DC Filter Board consists mainly of a rectifier and a filter. The dc output voltagedepends on the ac input: from 400 V dc to 760 V.

� The Main Power Supply Board includes several functions: 3-phase control (to insure theright level of the 3-phase AC voltage), on/off relays to drive the room distribution (CT1)and generator (CT2) contactors, isolated 220 V ac rectifier (to supply the low voltagepower supplies), dc level measure (measures the dc level from the DC Filter Board andcodes it in three bits).

Power is applied to the Extension Rack as soon as the Room distribution is energized.

� The Command 1 Board includes: on/off logic (to enable and sequence Power On/Off,according to the _SYS_ON command, the DC level 3-phase control and thermoswitchof room power supply autotransformer), on/off relays to feed low voltage supplies (�15V, +5 V, +24 V) to other boards.

� The Command 2 Board includes control of low voltage supplies from the LV1 and LV2Power Supplies (�15 V, +5 V, +24 V).

� Other boards which use the low voltage power supplies: Inverter Board, Heater Board,Rotor Controller Board.

In standby mode, only the Main Power Supply Board, the�15 V, +5V, and +24 V powersupplies LV1 and LV2, and a part of the Command 1 Board, are alive.

In application mode, all boards are powered on.

5–2 On/Off sequencing: Command 1 control

5–2–1 Standby mode - 3 Phase control

Part of the Command 1 Board is alive in standby mode. It checks the presence of the 3-phaseline input, and provides 24 V to supply the ON/OFF switch on the Control console. This partof the board is fed by the low voltage power supplies through four fuses (F2, F3, F4, F5).When the generator is in standby, eight LEDs are lit (DS19, DS20, DS21, DS22, DS11, DS12,DS13 and DS14) if there is no fuse fault; DS15 is lit if there is no phase missing.

The 24 V to supply the Control console switch is created from the -15 V and +15 V supplies,using a regulator which makes -15 V and +9 V.

The three phases from the line input are measured on the Main Power Supply Board. Theresult signal _PH_ON is acquired on the Command 1 for treatment. If one single phase stays atzero volt during more than two cycles (32 ms for 60 Hz operation and 40 ms for 50 Hzoperation), then there are two consequences:

� If the system is OFF, it is not possible to power on the generator (DS15 is off).

� If the system is ON, the _MAIN_DROP signal is set to shut down the power inverters(Rotor Controller, Heater, Main Inverter), and to reset the CPU before the Low VoltagePower Supply disappears (this is maintained for 75 ms from the Main Power Supply).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–12

5–2–2 Power ON sequence

The aim of the power On/Off circuit is to sequence properly the power On and Off of the MPHsub-assemblies, so as to avoid any hazard on the power boards due to abnormal commands.

The On/Off circuit is driven by the following signals:

� SYS_ON: return contact of the Control Console Switch. It initiates the On sequence andcommands directly the room distribution contactor CT1.

� _POW_ON_PU_CTRL: CPU control signal of the generator contactor CT2 fordiagnostic purposes.

� Hardware Command 1 Switch (IN1): shuts off the generator contactor from the frontpanel (for service use).

The On/Off circuit is controlled by the following signals:

� _ON_ENABLE: this signal indicates that the DC voltage is less than 30 V. The ONsequence is enabled only if the DC level is under 30 V.

� _PH_OK1: indicates that the 3-phase input voltage is correct.

� _PH_OK: indicates that the Room Transformer is in normal condition (T < 125°C) or(T < 257°F).

The On/Off circuit drives the following signals:

� _GEN_ON: commands the Main Power Supply relay which supplies the generatorcontactor CT2 coil.

� PUMP_ON: commands the Main Power Supply relay which supplies 115 V ac to the tubehousing cooling systems.

� PRE_ON: commands the PRE_ON relay to apply low voltage power supplies to otherboards through current resistors.

� LV_ON: commands the ON relay to apply low voltage power supplies directly to theother boards.

Note 1: A thermal switch is built into the Room Distribution Transformer to remove power fromthe generator in the event of an overload. The thermostat is triggered if the transformertemperature reaches 125°C.

Note 2: A console presence signal prevents application of power if the console plug is notconnected.

Note 3: An ON/OFF button, located on Distribution Board MPH A6–A3, can be used by the FieldEngineer.

The ON sequence is as follows (refer to Illustration 1–3, MPH On Sequence):

� Supply the Room Distribution Panel (CT1 contactor command _SYS_ON).

� Power applied through current limiting resistors (R280, R281, R282, R283) to electronicboards (PRE_ON signal).

� Power applied directly to electronic boards (BT_ON signal and X6 relay) and to the tubehousing cooling systems (_PUMP_ON signal).

� Drive the main generator contactor CT1 on (_GEN_ON signal).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–13

ILLUSTRATION 1–3MPH ON SEQUENCE

� � ��

��

��

� ��

��

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

When the generator is ON, the following front panel green LEDs are lit:

� On Command 1 Board:

– DS19, DS20, DS21, DS22, DS11, DS12, DS13 and DS14 indicate correct operationof the low voltage power supplies and fuses.

– DS15 indicates a normal 3-phase condition.

– DS16, DS17, and DS18 indicate low voltage supply to other boards.

� On Command 2 Board:

– DS6, DS7, DS8 and DS9 indicate low voltage supplies on the Command 2 Board.

– DS2 indicates that the �15 V, +5 V, +24 V levels are correct.

� On PU_CTRL_CPU Board:

– DP5 V, DP15 V, DM15 V, DS8, DS9, and DS10 indicate low voltage supply of thePU_CTRL_CPU Board.

� On ROOM_IF_CPU Board:

– DS3, DS5, and DS4 indicate low voltage supply of the ROOM_IF_CPU Board.

5–2–3 Power OFF sequence

The OFF sequence is as follows (refer to Illustration 1–4, MPH Off Sequence):

� Switch off the room distribution (_SYS_ON signal), the tube housing cooling system(_PUMP_ON signal).

� Switch off direct dc supply to the electronic boards (LV_ON signal). This stops powerinverter commands without causing problems with the logic circuits.

� Switch off the current-limited dc supply to the electronic boards (PRE_ON signal).

� Switch off Contactor CT2.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–14

ILLUSTRATION 1–4OFF SEQUENCE

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–15

ILLUSTRATION 1–5MAIN POWER SUPPLY BOARD: CONTACTORS, POWER-ON, AND AC-DC CONTROL

��

��

��

��!

��!

$�#�$��

��

��

�� #

$� ��$��

$��$��

��!��

��

!�'%&��

��

��

��

��

�� #

��

��!��

��!��

��!

��

��

��

��

��$��$� ��

��$��$� ��

$��$��$� �

$��$��

$��$��

��!��

$��$��$��

��

��

��

��

��

� � ��

� ��

��

� ��

��

!�'%&

��

"�

"

"

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–16

5–3 Main Power Supply Contactors and Power Control

Refer to Illustration 1–5 (Main Power Supply Board: Contactors, Power-on, and AC-DCControl).

5–3–1 LV Power Supplies DC supply

In standby mode, the Low Voltage Power Supplies are alive, so as to power part of theCommand 1 Board, and the Main Power Supply Board. When there is a line voltage drop, theMPH must react in order to shut off properly inverters; this requires the Low Voltage PowerSupplies to be maintained for at least 75 ms. This is done by the circuit described here:

The generator auto-transformer features an isolated 220 V winding. This voltage is rectifiedand filtered on the Main Power Supply Board by a diode bridge and aluminum capacitors. TheLow Voltage Power Supplies are fed directly by this 310 V dc voltage.

When the MPH is in standby mode, this circuit is running. The 310 V dc is present on the MainPower Supply Board, indicated by DS12 warning neon.

When the MPH is driven OFF, the maintain capacitors are discharged through resistor R85.Disappearance of the DS12 light indicates full discharge.

5–3–2 Contactors power on

The MPH includes two contactors, one in the Room Distribution Panel, the other on theCabinet Rear Panel. These contactors are driven by 220 V (for 50 Hz operation) or 240 V (for60 Hz operation), controlled by 12 V or 24 V relays on the Main Power Supply Board. Thepresence of the 220/240 V is indicated by DS10 neon.

Three relays on the Main Power Supply Board are driven during the ON/OFF sequence:

� X1 is energized by _SYS_ON signal from the Command 1 Board. It drives the openingor the closure of CT1, the room distribution contactor.

� X2 is energized by _GEN_ON signal from the Command 1 Board. It drives the openingor the closure of CT2, the generator contactor.

� X3 is energized by _PUMP_ON signal from the Command 1 Board. It supplies theselected tube housing cooling system with 115 V ac. This 115 V ac is indicated by DS5neon.

When these relays are energized, DS6, DS11, and DS12 yellow LEDs are lit.

5–3–3 AC power control

The check of the three phases is shared between the Command 1 Board and the Main PowerSupply Board. On this last board, the three phases are measured two by two, this measure isisolated by two transformers. The obtained voltages are then rectified and compared to areference level, in order to detect phase loss. See Illustration 1–6 (Phase Loss Detection). Theinformation is sent to the Command 1 Board for processing.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–17

ILLUSTRATION 1–6PHASE LOSS DETECTION

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

5–3–4 DC power control

The dc power supply is generated on the DC Filter Board. This dc level is measured on theboard by a resistive bridge, and compared to different levels on the Main Power Supply Board.

The dc measurement circuit on the Main Power Supply Board includes:

� Five comparators which define seven dc ranges.

� An encoder.

� An optic coupler on each of the output signals.

Note: Since this circuit is at line potential, it is supplied through an isolated DC/DC converter(U2). When the MPH is in standby mode, it is supplied by an isolated �15 V supply,indicated by green LEDs DS3 and DS4. When the generator contactor is switched on, thedc level rises to its nominal value (between 480 V and 750 V), and green LEDs DS1 andDS2 are lit. The optic couplers allow isolation between the line potential level andCommand 1 ground level.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–18

The seven DC ranges are defined as follows:

Range/Signal _ON_ENABLE MEAS_DC_BUS1 MEAS_DC_BUS0 _OK_DC_BUS

E < 30 V 0 0 0 1

30 V < E < 400 V 1 0 0 1

400 V < E < 480 V 1 0 0 0

480 V < E < 557 V 1 0 1 0

557 V < E < 646 V 1 1 0 0

646 V < E < 762 V 1 1 1 0

762 V < E 1 1 1 1

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–19

ILLUSTRATION 1–7DC POWER SUPPLY

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–20

5–4 DC Power Supply generation

Refer to Illustration 1–7 (DC Power Supply).

The dc supply for the three MPH DC/AC inverters (kV Rotor and Heater) is generated by theDC Filter Board. The ac line voltage supplies this board through three 100 A fuses (F1, F2,F3). It is rectified by a diode bridge underneath the board and filtered by capacitors.

The outputs are fed to:

� The main MPH 80 kW inverter, through the air inductances.

� Rotor Control Board, through a 15 Amps fuse (F4).

� Heater Board, through a 3 Amps fuse (F5).

The DC level is measured by a resistive divider at the far end of the power line (after the fuses)so as to ensure the right diagnosis if the fuse blows.

The filter discharge is made by a 2.7 k� resistor, which is applied to the capacitors when thegenerator contactor is commanded OFF, by the auxiliary contact of CT2.

The presence of the DC level is indicated on the DC Filter Board by neon DS1.

5–5 Power Supply-related Error Codes

Power supply signals status are tested each 10 ms. If an error is detected, the correspondingerror code (see below) is sent to the APPLICATION task.


420 MAIN_DROP MAIN_DROP signal reset detection

410 DC_BUS_ERROR DC_BUS_FAULT (DC_BUS < 400V) signal status error

411 FPS_ERROR FPS_FAULT signal; status error

412 LV_SUPPLY_ERROR LV_ENABLE (low voltage status) signal; status error

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–21

Blank page.

THEORY OF OPERATIONG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–22

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–8

RO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OLLE

R F

UN

CT

ION

��

"��"�

"��

�� $

$��$��

�� $�!�

� �$�� $��

��$��

��

��

� �$��

�� $

$��$��$��

�� $� ��

��$��!

�� $� �$

��

��

��

��

��

"�

� �$��$��

� �$��$��

$��$� �$��

��

��

� �

��

��

� ��

��

��

��!��

�%��

� ��#� ��#

��

��$��$��

��

��

��

��

�

�"��

��

�� "#

$��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–23

SECTION 6ROTOR CONTROLLER FUNCTION

6–1 Introduction

Refer to Illustration 1–8 (Rotor Controller Function).

The MPH Rotor Controller function involves the following sub-assemblies:

� PU–CTRL Board: ROOM_IF_CPU in Extension Rack command interface and rotorsequence control.

� Command 2 Board: Rotor Controller Inverter command and control, inverter protection.

� Rotor Control Board: Rotor Controller Inverter power board and stator selection.

� Stators, Tube #1 and Tube #2.

The main features of the MPH Rotor Control function are:

� Low Speed 60 Hz (3600 rpm) and High Speed 180 Hz (10800 rpm) commands. For GeTube or 50 Hz or 150 Mz for CGR Tube.

� No TIRC. The Rotor Controller is a PWB assembly.

� Two tubes with 23/23 (Ge) stator or two tubes with 50/110 � (CGR) stator. The two statortypes cannot be mixed.

� Current check through the stator connection to insure rotor rotation.

� Inverter maximum current protection against short circuit.

� Firmware thermal protection of the MPH Rotor Controller inverter.

� Extensive Diagnostics of Rotor Controller function. All InSite compatible.

6–2 Rotor Function Sequencing

At the system level, the sequence is as follows:

� ROOM_IF_CPU sends an exposure sequence start signal to PU_CTRL_CPU, which setsrotor speed and rotation commands.

� PU_CTRL_CPU reads the acceleration or braking time for selected tube from thedatabase, according to tube rotor type. Timing for an MX100 x-ray tube is as follows:

ACCELERATION BRAKING

0 to LS 0 to HS LS to HS HS to LS HS to 0 LS to 0

0.8 sec 1.2 sec 0.8 sec 0.85 sec 6.0 sec 2.0 sec

� For other tubes, see Service Manual.

� The ROTOR task updates the rotor state machine and sets rotor command signals. It setsappropriate time delays to accelerate or brake the rotor and to wait for rotor signal statussignals.

The sequence at generator level is described below. Refer to Illustration 1–9 (Rotor ControllerSequences Timing for a Stator 23/23).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–24

The various signals involved in the rotor function are shared by the PU_CTRL_CPU Boardand the Command 2 Board. The PU_CTRL_CPU controls the sequence with transitions onthe command signals (RUN_ROTOR, HI_SPEED, ACCEL and BRAKE), and checks thatthe returns are correct (CUR_START_ON, _LS_RTN). These signals are:

� RUN_ROTOR: When active (high), it commands the start of the rotor controller.

� HI_SPEED: When active (high), the rotor controller is driven in High Speed mode, whennot active (low), the Low Speed mode is selected.

� ACCEL: When active (high), the rotor controller is driven in Acceleration mode, whenLow, the running mode is selected.

� BRAKE: When active (high), the rotor controller is driven in Brake mode.

� CUR_START_ON: Return from the Command 2 Board. When active (high), indicatesthat there is some current flowing through the stator winding. It is checked by the CPUat different times during the sequence (see illustration).

� _LS_RTN: Return from Rotor Control Board. When active (low), indicates that theCommand 2 Board has selected Low Speed. When not active (high), indicates that HighSpeed is selected. It is checked by the PU_CTRL_CPU at different times during thesequence (see illustration).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–25

ILLUSTRATION 1–9ROTOR CONTROLLER SEQUENCES

��&��

��&

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

& �� &

��&��

��&

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

& �� &

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� $ "% �� !#� �� $ "% �� !#�


E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–26

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–10

CO

MM

AN

D 2 B

OA

RD

BLO

CK

DIA

GR

AM

– RO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OLLE

R

��

��!��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� $��

��

��

��

��"��

�� #

��

��#��

��

��

��

��

� ��!��

��#

��

� $��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� #��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–27

6–3 Rotor Controller Command

Refer to Illustration 1–10 (Command 2 Board Block Diagram – Rotor Controller).

The principle of the Rotor Controller Inverter function stems from the Pulse WidthModulation (PWM) of the IGBT commands. In contrast to the other MPH inverters, there isno regulation loop in the Rotor Controller function. This means that there is no measurementfeedback to adapt the command to a reference. Most functions are supported by an EPLDwhich manages the PWM and inverter safety checks.

The PWM command allows a choice of rotor speed, by driving the Rotor Controller with asine wave current at 60 Hz or 50 Hz in low speed mode (3600 rpm), or at 180 Hz or 150 Hz inhigh speed mode (10800 rpm). The Brake mode is obtained with a high frequency commandof the rotor controller inverter (at 1.4 kHz) which generates a DC current in the stator windings(no brake for CGR Tube).

6–3–1 Rotor controller: Command 2 EPLD

The Command 2 Rotor controller EPLD has several functions:

� Receive commands from the CPU. There are four commands: RUN_ROTOR (startcommands), ACCEL (Acceleration mode selection), BRAKE (Brake mode selection),HI_SPEED (High or Low speed selection).

� Receive dc measurements from the Command 1 Board. The dc range specified byBUS_DC_MEAS0 and BUS_DC_MEAS1 conditions the pulse width of the IGBTcommands. The greater the DC level, the shorter the pulses.

� Receive safety signals to protect the Rotor Controller Inverter: Maximum currentdetection in the inverter protects it against short circuits (START_CUR_MONIT_A/B),minimum and maximum dc level check (_DC_BUS_EN).

� Receive type of stator to drive (23–23 or 50–110 ohms) by STATOR 23–23 signal of CPUBoard. A choise of IGBT commands and the maximum current level safety is made forthe two types of stator.

� Generate IGBT commands. These commands are driven by two state machines whichtakes into account the CPU commands, the DC level and the safety signals.

� Drive the HIGH_SPEED selection relay, as a function of the speed selection mode.

� Inform the CPU of rotor controller status: the running mode is described by the_CUR_START_ON signal, the safety mode is described by the _START_OVL signal.

6–3–2 IGBT command drivers

There are twelve IGBT drivers; six ON commands, six OFF commands. All these commandsare driven by the EPLD and controlled by the LV_ENABLE signal. This control disables thecommands when the low voltage supplies drop under certain limits, with a complete hardwarecheck after the EPLD and the buffers. This system insures that even if the EPLD program failsdue to a low voltage fault, there should be no possibility of damaging the Rotor Controllerinverter because of a short circuit command.

6–3–3 Phase measurements and maximum current detection

In order to be sure that the tube rotor is rotating, two phases of the stator current are measuredon the Rotor Control Board. The third phase is rebuilt on the Command 2 Board, by assumingthat the sum of the phase currents is equal to zero. Each phase current is filtered and comparedto a reference current corresponding to 0.2 Amps. This result is read by the EPLD which usesit to generate the _CUR_START_ON signal, indicating that there is some current flowingthrough the selected stator. This status is indicated by yellow LED DS4.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–28

The dc current flow from the Rotor Control Board to the DC Filter Board is also measured, todetect inverter short circuits and protect the IGBTs. This measurement, made on the RotorControl Board, is compared to a reference value on the Command 2 Board, to generate a safetysignal (START_OVL) corresponding to 50 A in the inverter. When this condition appears, asignal is set to inform the CPU and a red LED (DS3) is lit.

6–3–4 High Speed capacitors selection

The MPH Rotor Controller requires a phase shift depending on the 60 Hz/180 Hz or50/150 Hz command. This is done on the Rotor Control Board by a relay which connectscapacitors between the inverter and the stator on the auxiliary and main phases. The commandsignal for this relay is indicated on the Command 2 Board by yellow LED DS5. When thisLED is lit, this means that the Rotor Controller is in Low Speed mode. One contact of the relayprovides a signal which is returned directly to the CPU to acknowledge the command of theRotor Controller High Speed or Low Speed Mode. (Different capacitors are used for the23/23 (GE) and 50/110 � (CGR) stators.)

THEORY OF OPERATION

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–29

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–11

RO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OLLE

R B

OA

RD

BLO

CK

DIA

GR

AM

115 Vac

HS RELAY CMD

HS RELAY RETURN

IGBT CMDS

TUBE SELECTION

TUBE SEL RETURN

ROTOR CONTROLLER

INVERTER

WITH 6 IGBT’S

2 PHASE

MEASUREMENT

OVER CURRENT

COMMON MEASURE

COOLING CMD

OIL PUMP OR BLOWER

HIGH SPEEDRELAY AND

CAPACITORS

TUBE

SELECTION

MAINPS

DC_PS

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CASING

CASINGNb 2

Nb 1

240 Vdc 370 Vdc± ±

Q1–Q2–Q3–Q4–Q5–Q6

X5

X2

X1

T7–T8 T9

T1–T2–T3–T4–T5–T6

CHILLER BOARD

START–COOLING

WATER CIRCULATION

PU_CTRL_ CPU Tube safeties (70 C

° °

C)/40

TO CHILLER

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–30

6–4 Rotor Controller Power Inverter

Refer to Illustration 1–11 (Rotor Control Board Block Diagram).

The last item in the MPH rotor controller function is the Rotor Control Board. This is a powerboard driven by the Command 2 Board, and consists mainly of an inverter and related currentmeasurement circuits.

6–4–1 Rotor controller inverter

Since the tube stator is a bi-phase type, the ROTCTL inverter is a three-leg inverter with sixIGBTs. Each of the six IGBT drivers consists of an impulse transformer (three windings1:3:3) and zener diodes. There is no floating power supply to generate the IGBT commands.The inverter itself is fed by the dc supply from the DC Filter Board, between 400 V dc to680 V dc nominal values. The presence of this voltage on Rotor Control Board is indicated byneon DS1. The dc voltage is changed to ac voltages between the three phases by the PWMcommands from the Command 2 Board. The main and auxiliary phases pass through the highspeed selection relay and the tube selection relay before reaching the stator. The commonphase is directly connected to the stators permanently.

6–4–2 Current measurements

Three currents are measured on Rotor Control Board:

� Main and Auxiliary currents are measured by two current transformers (ratio 150:1) inorder to identify whether there is any current flowing though the stator (the commonphase is calculated on the Command 2 Board from the two phases already measured).

� The current flow from the DC Supply Board is measured by a current transformer(ratio 1:1) in order to identify an inverter short circuit. If this occurs, the stator currentsare shorted by the inverter short circuit and it is not possible to measure them using themain and auxiliary current transformers.

6–4–3 High Speed capacitors

In High Speed mode, two capacitors are connected between the inverter and the stator, in orderto modify the angle between the phase voltages. The selection is made by a relay driven by theCommand 2 Board rotor EPLD. A contact of this relay is used to give an acknowledgementstatus signal, which is returned to the CPU. When the rotor is driven in Low Speed mode, therelay is energized, and yellow LED DS2 is lit. The position of the capacitors between theinverter and the tube is shown in Illustration 1–12 (High Speed Capacitors for stator GE(23/23)).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–31

ILLUSTRATION 1–12HIGH SPEED CAPACITORS FOR STATOR GE (23/23)

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

6–4–4 Tube housing cooling

The tube housing cooling ac power supply is generated in the MPH by the generatorauto-transformer, and connected to the casings through the Main Power Supply Board andRotor Control Board. This voltage is 115 V ac; its presence is signalled on the Rotor ControlBoard by neon DS6. It is switched to one tube or the other by the same tube selection relay asthe rotor controller inverter outputs.

In the case of a water-cooled tube, the Chiller Board (option) is installed on the generator doorbeside the low-voltage power supplies. The Board controls the power supply to an externalchiller which initiates tube cooling. During chiller operation, the DS1 or DS2 indicator lampon the Chiller Board is lit, and water circulation information is sent to the CPU via the Rotorand Command 2 Chiller Boards.

6–5 Rotor Controller Error Handling

When no exposure is in progress, rotor status signals are tested every 10 ms. If an error isdetected, the corresponding error signal, HE_ROTOR, is generated to the APPLICATIONtask.

During an exposure, status signals that must change are not tested for 200 ms after a newcommand. All other status signals are tested every 10 ms. If an error is detected, thecorresponding error code is sent to the APPLICATION task. The error code depends on thesignal and on the state of the rotor when the error was generated.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–32


720 CUR_ST_HS_ACC CUR_START_ON (current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while accelerating to high speed.

721 CUR_ST_HS_RUN CUR_START_ON (current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while rotor running in high speed.

722 CUR_ST_HS_BR CUR_START_ON (current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while braking from high speed.

723 CUR_ST_LS_ACC CUR_START_ON (current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while accelerating to low speed.

724 CUR_ST_LS_RUN CUR_START_ON (current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while rotor running in low speed.

725 CUR_ST_LS_BR CUR_START_ON (current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while braking from low speed.

710 ST_OVL_HS_ACC START_OVL (over current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while accelerating to high speed

711 ST_OVL_HS_RUN START_OVL (over current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while rotor running in high speed.

712 ST_OVL_HS_BR START_OVL (over current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while braking from high speed.

713 ST_OVL_LS_ACC START_OVL (over current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while accelerating to low speed.

714 ST_OVL_LS_RUN START_OVL (over current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while rotor running in low speed.

717 ST_OVL_LS_BR START_OVL (over current in rotor controller circuit) signal;status error while braking from low speed.

718 LS_RTN_ERR LS_RTN (low speed selection status) status signal error.

726 HE_ROTOR Rotor status signal error while rotor not activated

507 ROT_CMD_TUB_CH New rotor command while tube changing

719 THERM_ROT Maximum rotor thermal value reached

6–6 Rotor Controller Thermal Protection

Rotor inverter thermal status is calculated every 10 ms. If the maximum value is reached, anerror message is sent to the display.

After a reset, the last recorded values of rotor thermal status are updated with elapsed time.

When Rad preparation is requested by the user, the rotor margin (capacity of rotor inverter toexecute the next rotor acceleration and brake sequence) is calculated.

If the next sequence cannot be executed because of a thermal error, the rotor command isdelayed, and the green Prep lamp on Control Console flashes.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–33

ILLUSTRATION 1–13HEATER FUNCTION

��

$��

$�

$��

�� &�� &$�

�&�� &$��$�

�"��&$��$�

�� !� &$��$�

&��&$��$�

��

��

��

�

��

�

�!��

$�

&��& !��

��

&��&��

��

��

��

�� &�� &$�

�� &��&$�

$�

��

��&$�& �

��&$�& �

�� &�&$�

��&$�& �

��&$�& �

�� &�&$�

��

$�

$�

$�

$�

$�

��

��

��

��"��

��

$�

$��

!��

��

�� &��&$�

�!��

��

�#� ��

�!$

��

��!��%

��!��%

�� $��

&��&�!�&��

�� $��

��

$�

��"��

$�

��"��

��&$�

��&$�

��

��&$�

��&$�

�

�

� ��

��

��

��

��

��!��

��

��

�

��&��&��!

��

� ��

�$��!��

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–34

SECTION 7HEATER FUNCTION

7–1 Introduction

Refer to Illustration 1–13 (Heater Function).

The MPH Heater function involves the following sub-assemblies:

� ROOM_IF_CPU: Sends radiography and fluoroscopy preparation commands.

� PU_CTRL_CPU Board: Heater sequence control.

� Command 2 Board: Heater Inverters (XS and XL) command and control, inverterprotection.

� Heater Board: Heater inverters and tube selection relays.

� HV Tank: Heater transformers

(XS Tube1, XL Tube 1, XS Tube 2, XL Tube 2).

� Tube #1 and Tube #2 filaments.

The main features of the MPH Heater function are:

� Two independent inverters: One for Small Focus XS, one for Large Focus XL.

� Maximum Current up to 10 A in Boost Mode.

� RMS filament current value instantaneous regulation.

� Filament protection against maximum currents.

� Open filament detection.

� Heater inverters protection against maximum currents.

� Extensive diagnostics of the Heater function. All InSite compatible.

7–2 Heater Function Sequencing

Sequencing of the Heater function is controlled by the CPU. Depending on the required mA,CPU drive the heater current reference. The sequence of the commands between CPU and theCommand 2 Boards is shown in Illustration 1–14 (Heater Sequence).

� ROOM_IF_CPU sends an exposure start signal to PU_CTRL_CPU which sets heatercommands: OFF, pre-heat, acquisition, boost.

� The APPLICATION task sends commands to the HEATER task. This updates the heaterstate machine for the corresponding focus, and sets the heater command signals.

The definition of the signals is:

� RUN_HEAT_XS (or XL): instructs the Command 2 Board to drive the Heater inverterXS (or XL).

� SET_HEATER_XS (or XL): analog reference value for the XS (or XL) heater current.

� _PRE_HEAT: sets the selected focus to pre-heat mode.

� BOOST: sets the selected focus to Boost mode.

� XS: selects the focus (XS or XL).

� _PRESENCE_XS (resp XL): indicates to the CPU that the corresponding focus isnormally driven.

THEORY OF OPERATION

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–35

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–14

HE

AT

ER

SE

QU

EN

CE

��

��

��

��

��

�%�&&��%�$�)�'��

�� &��%�$�)�'��

�%�&&��%�$�)�'��

�� &��%�$�)�'��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

� � � �

��

��!&��##&'�'�!�

� �� +��#%��!��%��( �'�#"

� �*$#&(%��)�'��!��%��( �'�#"

�

�#'�&�

�


E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–36

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–15

CO

MM

AN

D 2 B

OA

RD

BLO

CK

DIA

GR

AM

– HE

AT

ER

CO

NT

RO

L

HEATER

REFERENCE

MODE SEL

NETWORKLEVEL

ROTCTL CLOCKS

RUN XLMODE SEL

HEATERXL CURRENTREFERENCE

LV POWERSUPPLY

EPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

DETECTION

FUNCTION CURRENTMEASURE

MINIMUM

DETECTION

ZERO

DETECTION

MAXIMUMCURRENT

LEVEL

LV_EN

CONTROL

XL IGBT CMDS

LV_ENABLE

MINIMUMXL CURRENTDETECTION

ZEROXL CURRENTDETECTION

XL SHORT CCTDETECTION

XL SQUARE

FUNCTION

HEATER XLCURRENTMEASURE

24 V

CMD1

CMD1

CMD2STARTER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

CMD2STARTER

+ –

+

+

+

–

–

–

HEATER STATE

U23

U36–U38

U36–U38

U31

U29

U1U32

U2U34

U22

U20

U1–U6

U2

U8

U34

U32

U41–>U45 Q5

U21 U6–U21

U23 U8–U23

U1

U2

SELECTION

LV_ENABLE

XS CURRENT

XS SQUARE HEATER XS

RUN XS

XS SHORT CCT

XS CURRENT XS CURRENT

XS IGBT CMDS

SAFETY

SAFETY

TUBE SWITCHCOMMAND

& STATE

U11

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–37

7–3 Heater Command

Refer to Illustration 1–15 (Command 2 Board Block Diagram – Heater Control).

The filament heating function is controlled by the Command 2 Board, the main purpose ofwhich is to acquire current measurements from the heater inverters, compare them to areference coming from the CPU Board, and regulate the commands so that the measurementsmatch the reference.

Since Heater Board includes two independent inverters, one for the small focus XS and onefor the large focus XL, the heater function on the Command 2 Board is totally symmetrical. Itfeatures two regulation loops, two sets of circuit for current safety control, two sets of IGBTdrivers, but only one EPLD (containing two equivalent programs).

7–3–1 Heater control: Command 2 EPLD

The Command 2 heater EPLD has several functions:

� Acquire the heater commands from the CPU. These are: R_HEAT_XL and R_HEAT_XS(command of the XL and XS inverters), BOOST (enables boost mode for 500 ms),_GE_TUBE (allows selection of the 5.5, 7.1 safety levels) and XS (selects which filamentis in prelight mode).

� Send heater statuses to the CPU: _PRESENCE_XL and _PRESENCE_XS (indicate thatthe XL/XS inverter is running), HEATFAULT_XL and HEATFAULT_XS (indicate thatan open circuit or a maximum current was detected), OVERL_XL and OVERL_XS(indicate that the current in the filament was too high).

� Generate IGBT commands to drive the heater inverters. There are two independent statemachines in the heater EPLD. Each pilots an inverter on Heater Board. The statemachines allow correct sequencing of the IGBT commands, one transistor after the other,and take into account the heater safeties in order to stop the inverters correctly. Thesequence is synchronized to the inverter current whenever this current passes throughzero, using the zero current detection signals (IPMIN_XL and XS, INMIN_XL and XS).

� The heater function EPLD is also used to decode diagnostic bits, to configure theCommand 2 Board (both rotor controller and heater functions) for test conditions.

7–3–2 IGBT command drivers

Four commands are necessary to drive the heater inverters. Two commands for each inverter.All these commands are driven by the EPLD and controlled by the LV_ENABLE signal. Thiscontrol disables the commands when the low voltage supplies drop under certain limits, with acomplete hardware control after the EPLD and the buffers. This system insures that even if theEPLD gets lost due to a low voltage fault, there should be no possibility of damaging the heaterinverters because of a short circuit command.

7–3–3 RMS heater current measure regulation

Since the most important parameter in the heater function is the RMS value of the filamentcurrent, the heater regulation loop works directly with the square of the current:

� The reference delivered by the CPU is equal to Ich2/10.

� The primary current is measured and its square function is calculated by using a multiplierwith both inputs at the same potential. This forms Imeas2/10.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–38

The principle of regulation is very simple. The two signals are compared; after filtering, thedifference is compared to zero. When (Imeas2/10 - Ich2/10) < 0 a new IGBT command is issuedin order to generate a current pulse into the transformer and increase the RMS value of thefilament current.

7–3–4 Heater inverters protection

The heater inverters are protected against:

� Over current in the inverter itself. Current in the switches is measured on Heater Boardand compared to a reference on the Command 2 Board. If the real current is greater than26 Amps or lower than -26 Amps, then the EPLD stops the corresponding state machineand signals the fault.

� Open circuit of the filament, or open circuit of the path between the inverter and thefilament. This is detected by the lack of diode current in the inverter: a minimum currentlevel has to be detected during the diode on time (ICH_SQUARED_XL or XS signals).

Whenever one of these two faults appears there is a visible indication on the Command 2Board by two LEDs (DS12 for XS maximum current, DS13 for XL maximum current). Thefaults are signalled to the CPU Board, by the HEATFAULT_XS and HEATFAULT_XLsignals.

7–3–5 Filament protection

The Command 2 Board and the CPU Board provide tube filament protection to preventsoverheating over too long a period of time. The requested current is limited by clamping thecurrent reference delivered by the CPU, and the actual current is monitored by computing themean of the square of the heater transformer primary current (measured on the Heater Board).The values used (shown below) depend on the mode and the filament (example for Ge tube).

XS current (A) XL current (A)

Mode CPU Clamp CMD2 Safety CPU Clamp CMD2 Safety

pre-heat 2.7 3.0 2.7 3.0

Prep 5.5 5.86 7.1 7.48

Boost 10 10.0 10 10.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–39

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–16

HE

AT

ER

BO

AR

D B

LOC

K D

IAG

RA

M

XS CURRENTMEASUREMENT

XL CURRENTMEASUREMENT

HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBTS

SMALL FOCUS

LARGE FOCUS

TUBE SELECT.TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

HV SWITCHCOMMAND

AND STATUS

TUBE SELECTION

TUBE SEL RETURN

XS IGBT CMDS

XL IGBT CMDS HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBTS

SMALL FOCUS

TUBE SELECT.

LARGE FOCUS

TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

HV TANK

HV TANK

HV TANK

DC_PS240 Vdc – 370 Vdc± ±

T201–T202

T203

T101–T102

T103

Q201–Q202–C205

Q101–Q102–C105

X301

X301

X302

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–40

7–4 Heater Power inverter and HV Tank heater transformers

The power part of the MPH heater function is performed by the Heater Board and the HV Tankheater transformers.

7–4–1 Heater inverters

Refer to Illustration 1–16 (Heater Board Block Diagram).

The Heater Board consists mainly of two equivalent inverters, one for each focus, and the tubeselection relays.

Each inverter is an hypo-resonant inverter with two IGBTs. The resonant frequency is about20 kHZ. It is designed to work only with discontinuous current pulses, increase of the RMSvalue being achieved by raising the pulse repetition frequency.

The IGBT drivers on Heater Board consist of 1:1 impulse transformers and storing capacitors.The IGBT gates are driven at 15 V when conducting.

Refer to Illustration 1–17 (Heater Inverter). The inverter resonant circuit consists of acapacitor (220 nF) located on the Heater Board and an inductor which is in fact the leakageinductance of the HV Tank heater transformer. The resonant current flows through theswitches (IGBT and diodes alternately) and the resonant circuit. The primary currents aremeasured by two current transformers (one for each focus) of ratio 10:1.

The inverter is powered from the DC Filter Board, (400 V to 680 V, depending on the line inputvoltage). The presence of the dc voltage on the Heater Board is indicated by neon DS101.

ILLUSTRATION 1–17HEATER INVERTER

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

��

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–41

7–4–2 High Voltage Tank heater transformers

There are four heater transformers inside the High Voltage tank, as shown in Illustration 1–13,(MPH Heater Function), one for each focus of each tube. They present 80 turns at the primaryand 36 turns at the secondary. Their leakage inductance is equal to about 250 �H; this is theserial inductance of the resonant circuit.

7–5 Heater Error Handling

When no exposure is in progress, heater status signals are tested every 10 ms. If an error isdetected, the corresponding error signal, HE_HEAT_XL (error on large focus signals status)or HE_HEAT_XS (error on small focus signals status), is sent to the APPLICATION task.

During an exposure, status signals that must change are not tested for 200 ms after a newcommand. All other status signals are tested every 10 ms. If an error is detected, thecorresponding error code is sent to the APPLICATION task. The error code depends on thesignal and on the state of the heater when the error was generated.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–42

ErrorCode

Name Cause

300 HEATF_XL_PREH HEATFAULT_XL signal;status error on large focus, in pre-heat state

301 HEATF_XL_BOOST HEATFAULT_XL signal;status error on large focus, in boost state

302 HEATF_XL_HEAT HEATFAULT_XL signal;status error on large focus, in acquisition state

303 PRES_XL_PREH PRESENCE_XL (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on large focus, in pre-heat state

304 PRES_XL_BOOST PRESENCE_XL (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on large focus, in boost state

305 PRES_XL_HEAT PRESENCE_XL (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on large focus, in acquisition state

306 OVER_XL_PREH OVER_XL (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on large focus, in pre-heat state

307 OVER_XL_BOOST OVER_XL (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on large focus, in boost state

308 OVER_XL_HEAT OVER_XL (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on large focus, in acquisition state

309 HE_HEAT_XL heater signals; status error on large focus, out of exposure

320 HEATF_XS_PREH HEATFAULT_XS signal;status error on small focus, in pre-heat state

321 HEATF_XS_BOOST HEATFAULT_XS signal;status error on small focus, in boost state

322 HEATF_XS_HEAT HEATFAULT_XS signal;status error on small focus, in acquisition state

323 PRES_XS_PREH PRESENCE_XS (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on small focus, in pre-heat state

324 PRES_XS_BOOST PRESENCE_XS (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on small focus, in boost state

325 PRES_XS_HEAT PRESENCE_XS (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on small focus, in acquisition state

326 OVER_XS_PREH OVER_XS (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on small focus, in pre-heat state

327 OVER_XS_BOOST OVER_XS (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on small focus, in boost state

328 OVER_XS_HEAT OVER_XS (current in heater control circuit) signal;status error on small focus, in acquisition state

329 HE_HEAT_XS heater signals; status error on small focus, out of exposure

540 END_OF_T_BOOST End of boost command delay reached

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–43

ILLUSTRATION 1–18kV GENERATION FUNCTION

��

�(! #%"�

!"�!�

��% "

��

(��

(��

(��

(��

�&*"��

�&*�" !*��$

�&*�" !*��

�&*�" !

,�*��(

��

*&��*$��(

*��*"�#$�"$

�!��

�&*��#

"��%��$� �

#)#$��

��

�"�&�"# (��

�%(

��

#��$)

�(! #%"�*� ��

"��%�* %$

�&��&�

�*��&*��(

�(!*$��*��(

�%��"

+&

�!��-

�(! #%"�*��

#��$��#

+&�

��#%"�

�&�� &�

(�

��

�

��

�

��&��!"��")

��

�&��$�

"��$��"

��

��$�"

�&

��&��"

��#%!!�)

��#%!!�)

��

��

!$

�"&�"#

!$

"��&�"#

�� $��

! '�"

#%!!�)

��+'

��&�"$�"

(��

(��

�&��$�

�&��$�

�&��$�

�!#*�� #

��&*�%"

(��

(��

(��

�%""��$

��#%"�

(��

+&*��(

(��(

"#��

��

"�#$�"$��*#��$)

*"�#�$*�&*!��

**"�#�$*#��$)

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

�

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–44

SECTION 8KV GENERATION FUNCTION

8–1 Introduction

Refer to Illustration 1–18 (kV Generation Function).

The MPH kV generation function involves the following sub-assemblies:

� ROOM_IF_CPU sends Fluoro or Exposure signal to CPU.

� PU_CTRL_CPU Board: command kV generation sequence control.

� Command 1 Board: kV regulation, kV measure and inverter protection.

� Inverter Board: HF current generation.

� HV Tank: HF transformer, High Voltage tube switching, HV measurement.

� Tube 1 and Tube 2.

The main features of the MPH kV generation function are:

� Main inverter 80 kW at high frequency 50 kHz.

� kV linear regulation by Proportional-Integral corrector.

� Inverter protection against maximum currents.

� HV Tank protection against high mA.

� Tube and cable protection against high voltage.

� Asymmetrical tube spit detection and automatic recovery.

� Extensive diagnostics of the kV generation function.

8–2 Exposure Sequencing

The XRay exposure start sequence is described below; refer to Illustration 1–19 (ExposureSequence).

� When the operator presses the exposure switch, EXPOSURE_ENABLE andEXPOSURE_CMND are sent to the PU_CTRL_CPU Board. These signals are managedunder interrupt.

The EXPOSURE_ENABLE signal is connected directly to the CMDI Board EPLDwhich controls the exposure.

� The PU_CTRL_CPU Board sets kV command signals according to user requests enteredvia the control console. The board sets the kV–ref signal to the correct value, and triggersthe exposure by sending an EXPOSURE_COMMAND signal. This information is sentto the ROOM_IF_CPU for other components (POS, IDC, etc.).

� kV use is monitored on the Command Board, and identified by the signal kV < 75 kV onthe PU_CTRL_CPU Board.

� kV signals are measured on the PU_CTRL_CPU Board.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–45

ILLUSTRATION 1–19EXPOSURE SEQUENCE

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�$�%%��$�#�(�&��

��%��)#�(�&��

�$�%%��)#��(�&��

��

�"" ��)#"%'$�" �!�


E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–46

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–20

CO

MM

AN

D 1 B

OA

RD

BLO

CK

DIA

GR

AM

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETY

REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

KV STATUS

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FILTER

FUSES

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC

ZERO CURRENTDETECTION

MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

LV_ENABLECONTROL

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAXKV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

IGBT COMMANDS

INVERTER CURRENTMEASURE

NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

CMD2

MAINPS

LV

SUPPLIES

MAINPS

HVTANK

KV

RETURN

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

HV TANK

INVERT

CMD2MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+–

+ –

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5U2–U3

U6–U7

U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U58

U36

U19

U29

U37

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47

U17

U18

X8–X9U48U49

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

CMDS +STAT

U38

U26

U17

Q10–>Q21

U45

U4–U5

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

PU_CTRL_CPU

CONTROLCONSOLE

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–47

8–3 kV Command And Control

Refer to Illustration 1–20 (Command 1 Board Block Diagram).

The Command 1 Board main function is to receive kV demands from the PU_CTRL_CPU(kV reference and exposure commands) and, according to these demands, to trigger inverterIGBT commands so that the measured kV is equal to the kV reference. Security functions forkV generation components (Inverter, HV Tank, cables, and tube) are also carried out by theCommand 1 Board.

The Command 1 hardware can be considered as two sections. An analog section deals withmeasurement signals coming from the inverter and the HV Tank, and a logic section(consisting mainly of three EPLDs) communicates with the PU_CTRL_CPU and drives thekV generation process.

8–3–1 Inverter command, kV regulation and safeties: Command 1 EPLDs

The kV generation process is controlled by three EPLDs on the Command 1 Board, each witha specific function:

� COMMAND: this EPLD acquires the exposure command from the PU_CTRL_CPU andsequences IGBT commands.

� REGULATION: this EPLD makes the A/D conversion of the kV_ERROR from theregulation measurement circuits and acts as a corrector. It provides regulation delays forthe COMMAND EPLD.

� SAFETY: this EPLD acquires safety signals from the various detection circuits, andtriggers the SAFETY and RESTARTING_SAFETY signals to correctly terminate theexposure, and communicate the inverter status to the PU_CTRL_CPU.

8–3–2 Inverter command: COMMAND EPLD

The signals sent by the PU_CTRL_CPU to start the exposure are:

� EXPOSURE_ENABLE. Allows the next exposure.

� EXPOSURE_COMMAND. Order to actually start the exposure. It is the image of theExpose Switch or Fluoro Switch.

When these signals are set, the EPLD checks that there are no safety signals from the SAFETYEPLD before releasing the IGBT command sequence. This sequence is controlled by aninternal state machine, and ensures correct sequencing of inverter commands while avoidingany short circuit commands. The state machine is synchronized to the inverter currentmeasure each time this current changes its sign. When a safety signal appears during thesequence, the state machine stops the sequence and remains in a safe state.

The frequency of the inverter can be driven by two circuits:

� The impulse regulation circuit is used at low frequencies. It sends a direct demand to theCOMMAND EPLD which then triggers the next IGBT command (when needed).

� The linear regulation circuit works with the REGULATION EPLD which calculatesnumerically a delay applied to the COMMAND EPLD.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–48

8–3–3 kV regulation: REGULATION EPLD

The main function of this EPLD is to acquire the kV_ERROR signal from the linear regulationcircuit, convert that error to a numerical signal and calculate the new command delay. TheA/D conversion is made as follows: the error is acquired and stored by a capacitor which isdischarged linearly to zero volt. The time needed for this discharge is counted by a 16 MHzclock and acquired in a counter internal to the REGULATION EPLD.

Depending on the measured error, the EPLD calculates the new delay necessary to match thekV reference. The calculation (called correction) takes account:

� Of the present error by multiplying this error by a proportion factor.

� Of the previous measured error; which level is stored in a memory counter internal to theEPLD.

The command delay is constituted in linear mode by the Diode time of the inverter sequence.

8–3–4 kV function safeties: SAFETY EPLD

This EPLD checks all the safety detection circuits of the kV function. There are two levels ofsafety condition:

1. Safety conditions which require a complete stop of the exposure. When these occur, theSAFETY signal is triggered, and indicated to the COMMAND EPLD and to thePU_CTRL_CPU. The COMMAND EPLD stops the inverter drive state machine and thePU_CTRL_CPU resets the EXPOSURE_COMMAND signal. These safeties are:

– FPS_FAULT: indicates that the floating power supplies of the inverter have failed.

– DC_BUS_FAULT indicates that the DC voltage dropped under 400 V.

– EXP_TIME_MAX: indicates that the duration of the exposure exceeded 10 s.

– KV<KV0: indicates that 500 �s after the beginning of the exposure, at least one sideof the kV measure (anode or cathode) has failed to rise properly.

2. Safety conditions which do not require a complete stop of the exposure. When theseappear, the RESTARTING_SAFETY signal is set and indicated to the COMMANDEPLD and to the PU_CTRL_CPU. The COMMAND EPLD stops the inverter drive statemachine and the PU_CTRL_CPU sets the ACK_RESTART signal, if there is no otherproblem. When this signal is set, the SAFETY EPLD counts a 4 ms delay andautomatically restarts the exposure. These safeties are:

– I_INV_MAX: indicates that the inverter current is greater than 900 Amps.

– KV_MAX: indicates that one side of the kV measure is greater than 85 kVs.

– REGUL_OUT: indicates that the regulation system is lost, the kV_ERROR beinggreater than 12 kV.

– mA_MAX: indicates that the tube mA are greater than 1100 mA.

– kV_DROP: indicates a sharp drop of both kV measures (> 1 kV/�s).

– kV_DROP_AN: indicates a sharp drop of the kV+ measure.

– kV_DROP_CAT: indicates a sharp drop of the kV- measure.

Most of these last safeties can appear during tube spits. This is why an automatic recovery isallowed.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–49

8–3–5 Main inverter drivers

The MPH main inverter is driven from the Command 1 Board by fiber optic links. Thecommands are sequenced by the COMMAND EPLD, which triggers the fiber optictransmitting diodes. The supply voltage of these diodes is controlled by the _LV_ENABLEsignal, which shuts off the supply whenever the low voltage power supplies of the electronicboards tend to fail. This allows IGBT commands to be stopped when the front driving logic islost.

8–3–6 kV measure and kV rise waveform

The kV reference coming from the ��CPU is acquired on the Command 1 Board.At the beginning of the exposure, a voltage ramp is started so as to increase the kV_DEMANDsignal progressively. When it reaches 67% of the kV reference, the slope of the ramp isreduced to give a rounded waveform and reach the reference level smoothly. This kV risecircuit also detects the level of the kV_DEMAND. When the level is greater than 100 kV or125 kV, this is signalled to the REGULATION EPLD, which changes the regulation gainaccordingly.

The kV are measured inside the HV Tank, on both polarities. Each HV divider consists of theHV Tank bleeder in series with a resistor on the Command 1 Board. The kV measured iscompared to the kV_DEMAND to create the kV_ERROR, used by the impulse and linearregulation circuits. In service mode, one polarity of the kV measured is replaced by a knownreference, to allow calibration of the initial kV waveform.

The actual kV measure is compared to 75% of the kV reference to form the kV>.75KVNsignal. This signal is sent to the ��CPU to generate the HV_ON signal. The kVmeasure is also sent to the ��CPU.

8–3–7 Inverter current measure

The inverter current is measured for two purposes:

� To synchronize the EPLD state machine. Each time the current changes from an IGBTcurrent to a diode current, the corresponding IGBT command is allowed to be shut off.This is why the zero current detection is used, to insure that the current has actuallychanged sign (from IGBT to diode) before changing state and releasing the IGBTcommand.

� To detect the maximum allowed level of the current in the inverter. If the current is greaterthan 900 A, it is necessary to trigger a safety and stop the exposure. Since this is a commonoccurrence during tube spits, it is a “restartable” safety.


E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–50

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–21

INV

ER

TE

R B

OA

RD

BLO

CK

DIA

GR

AM

240 Vdc 370 Vdc± ±DC_PS

CMD1 IGBT COMMANDSOPTIC

COUPLING

HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 4 IGBT’S

FLOAT. PS COMMANDSFLOATING

LOW VOLTAGE

POWER SUPPLY

INVERTERCURRENTMEASURE

HV TANK

CMD1

CMD1

CMD1

FLOAT. PS RETURN

T11–T12–T21–T22

U11–U12–U21–U22

T1–T2

T3–R98

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–51

8–4 kV Power Inverter and HV Tank

The power part of the kV function is performed by the main inverter and the HV Tanktransformer.

8–4–1 kV main inverter

Refer to Illustration 1–21 (Inverter Board block diagram).

The MPH 80 kW main inverter is a hypo-resonant type inverter whose working frequency is50 kHz. It consists of four IGBTs connected as a full bridge, a resonant capacitor, and aresonant inductor (which is, in fact, the leakage inductance of the High Voltage transformer).

The IGBT commands are triggered by the Command 1 Board through fiber optic links.

Each IGBT gate is connected to a special � 18 V floating power supply provided by theCommand 1 Board. The four floating power supplies are isolated by pulse transformers.These feature return windings, allowing correct secondary driving to be checked.

In order to synchronize the Command 1 EPLD state machine to the current, it is necessary tomeasure the ac current in the inverter. This is the purpose of the inverter current transformer. Itmeasures inverter current with a 500:1 ratio, allowing detection of maximum current(900 Amps), and the change of current sign.

Illustration 1–22 (Main Inverter) shows how the current flows through the inverter, dependingon which IGBT is triggered. The shape of the current waveform depends on the powerrequired by the application, and on the input line voltage.

At low power, the inverter is driven in impulse mode, that is, the pulses are completelyseparated from each other. The RMS value of the current is limited by the repetition frequencyand the delivered power remains low. The command sequence is: T11 alone with D21, T11and T22, D11 and D22, wait, T12 alone with D22, T12 and T21, D12 and D21, wait, and so on.In this case, the waiting delay is defined by the impulse regulation on the Command 1 Board,and is greater than 8 �s.

At higher power, the inverter is driven in linear mode, that is, the pulses are consecutive. Sincethe inverter is closer to the resonance frequency, the peak current and its RMS value aredramatically higher, and the delivered power is much increased. The command sequence is:T11 alone with D21, T11 and T22, D11 and D22, no wait, T12 alone with D22, T12 and T21,D12 and D21, wait and so on. In this case, the waiting delay is defined by the linear regulationon the Command 1 Board, and is shorter than 8 �s.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–52

ILLUSTRATION 1–22MAIN INVERTER

��

��

�

��

�

� ��

� ��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–53

8–4–2 HV Tank transformer

Refer to Illustration 1–23 (HV Tank block diagram).

The HV tank transformer consists of:

� The primary, made of six turns of copper sheet.

� The secondary, made of two groups of six stakes, each of which is an independentwinding with rectifying capability due to full bridge diode and high voltage capacitorfilter. Each group of six is symmetrical, and generates one polarity (-75 kV to 75 kV).

� An iron-silica magnetic circuit.

� Two internal bleed circuits, one for the anode side and one for the cathode side. Eachconsists of a 200 M� (1%) resistor in parallel with a 19.8 pF (5%) capacitor.


E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–54

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–23

HV

TAN

K B

LOC

K D

IAG

RA

MXL XS

TRANSFORMERSTUBE 1

XL XS

TRANSFORMERSTUBE 2

HIGH

VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMER

ANODE

mA MEASURE

CATHODE

mA MEASURE

kV +

MEASURE

kV –

MEASURE

HV SWITCH

KV +

KV –

KV +

KV –

SWITCH STATUS

HEATER

HEATER

INVERT

TUBE 1

TUBE 1

TUBE 2

TUBE 2

CMD1

CMD1

CMD1

HEATER

HEATER

SWITCH CMD

CMD1

kV +kV –

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–55

8–5 kV Function Error Handling

When no exposure is in progress, kV Inverter status signals are tested each 10 ms. If an error isdetected, the corresponding error code, HE_INVERTER_ERROR, sent to the display.

During an exposure:

� The safety signals RESTARTING_SAFETY and SAFETY cause an interrupt when theyare activated. The exposure is stopped, the MPH reads the cause of the safety, and thecorresponding error code is sent display. In case of spit detection the exposure restarts,up to a limit of seven times per exposure.

� The status signal kV_75%kVn is checked 10 ms after the start of the exposure, and theneach 10 ms.

ErrorCode

Name Cause

201 UNKNOWN_RES_SAF RESTARTING_SAFETY signal set with no other signal

202 KV_REGUL_ERROR REGUL_OUT (kV regulation error) signal error (included in RESTARTING_SAFETY signal)

203 KVMAX_FAILURE KV_MAX (maximum kV reached) signal error(included in RESTARTING_SAFETY signal)

204 KV_DROP KV_DROP (quick drop on both sides of kV) signal error(included in RESTARTING_SAFETY signal)

205 KV_DROP_AN KV_DROP_AN (quick drop on positive side) signal error(included in RESTARTING_SAFETY signal)

206 KV_DROP_CAT KV_DROP_CAT (quick drop on negative side) signal error(included in RESTARTING_SAFETY signal)

207 MAX_INV_CURRENT I_INV_MAX (max. current reached in kV inverter) signal error(included in RESTARTING_SAFETY signal)

512 KV75_ERROR KV_75%KVN (kV less than 75% of the kV command 10ms afterthe start of the exposure) signal error

544 EXP_CMD_NOT_OK Exposure command while PU not ready

553 TMAX_10S_OVERFLOW Exposure time reached 10 s (included in SAFETY signal)

551 UNKNOWN_SAFETY SAFETY signal set without any other signal

545 REPETITIVE_ERROR More than seven restarting safeties occurred in one exposure

511 NO_KV_FEEDBACK KV_INFKV0 (kV less than 6 kV after start of the exposure) signalerror (included in SAFETY signal)

513 HE_INVERTER kV signals; status error out of exposure

547 THERM_INV kV inverter thermal error

8–6 kV Inverter Thermal Protection

The thermal status of the kV Inverter is calculated by the MPH software at intervals of 10 ms.When the maximum value is reached, an error message is sent to the display.


E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–56

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–24

mA

FU

NC

TIO

N B

LOC

K D

IAG

RA

M� ��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

�

#�"$�

��

��

#�"��

#�"��

��!

��

��!

��

�

#��

��

#�

��

��#�"��"��

��"#�

"��"#�"$��

"��"��"#�

"��"#�"$�

#��

��

��

#�

��

��

#�"��

#�"��

��

��

� ��

#�"$��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–57

SECTION 9MA FUNCTION

9–1 Introduction

Refer to Illustration 1–24 (mA Function Block Diagram).

The mA function of the MPH involves the following sub-assemblies:

� The CPU Board: acquires the mA measure from the Command 1 Board and handles mAregulation during exposures.

� The Command 1 Board: the mA measure and checks for allowable limits of mA arelocated on this board. Tube current passes through one of several shunt resistors (selectedby the PU_CTRL_CPU Board) for measurement.

� HV Tank: the HV winding terminations are connected to outputs to be looped back onthe Command 1 Board.

� Tube 1 and Tube 2: the tube current flows through the HV cables and from anode tocathode.

9–2 mA Measurement Circuit

The measurement circuit of the mA function is located on the Command 1 Board. This part ofthe board is controlled directly by the the PU_CTRL_CPU Board, with no intervention oflogic command from the Command 1 Board. Several pieces are necessary to that function:mA shunts and corresponding relays, mA testing source, mA differential measure, andMAX_mA detection.

The mA are measured by shunt resistors placed in series with the mA flow. Choice of the shuntis made by the PU_CTRL_CPU, which switches relays according to the expected value of themA. There are three ranges available, coded on two bits (mA x 1 and mA x 10).

Expected mA Range mA_X1 mA_X10

0 to 10 mA x 100 0 0

10 mA to 100 mA x 10 0 1

100 mA to 1000 mA x 1 1 0

Both relays have an auxiliary contact to identify correct switching to the required position.These are indicated by the _STAT_mA_x1 and _STAT_mA_X10 signals. Voltage measuredon the shunt is acquired on the PU_CTRL_CPU and converted by the ADC.

For calibration purposes, the Command 1 Board features an independent current source. Thissource is selectable by the MPH software; it can deliver 10 mA (10mA_SCE_SEL = 1) or100 mA (100 mA_SCE_SEL = 0). This feature allows the PRD to check mA measurement,and allows calibration of the mA loop. During calibration, the operator replaces the mA strapon Command 1 by a multimeter and checks the value of the source, before indicating it to thesystem. The mA calibration does not require any exposure.

In order to protect the tube, the mA are measured and compared to a reference to detect the1100 mA level. If the mA are greater than this value, the mA_MAX safety is triggered andstored in the safety EPLD to stop the inverter state machine.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–58

9–3 mA Regulation

The mA regulation is controlled by the PU_CTRL_CPU. Its inputs are the mA demandaccording to the operator demand and the measured mA from the Command 1 Board. ThePU_CTRL_CPU regulates the mA by increasing or decreasing the heater current reference.

mA loop control in radiology mode:

� The exposure starts with the heat demand sent by the PU_CTRL_CPU. After a delay, theloop control function measures the mA, compares it with the mA reference, and correctsthe heater current demand if necessary.

� This function runs each 1 ms. It sends the heater demand to the Command 2 Board.

Differentiation of the heater demand in fluoro mode:

� For fluoro exposure, CPU sends a new kV and heater demand every 16.6 ms(synchronized with the scan speed of the monitor). MPH temporarily increases the heaterdemand, in order to compensate for filament inertia and to maintain a constant brightnesson the video screen.

� The time constant is sent to the MPH via the NVRAM after a reset.

� This function runs every 1 ms. It sends the heater demand to the Command 2 Board.

9–4 mA Error Handling

ErrorCode

Name Cause

200 MAX_TUBE_CURRENT mA_MAX (maximum tube current) signal error(included in RESTARTING_SAFETY signal)

554 MA_METER_SAT mA measure reached 20 mA in fluoro acquisition

559 NO_MA_FEEDBACK mA measure not reached mA minimum 10 ms after start of exposure. mAminimum depends of selected scale:scale x 100 (fluoro mode) mA min = 0.15 mAscale x 10 (radiography) mA min = 1.5 mAscale x 1 (radiography) mA min = 4 mA

552 ERR_MAS_MAX mAs maximum reached

112 MA_SCALE_ERROR error on status of mA scale selection signals

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–59

ILLUSTRATION 1–25 TUBE SELECTION FUNCTION

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

"��"��

��

"��"��"��

"��"��"��

"��"��"��

"��"��"��

"��"��"��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

"��"��

"��"��"��

��

��

��

��

��

"��"��

"��"��

"��"��"��

"��"��"��

��

��

��

��

��

��!

��

��

��!

"��"��"��"��

"��"��"��

"��"��"��"��

"��"��

"��"��

"��"��"��

��

��

��!

"��"��"��

"��"��"��

"��"��"��

��"��

"��"��"��

��"��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��"��

��"��

��

��

"��"��"��

��

��

��

"��"��"��

��

��

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–60

SECTION 10TUBE SELECTION FUNCTION

10–1 Introduction

Refer to Illustration 1–25 (Tube Selection Function).

The tube selection function allows application of the three main functions of the generator (kVfunction, Heater function, Rotor function) to one tube or the other.

Tube selection involves the following sub-assemblies:

� PU_CTRL_CPU Board: the PU_CTRL_CPU receives the tube change command fromthe Control Console and sequences the tube change process in the generator.

� Command 2 Board: transmits the tube selection commands to the Rotor Controller Boardand the Heater Board.

� Heater Board: switches heater currents to tube 1 or tube 2 heater transformers, and drivesthe HV switch motor relay to rotate the motor.

� Rotor Controller Board: switches the rotor inverter towards one stator or the other.

� HV Tank: includes the high voltage switch to connect the HV transformer to one tube orthe other.

The change of stator in the rotor function is simply made by switching a relay. It directs theoutput of the rotor controller inverter towards one stator or the other.

The change of tube filament heating is also made changing a relay. It switches the output of XLand XS heater inverters to the appropriate set of heater transformers. There are four heatertransformers inside the HV Tank: XS Tube 1, XL Tube 1, XS Tube 2, XL Tube 2.

The switch of the high voltage output of the HV transformer is made inside the HV Tank by aspecial switch, which presents high insulation capability to insure no spark over theunselected tube. This switch is moved by a 24 V motor located on top of the HV Tank. Switchoperation is monitored by three contacts:

� Two “bold” contacts indicate the position of the switch. If _T1_POSITION = 0, thismeans that the probable contact is made with tube 1. If _T2_POSITION = 0, this meansthat the probable contact is made with tube 2.

� One accurate contact called _HV_SWITCH_INDEX. When it is equal to zero, this meansthat one tube or the other is actually connected to the HV transformer.

� Correct indication of tube switching is given when _HV_SWITCH_INDEX = 0 and_Tx_POSITION = 0, with x = 1 or 2. The change of HV position should not take longerthan 2 seconds. If it does, an error is generated.

THEORY OF OPERATION

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–61

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–26

TU

BE

SE

LEC

TIO

N S

EQ

UE

NC

E

��

�*��

(�#��)��

��

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

��

��

�*��

(�#��)��

�*��

(�#��)��

��)�(,")�!�

��$(�$�-

�&)&'�(,")�!

��$(�$�-

" !�+&#)� ��(,")�!

��&$$�%��$&)&'�

��)�(,")�!�

��$(�$�-

�&)&'�(,")�!

��$(�$�-

��(�$�-

��

" !�+&#)� ��(,")�!

��&$$�%��$&)&'�

��(�$�-

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–62

10–2 Tube Selection Sequencing

Refer to Illustration 1–26 (Tube Selection Sequence).

According to the operator demand the Control Console sends a tube command toPU_CTRL_CPU, which checks if the tube number is TUBE1 or TUBE2 and if a tube switchsequence is running. If the new tube is different from the selected tube, tube switch sequence isstarted:

� Mask the tube selection safety detection

� Command the heater relay

� Wait for the rotor to stop

� Command the rotor relay when heater switching is complete

� Command the HV relay when rotor switching is complete

� Wait for the end of HV switching

� If a new command occurs during the preceding operations, start the new sequence.

� Unmask the tube selection safety detection

– send the heat demand if received during the tube switch.

10–3 Tube Selection Error Handling

ErrorCode

Name Cause

110 TUB_SEL_ROT_ON Tube switch command while rotor is ON

118 TUB_SEL_HEAT_ON Tube switch command while heat is ON on one or two focus

119 TUB_SEL_KV_ON Tube switch command while kV measured > 9 kV

117 TUB_SEL_ERR HV switches signals status error

114 ROT_SEL_ERR Rotor tube switches signals status error

115 HEAT_SEL_ERR Heater tube switches signals status error

716 THERMAL_SAFETY Temperature of tube housing too high

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–63

SECTION 11R/RF INTERFACE

11–1 Description

The purpose of the MPH generator is to provide an interface between the Rad and RF Rooms.

An example of a possible RF/Rad and Rad 2 tube connection is given in Illustrations 1–27 and1–28.

11–1–1Tubes

Two tubes can be driven by the generator, including one fluoro tube and one rad tube in thecase of RF.

The RF tube is connected as a priority to Tube 1 for fluoro, although connection to Tube 2 isalso possible.

11–1–2Tomography

Two tomography units can be connected to the generator, with the possibility of automatictransmission of tomography times.

The following combinations are possible:

� One RF tomography unit and one Rad tomography unit, or

� Two Rad tomography units.

11–1–3Buckies

Four Buckies can be connected to the generator, as follows:

� Two wall Buckies for Tubes 1 and 2,

� Two table Buckies for Tubes 1 and 2.

Power supply for these Buckies is either 230 V (ac) or 115 V (ac). Power supply is selected bymoving Fuse F9 on the MPHA6–A3 Distribution Board.

Note: The two power supply voltages cannot be mixed. All Buckies are either 230 V (ac) or115 V (ac).

11–1–4Collimators

Two automatically controlled collimators in cassette size may be connected. It is possible tomix automatic-control and manual-control collimators. Refer to the SM for details ofconnections and programming.

11–1–5Arterio

An Arteriophlebograph can be the interface in an RF room. In this case, it is connected toTube 2, and replaces the wall Bucky interface. A wall Bucky/Tube 2 interface is then notpossible.


E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–64

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–27

RF

RO

OM�,��

��%'+��'&+)'$$��+��$�

�('+��"$%��-"��

�"��'

�%� �

�,��

�"��'

��$�

�)' )�%2�

��&�)�+')

��$$

�,�#0

��$��,�#0

1��"' )�(!"��,+'%�+"�

��%�)�

"&+�&*"�"�)

%'&"+')

��

�'&+)'$�'&*'$�

�'&+)'$�'&*'$�

��

��

�'�,$�)��'&*'$�* �)

�''+*."+�!

/('*,)�(,*!�,++'&

/('*,)�(,*!�,++'&

�&�*."+�!

�"��'%'&"+')

��&�)�+')

��$��'&+)'$�'&*'$�

/('*,)�(,*!�,++'&

�&��

�',�!*�)��&

�&�*."+�!

��

�&+� )�+��'&*'$�

��

�"�$��"%"+�+"'&�

THEORY OF OPERATION

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

1–65

ILLUS

TR

ATIO

N 1–28

RA

D R

OO

M

�"!��!��

�"�� "��

��

��"��#

��$�

��!��

�"��#

��

�"��#

��"��#

��!��

�"!��!��

��!��

��!��

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–66

11–2 Composition

See Ill. 1–29.Depending on x-ray room configuration, the generator can be equipped with various optionalboards, to be installed according to instructions given in the SM.

ILLUSTRATION 1–29BOARD INTERCONNECTIONS

MPH A6

ROOM IF CPU

J7

J5

J6

(40)

MPH A6 A1

(68)

(9)

��

J9

J2

(50)

J10

(24)

J1

(6)

TABLE INTERFACE

MPH A6 A2J4

(15)(50)

J3

(25)

J2

(25)

TABLE TOMOMPH A6 A5

COLLIMATOR(40)

(40)

J7A

J7B

J6

(6)

J11–13–15(3x9)

J10–12–14

J9(15)

J8(15)

WALL BUCKYMPH A6 A4(40)

J7

J5

(6)

3X9

J4(9)

J6

(6)

DISTRIBUTION

J7

MPH A6 A3

J9 J11

(50)(12)(9)

J5(6)

MPH A6 PS2

MPH A6 PS1

J6(12)

J4(6)

J8J2

MPH A6 A7

J3(24)

To MPH A6 A8

To table RADandCollimator

Room lights

Buckies

BOARD

BOARDBOARD

BOARD

BOARD

+ 15 V

+/– 15 V, + 5 V

J1J2J3

(3x9)OR

XJ5(Plugs Panel)or UIH Board

To MPH A6 A8(Plugs Panel)or MHR

To MPH A6 A8(Plugs Panel)or

EXTENSION RACK

To PU_CTRL_BD

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–67

11–2–1RF/One Tube

The Table Interface Board MPHA6 A2 is added to the MPHA6 Rack.

Note: If a wall Bucky is present, it is connected to the Wall Bucky MPHA6 A4 Board which isinstalled in the rack.

11–2–2RF/Two Tubes

If the X-Ray Room has a Rad function, with or without tomography, and with or withoutautomatically controlled collimators, in addition to the RF installation, the Table TomoCollimator Board (MPH A6 A5) is added to the rack (MPH A6).

11–2–3RAD/One or Two Tubes

If the X-Ray Room has one or two Rad tubes with or without tomography and with or withoutautomatically controlled collimators, the Table Tomo Collimator Board (MPH A6 A5) isadded to the rack (MPH A6).

If only wall Bucky or craniography accessories are used, only the Wall Bucky Board (alreadyincluded in the MPH A6 Rack) is required.

11–3 Operation

The interface uses SAS data exchange protocol with the peripheral devices (Table, ImageIntensifier, Collimators, Buckies, etc.).

11–3–1Wall Bucky Board MPH A6 A4

See Schematic 2120833 in SM.

This printed circuit, which is always present in the MPH A6 Rack, allows two 230-V (ac) or115-V (ac) wall Buckies to be connected.

The connection is established using LMI-type screw terminal connectors. Grid triggeringinformation is a function of the pre-programmed technique (POMU) and the selected tube,either T1 or T2 (refer to SM). The exposure trigger generated by the Bucky is thus transmittedto the Room IF CPU Board.

See Illustrations 1–30 and 1–31.

The Arteriophlebograph interface is also located on this Board. In addition to exposuretriggering information, this interface has radiography preparation and end of radiographypreparation information, as well as information during the exposure.


Interface with the door interlocks (door contact and lamps) is also provided on this Board.Power supply to the room lamps (ON and X-Ray) depends on the Bucky voltage selected,230 V (ac) or 115 V (ac).

See Illustration 1–34.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–68

11–3–2Table Interface Board MPH A6 A2

See Diagram 2118970 in SM.

This board creates the interface with a Remote Table and an Image Intensifier.

The signal exchange dialog between components is shown in Illustrations 1–35 through 1–41.

The chronological order of signals is indicated by numbers from 0 to 7.

The positioner cables and image intensifier cables are connected using AMP 34-pinconnectors installed either on the MPH A6–A8 Plug Panel or on the Transpanel at the front ofthe Upper Cabinet.

In the case of the Digital Rack, the connection is routed first via the Digital Rack using a flat25-pin cable connected directly to the Table Interface Board and then to the Digital Rack, andfrom the Digital Rack to the Transpanel at the front of the Upper Cabinet.

Connection to the image intensifier is created using an AMP 34-point connector on theMPH A6 A8 Rack, or directly via flat 15-point cable between the Table Interface Board andthe UIH printed circuit installed on the inner surface of the MPH A6 Rack door.

11–3–3Table Tomo Collimator Interface Board MPH A6 A5


This board creates the interface with two rad tables (such as Compax), with or withoutTomography, and two collimators automatically controlled according to cassette size.

The signal exchange dialog between components is shown in Illustrations 1–42 through 1–52.

Connection of Table Bucky or Tomography Unit cables is carried out on the screw-terminalLMI connectors. Automatic collimator cables are connected using AMP 34-point connectorsinstalled on the MPH A6 A8 Rack.

11–3–4ROOM IF CPU Board MPH A6 A1


This Board transmits all information sent by the CPU via the data bus, and distributes it to thevarious interface boards (Wall Bucky, Table Interface, Table Tomo Collimator).

The Board also decodes information received from the peripheral devices, to transmit it to theCPU via the data bus.

See the example of signal exchanges in Illustration 1–53.

This board is also equipped with LEDs which indicate x-ray dialog status between thegenerator and peripheral devices.

Yellow LEDs indicate that the generator has received information from outside.

Green LEDs indicate that the generator is sending information to a peripheral device.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–69

TABLE 1–1EETACFLUORO CASE: MEANING OF LEDS

SC1 Generator has received a fluoro request (fluoro footswitch pressed)

SC2 Generator has started heating and anode rotation

SC3 Generator has received an x-ray request in fluoro

SC4 Generator transmits During Fluoro notification

TABLE 1–2EETACRAD CASE: MEANING OF LEDS

PG1 Generator has received a Radiography Preparation request (Prep switch)

PG2 Generator has started heating and anode rotation

GR1 Generator has received a Rad exposure request (Exposure switch)

GR2 Generator authorizes x-ray request

GR3 Generator has received a Begin Exposure request

GR4 Generator transmits information during x-ray exposure

11–4 Workstation Decoding Principle

Workstation information includes the x-ray tube selection, and image receptor selection(Spot-film, Digital, Wall Bucky, Table Bucky, etc.).

During Workstation programming (see Job Card RG002 sm), the Workstation is associatedwith a console key (1 thru 8), an image receptor, and an x-ray tube.

For example:

TECH1 (Console Key Number 1) >>>DIR (Receptor) T1(Tube)A signal is created from this combination. It is to be labeled in the following way on diagramsand in illustrations:

TECH1=DIR T1>>>>>>>WS_DIR–UX or WS_DIR_UYWhere:

� WS for WORKSTATION

� DIR for DIRECT

� UX for TUBE 1*

� UY for TUBE 2*

Note: The UX or UY suffix is not used in the RF case because only one fluoro is possible. The RFtube is connected as a priority to Tube 1 but, if connected to Tube 2, the UX and UYsuffixes are exchanged for the Rad Workstations:

� UX=TUBE 2

� UY=TUBE 1

Other signals are required to carry out information switching. These are generated by thesoftware according to the mode.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–70

For example:

WS_RF:WORKSTATION using RF techniques (SETE, SPE, NUM, TOSE, TONU)

WS_RAD:WORKSTATION using Rad techniques (DIR, POMU, POTA, TOPO)

WS_FILM: WORKSTATION using techniques with Film in RF (SETE, TOSE)

WS_TOMO:WORSTATION tomography selector

WS_FLUORO:WORKSTATION using Fluoro (SETE, TOSE, NUM, TONU)

TABLE 1–3

EETACSWITCHING ACCORDING TO WORKSTATIONS

WORKSTATION TUBE 1 TUBE 2

Special (SPE) WS_SPE

WS_RF

R

SFD (SETE or SECO) WS_SFD

WS_FILM

WS_RF

WS_FLUORO

RF

Digital (NUM) WS_DIG

WS_FLUORO

WS_RF

Tomo SFD (TOSE) WS_FILM

WS_TOMO

WS_FLUORO

WS_RF

Tomo Digital (TONU) WS_DIG

WS_FLUORO

WS_RF

Direct (DIR) WS_DIR_UX

WS_RAD

WS_DIR_UY

WS_RAD

RTable Bucky (POTA) WS_TAB_BUCK_UX

WS_RAD

WS_TAB_BUCK_UY

WS_RAD

AD

Wall Bucky (POMU) WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

WS_RAD

WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

WS_RAD

D Tomo Bucky (TOPO) WS_TOMO_BUCK_UX

WS_RAD

WS_TOMO_BUCK_UY

WS_RAD

Pulmo (PULM)

Changer (CHAN)

Not Applicable WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

WS_RAD

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–71

Note:

� In RF, if Tube 1 is reserved for the Fluoro Workstations, Tube 2 is used in Rad, and theRad Workstations are therefore used with index UY.

� If Tube 2 is reserved for Fluoro, Tube 1 is used in Rad, and the Rad Workstations aretherefore used with index UX.

In the case of an Arterio or Pulmorapid (CHAN or PULM), the Workstation RadWS_WALL_BUCK_UY is always active. The RF tube must therefore be on Tube 1.

ILLUSTRATION 1–30RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM FOR WALL BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 1/2

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

MAX485U20

0VRFK23

_EXP_ENTo PU_CTRL_CPU

F6A

F6B

U922

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36

*Used to start prep with only Exposure switch

K24:Inhibit Exposure by Collimator

K22:PREP_SWK23:EXP_SW

D.DUMOURIER3/11/94

J57

41

J7:Used to connect a handswitch

U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9 0VRF

K23

CONTROLCONSOLE

TABLE–TOMO–COLLIMATOR.BD

J7A or J7B

K24–9

_INHIBIT–EXP By COLLIMATOR see Rad interface Collima-tor Diagram

Sheet 1

99

D0_D15

_WS_RAD

K13:WORKSTATION RAD

led PG1

led GR1

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–72

ILLUSTRATION 1–31RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN WALL_BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 2/2

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

U81

U81

U65

Q5

Q6

12

15

14

16

K13

14

16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69

U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1*

SEL_EXP_CMD0*EPLDU30

EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7

22

22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1

WALL BUCK.BD (Two Wall Buckies available)

K1

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

J1

K2

K3

K8

K7

J3

J5

4–6

4–6

1–2

1–2

START GRID

START GRID

START X–RAY

START X–RAY

7

9

7

91–2

1–2

K2

K1

K2

K1

AC SUPPLYFOR BUCKIESFrom DIST.BD

XJ5

*SEL_EXP_CMD0 Selection for RAD or FLUORO*SEL_EXP_CMD1 Selection for RAD or FLUORO

WALL BUCKY 2 WALL BUCKY 1

K7

K8

led GR2

led GR3DS4

DS2

DS3

DS1

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–73

ILLUSTRATION 1–32RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM FOR ARTERIO SHEET 1/2

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOORJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

MAX

485U20

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36



J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

K23


J7A or J7B

K24–9

_INHIBIT–EXP by Collimator (see Collimator block diagram)

Sheet 1

9

D0_D15

_PREP_SW

_PREP_SW

K3 K1

or Jumps

CONTROL CONSOLE

_END_PREP1

BEGIN_END_EXP1

U65

U65

U67

U67

Q1 2

Q3 6

END_PREP

BEGIN_END_EXP

K11

K16

J2

K3

K3

K1

K1

7

24

28

7

24

28

9

K5

K4

K67–9

4–6

1–2

(K1–K3:see sheet 2 Arterio block dia-gram) )

ARTERIO

PREP INFO

END PREP INFO

BEGIN END EXP INFO

K13:WORKSTATION RAD

_WS_RAD

led PG1

led GR1

led PG2

led GR4

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–74


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

U81

U65

Q6 15 16

K13

16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69

U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1

WALL BUCK.BD

K1_WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

K3

K8

J1

J5

4–6

1–2

START X–RAY

7

91–2

1–2

K1

K1

AC SUPPLYFrom DIST.BD XJ5


TO ARTERIO

K8

ENABLE EXPled GR2

led GR4

led DS3

led DS4

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–75

ILLUSTRATION 1–34DIAGRAM OF INTERLOCK DOOR AND ROOM LIGHT

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

CONTROL CONSOLEDIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY BD.

J6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

MAX

485U20

0VRF

K23 RAD


F6A

F6B

U922

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36

J5

7

41U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

0VRF

K23

led PG1

led GR1

OPTOU78_FLUORO_PREP_A

K20

9_FLUORO_REQUEST

U92

A4 8 _FLUORO_PREPled SC1

K20 FLUOROJ9

9

J5

TABLE BD From POSITIONNER

K24–K5 9

J2 SAS PL1

MM

13 13 18 DD

K14 FOOT SWITCHFLUORO

See RFblock diagram

see RF bloc diagram for RF

_PREP_SW

7 7

30 30

J4

K10

K9

JumpJ8 J9 2

1

8–9

6

4

Door switch

J5 J6

VAC2

VAC1

VAC2

1–2 1–2

3–63–6

From DIST BD XJ5

LINEON

X–RAYON

_PREP_SW

_FLUORO_REQUEST

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–76

ILLUSTRATION 1–35RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATIONS SHEET 1/2 (PREP AND EXPOSURE SWITCHES)

J9 J2ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW_B

_EXP_SW_AA

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

K23–K24

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

D0_D15

2

12

Q1

Q5

U92

U66

U65

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

POSITIONNERJ5

K23

K22K13

K23

0VRF

INTERFACE TABLE BD

N

J

B

AA

EE

T

L

3

5

13

3

5

13

1

2

13

5

14

4

15PREP_INFO_L

ENABLE _PREP_N

MAX485U20

K23

_EXP_ENF6A

F6B

J5

7

41

_RF_SEL

U61

4

18 18

4

K14

CR1

CR4

_WS_RF

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

_RF_PREP_REQUEST

_RF_EXP_REQUEST

1

2

3

4

0

K22=RF_prep requestK23=Exposure requestK24=Inhibit by collimator (not used0

x STEPS FOR SEQUENCEIN RAD MODE

K14=Interlock ky room doorK13=Enable prep by positionner

K22 Exposure requestK23=Prep request

5 5J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

SAS PL1

led PG1

led GR1

SW4

SW4=ON if wall bucky

DS1

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–77

ILLUSTRATION 1–36RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATION SHEET 2/2 (EXPOSURE)

J9 J2

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

D0_D15

POSITIONNER

J5

INTERFACE TABLE BD

STEPS FOR SEQUENCEIN RAD MODE

x

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69

U67

6A3

_START_EXP_1

MAX485U42

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1

SEL_EXP_CMD0EPLDU30

EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

5Q2

38 38

K27_K14 M520ENABLE_EXP_INFO_M

6

17_RF_SEL

F

H

6

START_EXP_1

6Q3

BEGIN_END_EXP

K16

U67BEGIN_END_EXP_1 40 40

7 7

19 W7K25_K14 BEGIN_END_EXP_INFO_W

U65

(see Sheet 1 )

T4 COMMON_INFO_T

COMMON_INFO_T4

T

K14=WORKSTATION RFK25=BEGIN_END_EXPOSUREK27=EXPOSURE DEMAND

K16=BEGIN_END_EXPOSUREK15=EXPOSURE DEMAND

SAS PL1

led GR2

led GR3

led GR4

K28

_W5_WALL BUCKY_UX (K26)

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–78

ILLUSTRATION 1–37FLUORO INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATIONS SHEET 1/2 (FLUORO SWITCH)

J9 J2ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

OPTOU78

OPTOU88

0VRF

To PU_CTRL_CPU

17

A4

D0_D15

2Q1

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

J5

K24

INTERFACE TABLE BD

T

13 13 18

4

FLUORO_INFO_R

MAX485U20

K20

_EXP_ENF6A

F6B

J5

7

41

_RF_SEL

4

K14

_WS_RF

1

2

0

x

R

FOOT_SWITCH

FLUORO_SW_MM

19Q8

POSITIONNER

STEPS FOR SEQUENCEIN FLUORO MODE

18

4

CR1

K24

K24

K5

16 16_WS_FLUORO

_FLUORO_PREP_A

K20

9

9 9 MM

DD

_FLUORO_REQUEST

U92

U92

U66

U66

A48

U69

U65

_FLUORO_PREP

K14=WORKSTATION RFAND WALKL BUCKYK24=FLUORO SWITCH

K5=FLUORO WORKSTATION

K20=FLUORO REQUEST

5 J4_1 J4–2 J8 J90VRF

5

SAS PL1

led SC1

24

DS1

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–79

ILLUSTRATION 1–38FLUORO INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATIONS SHEET 2/2 (FLUORO X–RAY)

J9 J2ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

D0_D15

POSITIONNER

J5INTERFACE TABLE BD


x

_START_FLUORO_A

FLUORO_DEMAND_1

FLUORO_DEMAND

K17

OPTOU87

U65

U67

11A1

_START_FLUORO

MAX485U42

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1

SEL_EXP_CMD0EPLDU30

EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

9Q4

36 36

K1

3

10

21_RF_SEL

Y

D

4 FLUORO_EXP_Y

12Q5

BEGIN_END_FLUORO

BEGIN_END_FLUORO

11 11

K25(see Sheet 1)

30 30NOT USED

K21

U67

U81

SEL_EXP_CMD1=Selection exposure in rad or fluoroSEL_EXP_CMD0=Selection exposure in rad or fluoro

K17=FLUORO DEMAND

K1=FLUORO_INFOK21=START FLUORO

SAS PL1

led SC2

led SC3

led SC4

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–80

ILLUSTRATION 1–39INTERFACE WITH IMAGE INTENSIFIER

J9 J4ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

D0_D15

J5INTERFACE TABLE BD J3 to IMAGE

INTENSIFIER

U82Q4

9U60

_MAX_REG_FLUORO 28 28

_AUTO_BRIGHT_CTRL 26 26U60U82

Q512

U69_WS_FLUORO

U66

Q8 1916 16

MAX485U70

HV_ONMAX485U53

HV_ON

J534

68

(From PU_CTRL_CPU)32

34

X_RAY_ON_A

X_RAY_ON_B

FLUORO_DEMAND_1

FLUORO_DEMAND

K17U67

9Q436 36

32

34

PREP_SWSee Sheet1(Rad in RF)

OPTO U1

K5K5

K5

K6

K3

ABS_ON_K

SW1

COMMON_F

FLUORO_M

K12

SW3

From POSITIONNER K23

K19 COMMON_C

PREP_DD

MAGNIFIER 1_FF

MAGNIFIER 2_HH

_MAGNIFIER 1

_MAGNIFIER 2

23

25

23

25

OPTOU96

OPTOU96

_MAGNIFIER1_A

_MAGNIFIER2_A

U84

A3

A4

15

17

PREP_HK16

COMMON_F

COMMON_F

7

8

6

5

1

10

3

2

9

_RF_SEL

(See sheet 1 FluoroInterface Diagram)

K

F

H

M

DD

C

FF

HH

JJ

Sw1–3–4:Set at Installation

led SC2

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–81

ILLUSTRATION 1–40SELECTION GENERATOR TO POSITIONNER IN RF MODE

U66Q3

6

U69

U81

Q512

U69U66Q2 5

Q49

U69

U81U61

Q615

U69U66Q7 16

TABLE.BD

_WS_SFD

_WS_TOMO

_WS_SPE

_WS_DIG

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

_WS_FILM

K11

K9

K20

K10

K26

POSITIONNER

K2

K15U65U66

Q1 2 _WS_RF

SW4

K14TUBE_INFO_FF

SPECIAL_INFO_V

SPOT_FILM_INFO_C

TOMO_INFO_A

DIGITAL_INFO_K

WALL_BUCKY_INFO_BB

_FIELD_COMMON_INFO_M

SW2

K9 orK10 orK11

TOMO_COMMON_B

_WS_TOMO_WS_DIG or_WS_SFD

D0_D15

J5J9 J2

J3

8

7

3

12

11

3

16

4

C

A

V

K

BB

M

FF

B

U66

U66

8

12

6

10

18

14

4

4 TCOMMON_INFO_T

COMMON K11–9–20–10–26––14

8

12

6

10

18

14

4

ROOM_IF_CPU

SAS PL3

SAS PL1

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–82

ILLUSTRATION 1–41SELECTION FROM POSITIONNER IN RF MODE

ROOM_IF_CPUTABLE.BD POSITIONNER

OPTOU97

U93

OPTOU98

OPTOU99

OPTOU95

OPTOU100

OPTOU101

OPTOU90

OPTOU89

U83

_TOMO_TIME1_A

_TOMO_TIME2_A

_TOMO_TIME3_A

_TOMO_TIME4_A

_TOMO_TIME5_A

_TOMO_SEL

_DSA_MODE_A

_SETUP_DSA_A

_FIELD_SIZE_A_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B_A

_FIELD_SIZE_C_A

_FIELD_SIZE_D_A

_FIELD_SIZE_e_A

_EXP_WITHOUT_GRID_A

_SERIAL_EXP_A

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

A3

2

4

6

8

6

8

11

13

15

11

13

15

17

27

29

31

33

35

37

21

19

39

41

43

45

47

17

15

27

29

31

33

35

37

21

19

39

41

43

45

47

17

15

J9 J5 J3SAS PL3

1

2

5

6

9

16

15

20

10

13

14

17

18

22

21

11

HH

A

L

R

V

F

X

Y

N

W

S

H

AA

BB

EE

C

_TOMO_TIME1

_TOMO_TIME2

_TOMO_TIME3

_TOMO_TIME4

_TOMO_TIME5

_TOMO_SEL

_DSA_MODE

_SETUP_DSA

_FIELD_SIZE_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B

_FIELD_SIZE_C

_FIELD_SIZE_D

_FIELD_SIZE_e

_EXP_WITHOUT_GRID

_SERIAL_EXP_RF_SEL

MAGNIFIER1_DD

MAGNIFIER2_T

COMMOM_FF

K18

K17

(See Sheet1 FluoroInterface Diagram)

DD

T

FF

J4

To IMAGE INTENSIFIER

MAGNIFIER1_FF

MAGNIFIER2_HH

FF

HH

1

4

7JJ

_REF_SEL

D0_D15

8

7

12

B

M

(see previous page )

XJ3


TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–83

ILLUSTRATION 1–42RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM FOR TABLE_BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 1/2

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36


K24 K9:Inhibit Exposure by Collimator


J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9 0VRF

K23

CONTROL CONSOLE


J7A or J7B

K24–K9

_INHIBIT–by collimator If required see collimator block diagram

Sheet 1

99

D0_D15

K13:WORKSTATION RAD

led PG1

led GR1

_WS_RAD

MAX485U20

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–84

ILLUSTRATION 1–43RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN TABLE BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 2/2

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

K13

Sheet 2

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7A or B

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UX

J10

K25

K26

J11

J5

4–6

4–6

1–2

1–2

START GRID

START GRID

START X–RAY

START X–RAY

7

9

7

91–2

1–2

K17

K21

K26

K25


XJ5


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UY

(TWO TABLE BUCKY AVAILABLE)

10

12

10

12

Q36

Q49

U69

U69

K10

K17

K21

_EXP_START_BUCK_UX

_EXP_START_BUCK_UY

BUCKY TABLE 1 BUCKY TABLE 2

K27

K28

K18

K19

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UX

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UY

U81

U81

Q7

Q819

16

U65

18 18

2020

K28

K27

led GR2

led GR3 led DS1

DS2

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–85

ILLUSTRATION 1–44RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM FOR TOMO BUCKY–TOMO1 SHEET 1/3

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOORJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36



J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

K23


J7A or J7B

K24

_INHIBIT–EXP by Collimator see collimatorblock diagram

Sheet 1

9

D0_D15

_PREP_SW

_PREP_SW

K10 K18

or Jumps

CONTROL CONSOLE

7 7

9

K22

PREP INFO

J12

8–9

(see sheet2 page 20)

led PG1

led GR1

1

x X–RAY Sequence with TOMOGRAPH

1

2

MAX485U20

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–86


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

_EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63 SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7A or B

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UX

J10

K25

J12

J5

4–6

1–2

START GRID

START X–RAY

7

91–2

1–2

K17

K25

AC SUPPLYFOR BUCKYFrom DIST.BD

XJ5*SEL_EXP_CMD0 Selection for RAD or FLUORO*SEL_EXP_CMD1 Selection for RAD or FLUORO

(TWO TOMO TABLE BUCKY AVAILABLE)

10 10Q36

Q4

U69

U69

K10

K17

_EXP_START_BUCK_UX

BUCKY TABLE 1

K18 K28_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UX

U81

Q716

U65

18 18

K28

K294–6

TOMO STROKESTART

K18

1

2

_EXP_START_TOMO_UX

TOMO1

K29

led GR2

led GR3

3

3

4

5x X–RAY sequence

with TOMOGRAPH

led DS1

DS2

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–87


ROOM_IF_CPU

OPTOU97

U93

OPTOU98

OPTOU99

_TOMO_TIME1_A

_TOMO_TIME2_A

_TOMO_TIME3_A

_TOMO_TIME4_A

_TOMO_TIME5_A

_TOMO_SEL

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

2

4

6

8

11

13

J6 J7A or B J14

_TOMO_TIME1

_TOMO_TIME2

_TOMO_TIME3

_TOMO_TIME4

_TOMO_TIME5

_TOMO_SEL

D0_D15


4

5

6

7

8

3

9

1

2TOMO SELECTION

13

15

17

19

21

23

13

15

17

19

21

23

0VRF K18

K28

See sheet 2page 20

See sheet 2

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–88


J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOORJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U922

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36



J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

K23


J7A or J7B

K9

_INHIBIT–EXP by Collimator see colli-mator block diagram

9

D0_D15

_PREP_SW

_PREP_SW

K20 K19

or Jumps

CONTROL CONSOLE

7 7

9

K23

PREP INFO

J13

8–9

(see sheet 2)

led PG1

led GR1

1


1

2

MAX485U20

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–89


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

_EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63 SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7A or B

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UY

J11

K26

J13

J5

4–6

1–2

START GRID

START X–RAY

7

91–2

1–2

K21

K26



(TWOTOMO TABLE BUCKY AVAILABLE)

Q36

Q4

U69

U69

K20

K21

_EXP_START_BUCK_UX

BUCKY TABLE 2

K19 K27_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UY

U81

Q716

U65

K27

K304–6 TOMO STROKE

START

K19

1

2

_EXP_START_TOMO_UX

TOMO212

20 20

12

K30

led GR2

led GR3

3

3

4

5

x X–RAY Sequencewith TOMOGRAPH

led DS1

DS2

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–90


ROOM_IF_CPU

U93

_TOMO_TIME1_A

_TOMO_TIME2_A

_TOMO_TIME3_A

_TOMO_TIME4_A

_TOMO_TIME5_A

_TOMO_SEL

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

2

4

6

8

11

13

J6 J7A or B J15

_TOMO_TIME1

_TOMO_TIME2

_TOMO_TIME3

_TOMO_TIME4

_TOMO_TIME5

_TOMO_SEL

D0_D15


4

5

6

7

8

3

9

1

2 TOMO SELECTION

13

15

17

19

21

23

13

15

17

19

21

23

0VRF K19

K27

See sheet 2

Seesheet 2

OPTOU97

OPTOU99

OPTOU98

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–91

ILLUSTRATION 1–50RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM COLLIMATOR ON FIRST TUBE SHEET 1/3

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

15

J6 J7A or B

22


_WS_DIR_UX

J9

Q1

Q3

U69

U69

K12

Q6

6

D0–D15

U69

10_WS_TAB_BUCK_UX

Q7

Q5

U69

18

14

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UX

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

6

10

18

14

22

2

6

16

12

U66

K14

K15

K4

K2

K11

K12 / K14/K15 ou K4

K16

7 7

K24

K24 K9**K9:See sheet 2 (Inhibition by collimator on second Tube)

SW1

9 9

0VRF

K24

*K9

SW1:Normally set in position 2–3

(TWO COLLIMATORS AVAILABLE)

+15VRF

FREE_ADJUST_C1

TABLE_WORKSTATION_D1

WALL_BUCK_WORSTATION_U1

PREP_1_E1

TUBE_SELECTION_A1

ENABLE_EXP_J1

2

3

4

1

5

7

15

6 COMMON_H1Common info to collimator

2

13

CONTROLCONSOLE

(see page 22)_PREP_SW

K24 _INHIBIT_EXP

K24

0VRF_EXP_REQUEST

K23

K23

_EXP_SW

(see page 22)

XJ4

To firstCOLLIMATOR

C

D

U

H

E(common H)

A(Common H)

J

Rled DS3

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–92

ILLUSTRATION 1–51RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM COLLIMATOR ON SECOND TUBE SHEET 2/3

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

15

J6 J7A or B

22


_WS_DIR_UY

J8

Q2

Q4

U69

U69

Q6

D0–D15

U69

_WS_TAB_BUCK_UY

Q8

Q6

U69

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UY

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

22

5

9

19

15

U66

7 7

0VRF


+15VRF

FREE_ADJUST_C2



PREP_1_E2

TUBE_SELECTION_A2

ENABLE_EXP_J2

2

3

4

1

5

6 COMMON_H2

Common info to collimator

CONTROLCONSOLE

_PREP_SW

K9

See SHEET 1 FORINHIBIT EXPOSURE bysecond COLLIMATOR (K9)

8

12

20

16

8

12

20

16

XJ5

7

15

C

D

U

H

E(Common H)

A(Common H)

J

R

TO second COLLIMATOR

K1

K5

K6

K13

K7

K3

K8

K5/K6/K7/K13

see RAD interfaceblock diagram

ILLUSTRATION 1–52RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM COLLIMATORS SHEET 3/3

ROOM_IF_CPU

OPTOU100

OPTOU101

OPTOU90

U83 _FIELD_SIZE_A_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B_A

_FIELD_SIZE_C_A

_FIELD_SIZE_D_A

_FIELD_SIZE_e_A

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

2

4

6

8

11

25

27

29

31

33

J6 J7A or B

_FIELD_SIZE_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B

_FIELD_SIZE_C

_FIELD_SIZE_D

_FIELD_SIZE_e

D0_D15

_FIELD_SIZE_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B

_FIELD_SIZE_C

_FIELD_SIZE_D

_FIELD_SIZE_e

25

27

29

31

33

0VRF

0VRF

K16 (See sheet 1 )

K8 (See sheet 2 )

J9 XJ4

J8 XJ5

To COLLIMATORSTABLE–TOMOCOLLIMATOR.BD

( Two collimators available )

9

10

11

12

13

14

V

W

X

Y

HH

MM

9

10

11

12

13

14

V

W

X

Y

HH

MM

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–93

ILLUSTRATION 1–53RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN DIRECT WORKSTATION

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

EXP_DEMAND

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

K19

K12

K14

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

OPTOU78

U69

MAX

485U20

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92

U67

2

4

17

5

6

A2

A1

A4

A3

Q2

D0_D15

K13

K19

K12

_WS_RAD

_WS_DIR_UX

_WS_DIR_UY

U61

U6615

Q16

2

5

Q1

Q2

*CR36



K22:PREP_SW

_START_EXP

K23:EXP_SW

J5

7

41

J7:Used to connect a handswitchMA

X

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1

SEL_EXP_CMD0EPLDU30

EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

SEL_EXP_CMD0:selection Exposure in Rad orFluoroSEL_EXP_CMD1:selection Exposure in Rad orFluoroK14: EXP_DEMAND in Direct Mode

U92

U92

U65

U65

U65

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

K12:Workstation DIRECT TubexK13:Workstation RADK19:Workstation DIRECT Tubey

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9 0VRF

K23

led PG1

led GR1

led GR2

led GR3

_WS_RAD

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–94

11–5 How can the user trigger an x-ray exposure in a RF Remote system?

Workstations Exposure triggerTube Technique in a RF Remote system

SFD (Spot Film Device)

Direct (or special) (= Table Top)Exposure

Tomo on SFDExposure

pushbutton Optional

1 DRS (Digital)p

on positionert l d k

pFootswitch

Tomo on DRS control desk

Wall Bucky Now (*) And / or

Wall Bucky Before (**)EWall Bucky Exposure

pushbutton

2Bucky in a Rad positioner

pushbuttonon Generator Handswitch

2Tomo in a Rad positioner control desk

Direct (= Table Top)

Means: IN1 ofTable Interface Board

(*) “Now” (since July 97) in

(**) “Before” (July 97)not existingor removed

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–95

SECTION 12AEC/AET FUNCTION

See illustration 1–54.

Useful only if AEC or AET has been selected. During an exposure the output of an ionizationchamber is monitored to determine when the required intensity has been reached. The AECmay be used with up to four Exposix E ionization chambers, it may also be used for AEC onTomography.

This result is obtained by sending pulses to PU_CTRL_CPU (BRIGHT_ION signal). Thepulses are also send to a counter U5 followed by a DAC U4. The DAC output voltage is thencompared to the back current of the ionization chamber AEC1, AEC2, AEC3, AEC4. Whenthe return current of the chambers is greater than the output voltage, a gate is open to generatenew pulses from signal CLK_AEC.

For AEC mode (Automatic Exposure Control), the exposure is cut when a counter onPU_CTRL_CPU as reached a certain value.

For AET mode (Automatic Exposure control in Tomography), the generator controls the tubekV value so that the back current from ionization chamber after integration follow a certainramp.The ramp is calculated to give optimum film blackening at the end of scanning time.

With EXPOSIX E Ionization Chamber

During an exposure, the counter bright ion reference. The value (VREF) is specified by the CPU, and is updated every ms:

VREF = kVEF .KG .KCVN .kF .KT (t)

kVEF ; a value introduced during generator set–up, according to the type of screen and filmused (0 V < kVEF < 12 V).

KG ; introduced during generator set–up, according to the type of grid used(0.8 < KG < 2).

KCVN ; chosen according to the desired black level(0.24 < KCVN < 4; Renard’s series).

kF ; a function of the film format.

KT (t) ; a function of time which corrects for non–linearity of film response over the time ofexposure (t), introduced during generator set–up (0 < KT (t) < 12).

It is updated at ms intervals during exposure, altering the value of VREF accordingly:

VREF (t) = VREF (0) x KT (t).

The ionization chamber sends to the AEC function a voltage signal VoutAEC proportional tothe radiation dose received.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–96

ILLUSTRATION 1–54AEC FUNCTION

PU_CTRL_CPU ROOM_IF_CPU

HDLC CLK_AEC68302

68360

RESET_COUNTER

COUNTER

DAC

AEC1

AEC2

AEC3

AEC4

.–. 2

GAIN

MUX

X1X10

5V

SEL_ION

SEL_CELLS

AEC_COMP

BRIGHT_ION

MPH A4 A3 MPH A6 A1U30

U49

U51K3 to K10

U17/U6

U12

U15

Q1

U5 U4/U14

U30

TODISTRIBUTIONBOARDMPH A6A3

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–97

SECTION 13II SENSOR FUNCTION

See illustration 1–55.

This board generates a HV HTPM (330 V to 1000 V) for the photomultiplier in the RadiologyImag Intensifier, and measures the photomultiplier output current IPM (1 �A thru 3 mA).

13–1 Description

The board is a pcb assembly mounted on Distribution Board (MPH A6 A3).

� XJ1: Transmits HTPM to the photomultiplier.

� XJ2: Receives IPM from the photomultiplier.

� XJ3: Connection to Room IF CPU (MPH A6 A1) through Distribution Board(MPH A6 A3).

13–1–1Function

Supplies

The board receives the following voltage supplies:

� + 5 V: from the Low Voltage Supply MPH A6 PS1.

� ± 15 V: from the Low Voltage Supply MPH A6 PS1.

HTPM (Photomultiplier HV)

The value of HPTM is loaded from Room IF CPU (MPH A6 A1) bus into thedigital–to–analogue converter U16. The converter output is passed through amplifiers B4,B2to the HV converter G1 for transmission to the photomultiplier as HTPM.

Photomultiplier current

Amplifier B1 converts the weak photomultiplier current IPM into a voltage. The gain of B11 ismodified when the digital Workstation is in use, by energizing relay X1 (LED DS1 lights).

This voltage controls a voltage to frequency converter (B5). The frequency signal pulses isread by software (signal BRIGHT_UID).

Test

The CPU can check the value of HVPM by energizing relay X2. This connects a signalproportional to HVPM to frequency converter B5.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–98

Connectors, test points, relays, switches and LEDs

Connectors

On front edge of board:

� XJ1: Transmits HVPM to the photomultiplier.

� XJ2: Receives IPM from the photomultiplier.

� XJ3: +/– 15 V, 5 V, and signals to and from Room IF CPU (MPH A6 A1).

Test points

TP1 HVPM measure.

TP2 HVPM command.

TP3 Frequency of IPM.

TP4 +15 V.

TP5 IPM voltage – 15 V.

TP6 Ground.

TP7 + 5V.

TP8 VPM.

Switch

SW1 ON/OFF HVPM converter.

Potentiometer

P1 ON/OFF adjusment of B1.

Led

DS1 RAD mode.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–99

ILLUSTRATION 1–55II SENSOR FUNCTION

PU_CTRL_CPU

ROOM_IF_CPU

II_SENSOR

HDLC

BRIGHT_VID

TEST_HVPM

HVPM_ASSIG

683028bits

DAC

V/F

IPM

HT

REGUL.

68360

X2

B1

B5

MPH A4 A3

MPH A6 A1

MPH A6 A6

U49

U16/U24 B4/B2/G1

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–100

SECTION 14CONTROL CONSOLE FUNCTION

14–1 Purpose

See Illustration 1–56 and 1–57.

The Control Console is used to display and change the operating modes of the generator.

14–2 Console Make–up

The console is made up of two electronic boards:

� One board, installed below the front panel, carries the indicator lamps, backlitpushbuttons and seven–segment readouts.

� One board, installed under the board above and connected to it by one 50–conductorribbon cable and one 60–conductor ribbon cable. The board carries the control electronicsfor the readouts and pushbuttons and makes the connection to the generator with abidirectional series link, RS 422. Links and power supply go through a 37–conductor.

14–3 Operation

See Illustration 1–56 and 1–57 and Schematics: Console front panel MPH A7 A1 and Controlconsole board MPH A3 A2.

14–3–1Console Control Board (MPH A3 A2)

The Console Control Board has four main sections:

� Power supply section:

Following rectification and filtering the ac voltage (between 8 V and 12 V) from thegenerator, two linear regulators mounted on a heat sink produce 8 V (2.5 A) required forthe backlits and 5 V (1 A) required for the rest of the board.

� Microprocessor section:

This uses a 68008 or a 68HC001 chip in 8–bit mode and a DUART 68681 seriesconnection controller. It decodes the readout commands from the generator and detectspressure on the pushbuttons to send them to the generator.

� Indicator lamp & seven–stroke readout control section:

This section uses multiplexing to reduce the number of integrated circuits and wiring.

� Pushbutton status read section:

This section uses multiplexing for the same reason as above.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–101

ILLUSTRATION 1–56CONTROL CONSOLE MPH A7

��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

� ��

��

��!!��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

� � ��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–102

ILLUSTRATION 1–57CONTROL CONSOLE MPH A7

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–103

14–3–2Switch–on Tests

These three tests are made at each switch–on and in sequence. If a test is not ok, the programstops and the buzzer sounds to the rythm of the two flashing yellow status LEDs DS7 and DS8.These two LEDs are lit continuously from startup and during the tests.

TEST 1: EPROM Checksum Test (B3) If the checksum is not ok, DS7 flashes and DS8 goesout.

TEST 2: RAM Test (B4) If not ok, DS7 goes out and DS8 flashes.

TEST 3: DUART 68681 and Series Connection RS422 Test.

The RS422 serial link is looped back by energizing relays K1 thru K4. A character is sent andchecked if returned. If the test fails, DS7 and DS8 flash together.

If all the tests are ok, the program outs the two LEDs (DS7 and DS8) and the starts normally.

If the two LEDs are still continuously lighted a few seconds after switch–on, the tests have notbeen run. This may be due to faulty EPROM (B3) or faulty microprocessor.

14–3–3Console Service Test

To run the test, press the Small Focal Spot, Technique 1 and kV keys together for 1 s. Thisallows the operator to check the operation of the keys, indicator lamps, readouts and buzzer.

Connection with the generator is cut when a test is running.

At the start of the test, the software version is displayed in place of the mA and ms values (eg:PUP 3 10). Then all the indicator lamps are lighted for 2 s. Then all the segments and thedecimal point of each readout are lighted successively. Finally, the Console makes threebuzzer sounds.

Therefore the operator has four tests accessible as follows:

TEST 1: Press Technique keys 1 and 5 together. The test checks the pushbutton contacts. Apushbutton lights when pressed and goes out when released.

TEST 2: Press Technique keys 2 and 6 together. The test checks the pushbutton contacts. Apushbutton lights when pressed. Another press outs the lighted pushbutton.

TEST 3: Press Technique keys 3 and 7 together. This test checks the 7–segment readouts.The –kV and +kV keys are used to select the readout to be modified. The mA and mAs keys areused to increment or decrement the value on the selected readout.

TEST 4: Press Technique key 4 and 8 together. Reserved for future extension.

To exit from the Tests repeat the entry procedure, ie,press the Small Focal Spot, Technique 1and kV keys together for at least 1 s.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–104

14–3–4Multiplexed Readout

a. Theory

Readout multiplexing is made according to a 64–column matrix (anode commons)by eight rows (cathode commons).

The 64 anode commons are controlled by eight ports of eight bits each (74HCT574)controlling eight drivers (UDN 2985A or UDN 2981A).

The eight cathode commons are controlled by eight individually controlled outputs(74HCT259) driving eight MOS power transistors operating as open collector (oneonly being a conductor).

The multiplexing is totally controlled by the software which, every 1 ms, blocks allthe eight power MOS (cathode common), loads the new status of the 64 anodecommons, and entrains the conduction of the next power MOS. When the eighthpower MOS is reached, the cycle recommences with the first power MOS.

The indicator lamps and the readout segments are therefore lighted for 1 ms every8 ms. Retinal persistance gives the illusion of continuous light.

b. Organization

The 64 x 8 matrix is divided into two parts: one part connected to the main front panelby connectors XJ7 and XJ6, the other provided for an extension with output on XJ3.

Each submatrix is divided into two parts:

� For 8 x 8 indicator lamps (ANODE_LED of 0 thru 7 for the main) andANODE_LED of 40 thru 47 for the extension).

� For 7–segment readouts:

– 5 x 8 main readouts (ANODE_LED 8 thru 47).

– 1 x 8 extension readout (ANODE_LED 56 thru 63).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–105

c. Indicator lamps matrix and Backlit PBs of Front Panel

��

��

� ��

� �,*-�*0 �%.(.�*0 ��

� ��

� ��

��

! ! �%-%.�,# �*-. #&&($'

� ! ! ! !

� ! ! ! !

��

��

� ��

� ��

� �%-%.�$ �(-+)�*-% �$*+�/.* !

� ��

�� !

! ! ! !

� ! ! ! !

� ! ! ! !

d. 7–segment Readout Matrix of Front Panel

� ��

��

� "��"�� !!

� "��"�� !!

� "��"�� "��"��"��"�!

��"��"� "��"��"��"�!

� ��

��

��"��"�� "��"��"��"�!

��"��"��"��"�!!

�"��"��"��"��"��"�!

�"��"��"��"��"��"�!

14–3–5Communicating with the Generator

The RS 422 serial link operates in full duplex.

Line characteristics: 9600 bauds, 8 bits, even parity.

Hardware support: DUART 68681 (B line).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–106

a. Protocol

The messages are transmitted by trame (STX...ETX). They are acknowledged (ACKor NACK) at reception. A checksum checks the validity of the message.

Message structure:

� " ��

Message length is variable but must comprise at least 128 characters (including STXand ETX). Data and checksum are always in printable ASCII codes (20H thru 7FH).

The checksum must such that:

( data1 + data2 + ... + dataN + CHK – ’S’ (53H) ) MOD 40H = 0

��

�� " �� " �� !��

# � # � # � ��

# # � # $� ��

b. Operation

The recipient of a message must send an acknowledgement to the sender. In case ofan error (incorrect CHK, character error) the recipient sends a NACK which causesthe retransmission of the message. If neither ACK nor NACK is received, a timeoutcauses the retransmission of the message. After the third unsuccessful attempts, thetransmitter reboots its data communication controller.

c. Type of Data

Generator to Console:

Data circulating from the generator to the console concern the state of the indicatorlamps, 7–segment readouts or buzzer. A minimum of three data items is required fora message: address, status, and value. The console can process several messages ina single message (limited by the maximum size of a message: 128 bytes).

Eg: Extinguish four indicator lamps, light three indicator lamps, display values 1, 2, 3 in three digits, and activate the buzzer.

Console to Generator:

Data circulating from the console to the generator concern the state of thepushbuttons. A minimum of two data items is required for a message: address, status.Only pushbutton status changes are transmitted.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–107

SECTION 15PROGRAM-X FUNCTION


15–1 Purpose of PROGRAM-X

PROGRAM-X is an anatomic programmer compatible with the MPH Generator range,MPH 50/65/80. It provides the operator with the means of storing his/her expertise in the formof recorded exam protocols. These protocols contain radiography parameters, optimized for agiven exam.

15–2 PROGRAM-X Composition

PROGRAM-X is composed of:

� Front panel (MPH A8 A2)

� Display screen (MPH A8 A3)

� Alphanumeric keyboard (MPH A8 A4)

� Control Board (MPH A8 A1)

All the above units are mounted on the generator Control Console (MPH A7).

15–3 PROGRAM-X Control Board (MPH A8 A1)

See Schematic PROGRAM-X Control board and PROGRAM-X Front panel board.

This board is used to display the operator–selected anatomic parameters on a graphics screenfrom a entry keyboard. The operating mode is set via buttons on the front panel.

The board is operated by an 8–bit microprocessor, MC 68008. The microprocessor operates at10 MHz and is connected to a resident application program in EPROM 128K x 8. The boardhas a 32K x 8 RAM and two 32 x 8 RAMs backed up by battery to store the operator–selectedanatomic parameters.

Two DUARTs, controlled by the microprocessor, control the dialog:

� By a bidirectional line, RS422, optocoupled to the generator. This line can be looped intest mode as follows:

– Generator transmission � Generator reception,

or

– Console transmission � Console reception.

by two relays controlled by the OP0 and OP1 outputs of DUART 1.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–108

ILLUSTRATION 1–58PROGRAM-X MPH A8

��!�"" ��!�#�!�

��

�� -

%((

�!

�$�!#

��$�

"$��'

�"��

�"��

��$�

"$��'

%��

��"��'

"#�#�� !��

�#!� �$"

��!�"" �$"

��#� �$"

�� "

��

� ��

��

��

�� -

� � %

� � % �%((��

��#��

��#��

��

��

�#!�

��

"��#

��

%��

!��!�"�

��

!��

��$�

"$��'

�&

��#��

!��+

��!

�$��!

��$

!��

�!��

�� "$��'

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

� ��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

%!� %!

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

"*)), ��

��

��#��

�

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–109

ILLUSTRATION 1–59PROGRAM-X MPH A8

� ��

��

� ��

� %%��

� %%��

��

�� $ ��

��!��

��

��

��

��

��

!��

��%�� !�� $��

!��

� ��

��

��

��(

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

!�

� ��

�� #

��

��

��

��

��

��

!�

� ��

�� #

��

�"�

� ��

�'&&) ��

��

�'&&) ��

��

�'&&) ��

��

�'&&) ��

�'&&) ��

��

�'&&) ��

��

�'&&) ��

��

��

�'&&) ��

��

�'&&) ��

��

��

��

�� $

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–110

� By a TTL � RS232 converter inserted in the board permitting:

– One RS232 bidirectional dialog line with the Service Terminal (portable PC).

– One RS232 bidirectional dialog line with the Control Console in debug mode.

The transmissions on the three lines are displayed by six LEDs:

DS3 green = Console receive.

DS4 yellow = Console emit.

DS5 green = Service Terminal receive.

DS6 yellow = Service Terminal emit.

DS7 green = Generator receive.

DS8 yellow = Generator emit.

The mapping system is made by a PAL 20L8 (B13) and the decoding of the various registersby two 74HCT138 decoders (B35 and B39).

RAM system 0H � 7FFFH.

RAM backed–up anat1 40000H � 47FFFH.

RAM backed–up anat2 60000H � 67FFFH.

PROM programmed 80000H � 9FFFH.

A second PAL, 20R6 (B10) is used to generate the WAIT state for the memory access, IT levelcoding, and acknowledgement of IT requests from the DUARTs.

An addressable latch, 74HCT259 (B26), switches the video pages, buzzer control, lamps onfront panel, and watchdog control.

A watchdog, composed of a 74HCT4538 (B45) monostable, is used to reinitialize the board ifthe program is running incorrectly.

A control circuit MAX 693 (B12) for reset and supply backup is used to switch the powersupply of RAMs containing anatomic parameters to a battery in the event of a power dump(battery life is several years).

The generator can also send a reset control via an optocoupled line to the Control Console:

� LED DS1 displays processor reset status.

� LED DS2 displays processor halt status.

Output OP3 of DUART 2 is used to modify buzzer frequency.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–111

The alphanumeric keyboard and the keys and indicator lamps on the PROGRAM-X ControlConsole are seen as a line/column matrix and are scanned by polling for processing. OutputOP3 of DUART 1 triggers an interrupt every 1 ms. The interrupt is used for multiplexing theindicator lamps and scanning the keyboards.

Indicator lamp multiplexing is inhibited by watchdog to avoid damaging the lamps ifmultiplexing is blocked.

The graphic screen, 512 pixels x 256 lines, receive the vertical and horizontal sync signalsgenerated by the 20 x 8 PALs (B23 and B27), and 10 MHz pixel clock, as well as the videosignal from a shift register, 74HC6166 (B43).

The 32K x 8 video memory has its addresses multiplexed when the microprocessor is writingnew data or is refreshing the screen.

A bidirectional buffer, 74HCT645 (B41), located on the video memory data is used to accessthe video memory to the microprocessor.

PAL, 22V10 (B36), is used to access arbitration to the video RAM between the CPU and thescreen refresh.

Output OP7 of DUART1 controls video reverse.

The board is supplied by 15 V AC, which is rectified, filtered and regulated at 12 V DC (1A)by an Lm 338 installed in a heatsink to supply the video screen.

The 5 V DC is produced by a non–isolated dc–dc converter (3A maximum).

15–4 Switches, jumpers, LEDs and test points

See Central Listings: PROGRAM-X Control panel and Front panel board M in ServiceManual.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–112

SECTION 16PRINT-X FUNCTION

See Illustration 1–60.

16–1 Purpose of PRINT-X

PRINT-X is a printer compatible with the MPH Generator range. PRINT–X is used to printradiography and fluoroscopy parameters and patient dose for each examination.

16–2 PRINT-X Composition

PRINT-X is composed of:

� Power supply MPH A9 A2 mounted on the Control Console MPH A7.

� Printer MPH A9 A1 mounted on the Control Console MPH A7.

16–3 PRINT-X

PRINT-X is a 40-column printer with a standard RS232C serial link using X–ON X–OFFprotocol.

ILLUSTRATION 1–60PRINT–X BLOCK DIAGRAM

��

��

��

��!�� "��

�

��!��

��"�� $��

��

��!� �� $

#��

�

�

#��

��

��

��

��

�#�

�#�

�#�

�#�

��

��

��

��

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–113

16–3–1Function equivalence chart

Generator PROGRAM–X V2.0PRINT–X

programming Prestored protocol – OM Message on screenPRINT–X

Funct.

SETE A SFD REMOTE SFD SFD

TOSE B TOMO SFD TOMO SFD TomoS

DIR C DIRECT REMOTE TABLE TOP TabTopEN

PHOT D PHOTO REMOTE PHOTO PhotoNG

NUME E DIGITAL DIGITAL Digit.GL

POTA F HORIZONTAL BUCKY HOR. BUCKY BuckyHLI

TOPO G BUCKY TOMO TOMO BUCKY TomoBIS DIR (H) DIRECT HANGER (1) DIRECT TabTopSH POMO I VERTICAL BUCKY VERT. BUCKY BuckyVH

TONU J DIGITAL TOMO DIGIT. TOMO TomoD

PULM CHEST CHANGER CHEST CHANGER Chest

CHAN FILM CHANGER FILM CHANGER Chger

Fonct.

SETE A SELECTEUR TDE SELECTEUR Sel.

TOSE B TOMO SELECTEUR TOMO SELECTEUR TomoS

DIR C DIRECT TDE DIRECT Dir.

F PHOT D PHOTO TDE PHOTO PhotoFR NUME E NUMERISATION NUMERISATION Num.

E POTA F POTTER HORIZONTAL POTTER HOR. Pot.H

N TOPO G TOMO POTTER TOMO POTTER TomoP

C DIR H DIRECT SUSPENSION DIRECT Dir.H POMO I POTTER VERTICAL POTTER VERT. Pot.V

TONU J TOMO NUMERISEE TOMO NUM TomoN

PULM Not existing CHANGEUR PULMON. Pulm.

CHAN Not existing CHANGEUR FILM Chger

Func.

SETE A SERIADOR TDA SERIADOR Seria.

TOSE B TOMO SERIADOR SERIADOR TOMO TomoS

DIR C DIRECTO TDA DIRECTO Dir.SP

PHOT D FOTO TDA FOTO FotoPA

NUME E DIGITALIZACION DIGITALIZACION Digit.AN

POTA F BUCKY HORIZONTAL BUCKY HOR. BuckyHNI

TOPO G TOMO BUCKY TOMO BUCKY TomoBIS DIR H DIRECTO SUSPENCION DIRECTO Dir.SH POMO I BUCKY VERTICAL BUCKY VERT. BuckyVH

TONU J TOMO DIGITALIZADA TOMO DIG. TomoD

PULM Not existing CAMBIADOR TORAX Torax

CHAN Not existing CAMB DE PELLICULA Camb.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–114

Generator PROGRAM–X V2.0PRINT–X

programming Prestored protocol – OM Message on screenPRINT–X

Funkt.

SETE A ZIELGERAET ZIELGERAET Zielg.

TOSE B TOMO ZIELG. TOMO ZIELG. TomoZ

DIR C AT PRESTILIX AT AT

G PHOT D PHOTO PHOTO PhotoGE NUME E DIGITAL DIGITAL Digit.

R POTA F TISCH BUCKY TISCH BUCKY BuckyT

M TOPO G TOMO BUCKY TOMO BUCKY TomoB

A DIR H AT XT ROEHRE AT ATN POMO I WAND BUCKY WAND BUCKY BuckyW

TONU J DIGITAL TOMO DIGITAL TOMO TomoD

PULM Not existing CHEST CHANGER Chest

CHAN Not existing FILM WECHSLER Wechs.

Funz.

SETE A SERIOGRAFO SERIOGRAFO Seriog

TOSE B TOMO SERIOGRAFO TOMO SERIOGRAFO TomoS

DIR C DIRETTA TELECOMANDATO DIRETTA Diret.IT

PHOT D FOTO FOTO FotoTA

NUME E DIGITALE DIGITALE Digit.AL

POTA F POTTER ORIZZONTALE POTTER ORIZZONTALE Pot.OLI

TOPO G TOMO POTTER TOMO POTTER TomoPIA DIR H DIRETTA DA SOSPENSIONE DIRETTA Dir.AN POMO I POTTER VERTICALE POTTER VERTICALE Pot.VN

TONU J TOMO DIGITALE TOMO DIGITALE TomoD

PULM Not existing TORACICA Torace

CHAN Not existing ANGIO RAPIDO Angio

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–115

SECTION 170-POINT MODE

17–1 Presentation

17–1–1Definition

The 0-Point Mode is an automatic exposure-factor generating mode which provides thephysician with an exposure having contrast and exposure suited to the current examinationand the region of anatomy being observed.

0-Point Mode is a radiographic mode whose kV and mAs parameters are calculated from agenerator-specific calibration, making allowance for the equivalent radiological thickness psupplied by the fluoroscopy, the translation tables (p, and kV) specific to the examination, andthe constraints of the generator and image quality.

17–1–2Purpose

The purpose of the 0-Point Mode is to automatically select the exposure factors in either DRSTechnique or Film Technique.

The only difference between the two techniques is the method of calibration. This is due to thedifference between the two characteristics of the image receptors of the two techniques (IIRand screen-film combination).

17–1–3Requirements

The requirements necessary for using the 0-Point Mode are:

a. Preparation fluoro sequence which provides the system with a measurement of theequivalent radiological thickness of the patient region considered by the MPH.

b. LUTs (p, and kV) specific to examination types (detection tasks).

c. Specification of ranges inside which the physician agrees to develop the exposurefactors.

d. Calibration allowing the exposure factors to be generated from a, b, and c above andfrom operating selections on the console.

17–1–4Sequence of Operations

The sequence of operations for the 0-Point Mode has two stages:

1. Preparation fluoro,

2. Rad exposure (no modification of kV, mA, mAs, ms or focal spot).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–116

17–1–5Constraints

Service

For the nominal operation of 0-Point Mode, it is essential that the system is carefullycalibrated:

� At installation,

� Following any major servicing (e.g., x-ray tube replacement).

This calibration concerns fluoro, dose and regulation dose rate at the II window, II field ratios,and AEC for Film and DRS.

System

The radiological thickness measurement should be made in fluoro through an II. Anyapplication of the 0-Point Mode on a Bucky off-centered to the x-ray tube/II (i.e.,wall-mounted, additional, etc.) is not permitted.

17–2 Ergonomics

17–2–1Access

To access 0-Point Mode, press the Z key (located below the three fluoro-curve selection keys).

17–2–2Exposure-Factor Display on Control Console

Exposure factors displayed in 0-Point Mode: kv and N exposures.

When entering 0-Point mode and when all operations modifying the thickness p indicated tothe generator are complete, the kV display flashes to indicate that a preparation exposure isrequired.

17–2–3Focal Spots

� The small focal spot is selected by default. The large focal spot is automatically selectedwhen required by the the exposure factors calculated for the 0-Point Mode.

� The operator can select the focal spot manually, but automatic selection is lost unless theoperator exits and re-enters 0-Point Mode.

� The focal spot selection can be programmed so that manual mode remains actuated.

17–2–4Automatic operations

When the fluoro is in Automatic Mode (ABC regulation), the rad phototimer is selected (AECactivated).

In DRS 0-Point Mode only, going to Manual Fluoro deselects the rad phototimer (AECdeactivated). However, in 0-Point Mode for Film Technique, the phototimer is still activated.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–117

17–2–5kV Override

The rad kV values provided can be modified via the kV+ and kV– keys. The two keys remainlighted throughout the override modification.

Exit from override can occur as follows:

� When exiting from 0-Point Mode,

� When changing the fluoro curve,

� When the difference between the thickness known to the generator during the overrideand the equivalent thickness p measured during a later fluoroscopy sequence differs fromthe hysteresis in thickness programmed in the Service Terminal (Lg).

17–2–6CVN

Available. The CVN can cause the displayed kV value to change because it changes theequivalent thickness p seen by the generator.

17–2–7Preprogrammed Examinations

Three detection tasks are preprogrammed (e.g., bone, barytes, and iodine). Each detectiontask is accessed via one of the three keys A, B, or C.

Each detection task has a data set as follows:

� Contrast (kV)/thickness p for thicknesses between 0 and 40 cm equivalent,

� kV ranges used to restrict the effective excursion of kV values during the detection,

� Time limitations, which have the same use as for the exposure time,

� Priority selection: kV if the examination favors contrast (e.g., bone), time if theexamination favors short exposure time (e.g., TOGD).

The four data sets above are set by default, but may be mofidied according to userrequirements via the Service Terminal.

17–2–8Sequence in 0-Point Mode

1. Select one of the three fluoroscopy curves.a detection task by selecting

The system operates automatically as follows:

a. Selects a detection task.

b. Fluoro sequence: Patient thickness is measured during the sequence (fluorocalibration).

c. Run a fluoro sequence.

d. Rad sequence: As a function of the thickness measured and of the fluoro curve(detection task) selected, the (corresponding) kV values are calculated. The mAsvalues required for correct exposure are calculated as a function of a specificcalibration at the rad image receptor. The mAs and ms values are calculatedaccording to constraints such as anode temperature.

e. Once the exposure factors (kV, mA, and ms) are known, the exposure can be made.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–118

17–3 Determining Rad kV Values: Rad LUT (p, kV)

When the equivalent rad thickness is determined, the thickness/kV equivalent is madeaccording to the LUT selected.

There are three rad LUTs in DRS Technique, the fluoro curve selection acts as anatomicselector.

In Film Technique, the selection is more like a anatomic matrix, the rad LUT being selected asa function of the fluoro curves and the screen-film combination selected. There are thereforenine (or 15) Film rad LUTs.

Each of these LUTs is decidated to an examination type (e.g., single layer contrast, doublelayer contrast, and bone).

17–4 Technical Limitations of Image Quality and of Physician

Once the kV values are read in the rad LUT, they can be modified: a) within thermallimitations (anode heat status, maximum authorized values for mA, etc.), and b) according tothe limitations previously specified for each type of examination made by the physician (userlimits and priority selected for kV or exposure time).

17–4–1Limits

Limits: these are the kV values or exposure times which allow the user to define the desired ortolerated kV variation and exposure time for each examination type.

Generally, this is an interval of optimum values contained within an interval of acceptablevalues.

Limits are assigned to: min, inf , sup, and Max.

The interval [min, Max] refers to the ultimate limits authorized by the physician for a givenTechnique and examination type. These limits can also be determined by the technicalconstraints or by IQ.

The interval [inf, sup] refers to the limits desired by the physician for a given Technique orexamination type. The interval limits are the Optimal IQ Limits.

Definitions:

kV min: this avoids automatically falling to 40 kV (radiation often too soft due to generatingtoo much absorbed dose, providing an image of little use).

kV inf, kV sup: specific optimum range for a given Technique/examination typecombination.

kV Max: limitation of loss of contrast (useless to raise to 150 kV in automatic, the image isgrid patterned and unusable).

t min: allows for technical limitations of the system.

t sup: avoids motion blurring.

t Max: adaptation to characteristics of the Technique (e.g., 500 ms in DRS).

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–119

17–4–2Priority

As a function of the thickness (radiological thickness, limits, and anode temperature status),the 0-Point Mode algorithm can modulate the kV value and exposure time.

The values of the two parameters vary according to the examination type.

Example:

Consider typical bone and barite washing examples in Film Technique:

The first examination prioritizes a specific contrast but is tolerant as to exposure time (nomovement, however). In calculating the exposure factors constraints, it is desirable toprioritize kV stability and adapt to the conditions by varying the exposure time within thetolerated limits.

The second examination, although prioritizing contrast, also prioritizes a low exposure timedue to peristaltic movement. It is preferable to maintain the exposure time within the desiredinterval while the kV values can vary within the tolerance.

This examination type selection function is made by defining the priority: a choice betweenkV priority and time priority is given for each LUT (similar to the aperture/exposure speedpriority in the today’s camera).

See Illustration below.

ILLUSTRATION 1–61

kV min kV inf kV sup kV Max kV

t

t Max

t sup

t inf

t min

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ


kVt

t

kV

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

kV

t

t priority:Degraded kVOptimal t

Degraded kVDegraded t

Optimalzone

kV priority

t priority

kV priority:Optimal kVDegraded t

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

1–120

17–5 Using the LUTs

For x-ray systems equipped with II 22 the following LUTs are preselected:

� Chart 10 in SFD Technique for a slow screen–film combination,

� Chart 11 in SFD Technique for a standard screen–film combination,

� Chart 12 in SFD Technique for a fast screen–film combination,

For x-ray systems equipped with II 32 the following LUTs are preselected:

� Chart 9 in Digital Technique,

� Chart 10 in SFD Technique for a slow sreen film combination,

� Chart 11 in SFD Technique for a standard sreen film combination,

� Chart 12 in SFD Technique for a fast sreen film combination,

For x-ray systems equipped with II 40 the following LUT is preselected:

� Chart 13 in Digital Technique,

Note: The LUTs for SFD do not exist because the x-ray systems are not equipped with a spotfilmcamera.

17–6 Parameter Modification

1. LUT setup.

Each kV/thickness combination must be kept at its starting value, whatever the techniqueor curve.

2. Time Limits

The time limits must be kept at their starting value.

3. Override.

Maintain the value of n.

4. lg

If the Operator wishes to keep the modified kV values always in 0-Point Mode (kVoverride), set lg to 99. The kV values are set automatically if the Operator changes thecurve or at the next access to 0-Point Mode.

Following modification of the kV values, if the Operator wishes always return to theautomatic kV setting, set lg to 0 (zero).

The lg default value is 7 (the most practical user mode).

17–7 Prestored LUT content

Please refer to Job Card RG 011 of Service Manual.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

A1–1

APPENDIX 1 – FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

SECTION 1FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1–1 Introduction

The ROOM_IF_CPU is installed in the upper part of the MPH generator. This boardcontains a CPU–68302 processor, which enables it to execute certain programs locally, andto communicate with the PU_CTRL_CPU Master Board via an HDLC link.

Power is supplied to the board by an external power source (+ 5 V, + 15 V, – 15 V). Theboard has a built-in supply voltage control.

The board has the following features:

� CPU–68302 at 16 MHz,

(EPROM, SRAM, Timer, Watchdog, RS232 debug, PRD).

� RS485 Interface with PU_CTRL_CPU Master Board (CPU–68360),

(UART links, HDLC link, exposure control inputs and output,ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET line).

� AEC Interface,

(Tracking meter, chamber selection and control).

� Fluoroscopy Interface,

(HVPM RAD Mode commands).

� Room Interface,

(All-or-nothing inputs and outputs, with or without galvanic insulation).

� User Interface,

(CONSOLE, TAV, PROG_X, and PRINT_X links).

� Self-diagnosis capability.

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

A1–2

ILLUSTRATION 1–62SYSTEM FLOWCHART

CPU–68302

PU_CTRL_CPU Interface

AEC Interface

FLUOROSCOPY Interface

POWER Control

ROOM Interface

User Interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE

CONNECT. PU_CTRL_CPU

– RS485 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

COAX ARCNET

POWER_OK

REF10V_OKPOWER SUPPLY

POWER TEST LEDS

– REFERENCE 10V, 1V24

– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

CONSOLE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

BP RESET

BP ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER

– VERSION REGISTER

– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTER

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V

– SWITCHABLE GAIN

– TRACKING METER

– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– DAC

– SAFETY RESET

USER CONNECTION

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS485 DRIVERS

– FLUOROSCOPY REGISTER

– OPEN COL. DRIVERS

– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG)

RF CONNECTOR

RF POWER CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

HANDSWITCH CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTICAL COUPLERS

– RELAYS

– DRIVERS (OPEN COL.)

– REGISTERS (ROOM I/F)

CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

A2–1

APPENDIX 2 – USER INTERFACE


The PU_CTRL_CPU Board exchanges information with the TAV, GPX, or TJ, and with theconsole, the Progam-X (UART series-type links), the ROOM_IF_CPU Board (HDLC serieslink and parallel link) and sends display commands to a Print-X printer (UART series-typelink).

SECTION 2USER/MACHINE INTERACTIONS

2–1 Service Terminal, GPX Console, or Console

Document SDRS TJ.

Remote Console Document SDRS RF.

LIGHTED FLASHING

Workstations 1 thru 8 Workstation 1 thru 8 selected Never

Large Focus Large focus selected in Rad Mode In Zero-Point Mode to indicate betterfocus selection

Small Focus Small Focus selected in Rad Mode Never

Two-Point Mode Two-Point Mode or Three-Point mAsTomography selected

Never

Three-Point Mode Three-Point Mode or Three-Point mATomography selected

Never

Zero-Point Mode Zero-Point Mode selected To indicate that Zero-Point mode is notuse full

100% load Never 100% load selected

Fast kV Never Never

Rad kV +Rad kV –

Rad mAs or mA +Rad mAs or mA –

Rad ms or N +Rad ms or N –

Never To indicate how to reset computerinhibit

Rad reset error Never Aborted exposure or error displayed

Tube temperature > 70�C > 40�C and no circulation of water

Generator interlock Switching tube delay < 5 sec, abortedexposure, tube temperature > 70�C, or

calculated number of exposure < 1

Room door not closedor

Integrated Console inhibition

Rad Ready lamp In Rad Mode when tube rotation andheating are ok

To indicate Rotor inhibition

TH

EO

RY

OF

OP

ER

AT

ION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

A2–2

FLASHINGLIGHTED

RX Emission lamp In Fluoro and Rad when X–Ray on Never

Buzzer Aborted exposure, Pulse at exposure end

fluoro time > 4 mn 30 sec

Screens 1 thru 3 Screen/Film 1 thru 3 selected innon-DRS technique

In Zero-Point Film Mode to indicatebetter film/screen selection

Left, right cell AEC active and cell selected Small format information and cellselected

Central cell AEC active and central cell selected Never

Film blackening +Film blackening –

Never Never

FluoroscopyCurves 1 thru 3

Fluoroscopy active andFluoroscopy Curves 1 thru 3 selected

Never

Fluoroscopy dose display Never Never

Fluoroscopy time reset Never Fluoroscopy active and totalfluoroscopy time reached 4 min 30 s

Automatic fluoroscopy Fluoroscopy active and Automaticselected

Fluoroscopy active and Manual selected

2–2 Program-X

Document spec_program-X.

SECTION 3PROGRAM OUTPUTS FOR USER INFORMATION

A printer may be connected to the ROOM_IF_CPU Board. The PU_CTRL_CPU Board sendsexposure parameters to the ROOM_IF_CPU Board via the HDLC link. The PU_CTRL_CPUBoard sends this information to the Print-X via the UART series-type link.

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–1

CHAPTER 2 – BLOCKS DIAGRAMS


BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–2

ILLUSTRATION 2–1��

��#

�� $(�%��

(�%� #�� %�

� �%# �

�� #�&�%

�#��#

��

'��

�&% %#��$0

� #��#

�!� � �%

�� '��

�$ ��%��

��%# ��$ � #

! (�#0 � $�"&��

!�&� �&)��#*$&!!�*

� �#�� !�#% � %��

� �$ ��

��

� �$ ��

$%��*

$(�%��

��%��

�)%��$� �

#��

%

! (�#

&��%

!#�$%�0

��)

�� .-+/,�

��

'��

$*$%�� #��*

$% !��#�&�% �#��#

� (�� )

�� !&%

��#��*

$(�%��

$*$%��

��#��* $% !

��&��

#�$�%

��

'��

�!� �� (�# ��%�

#� # #��

! $�%� �0

��# ��%

��

��

��

��%

��

��

�!� � �

��%�

�!� �� %��!� � $(

�� %

�� %

��%

��%

��%

� ��%

��%

��%

��%

��

�!) ��

��$!��*��$!��* $� �� #��

% � ��

# )%

��

�% �% �% �% �% �% �% �% �% �%

� ��

%- %-

��

! (�#

$&!!�* � �#�

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–3

ILLUSTRATION 2–2�PH MA LOOP FUNCTION

PU_CTRL.BOARD CMD1.BOARD

HV TANK

TUBE 1

TUBE 2

HIGH

VOLTAGE

HIGH

VOLTAGE

CATHODE mA MEAS

ANODE mA MEASSTATUS

mA MEASURE

RANGE SELECTJ22

J22

MPH A4 A3 MPH A4 A1

J2

J2

J3 J1

MPH A2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–4


PU_CTRL.BOARD CMD2.BOARD HEATER.BOARDCOMMANDS

REF LEVEL

STATUS

MEASURE

XS IGBT CMDS

XS CURR MEAS

XL IGBT CMDS

XL CURR MEASJ19

J19

MPH A4 A3 MPH A4 A1 MPH A5 A1

J2

J2

J1J1J4

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–5


PU_CTRL.BOARD CMD1.BOARDMAINPS.BOARD

ON/OFFCONTACTOR

_POW_ON GEN_ON

MPH A4 A1

J2

MPH A4 A1

_POW ON CMD

DC BUS FAULT

SY

S_O

N

ON/OFFCONTROL CONSOLE

MPHA7

J12

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

MPH A6 A3

J9

J4

J5

J2MPH A3 A2

J5

_SYS_ON

OK DC BUS

ON ENABLE

ROOMCONTACTOR

MPH A1 K1

MPH A3 K1

_

J2J2

THERMO SWITCH

CommandC

omm

and

J1

MPH A3 T1

AUTOTRANSFORMER

J2 MPH A1 AT1

TRANSFORMERROOM

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–6


PU_CTRL.BOARDCMD2.BOARD

HEATER.BOARD HV TANK TUBE 1

TUBE 2

HEATER CMDSTATUS

ROTCTL CMDSTATUS

HV SW CMDSTATUS

HE

AT

ER

CM

DS

TAT

US

HV

SW

CM

DS

TAT

US

ROTCTL.BOARD

ROTCTL CMDSTATUS

HV SW CMDSTATUS

XS+XL TUBE 1

XS +XL TUBE 2

HEATER TUBE 1

HEATER TUBE 2

kV TUBE 1

kV TUBE 2

ROTOR TUBE 1

ROTOR TUBE 2

J4

J2 J2

J1MPH A5 A1

MPH A2

MPH A3 A3 MPH A3 A2

MPH A5 A2

J19 J4 J2 J1J4

J5

J1 J1

J1 J1

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–7


PUCTRL.BOARD CMD1.BOARD

CMD2.BOARD

MAINPS.BOARD

SUPPLYPOWER

SU

PP

LYP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LYP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LYP

OW

ER

+15 V

–15 V

+5 V

+24 V

LV ENABLE

LV E

NA

BLE

INVERT.BOARDSUPPLY

POWER

311 Vdc

+15 V

–15 V

+5 V

+15VROOM IF CPU

J10

J1 J5

MPH A6 A1

J3

J19MPH A4 A3

J23

MPH A 6 PS2

MPH A 5 PS1 MPH A 5 PS2

J7 J7J5 J5MPHA3 A2

MPH A3 A3

MPH A3 A2

MPH A3 A1J6J1 J1

LV O

N

24 V OK

POWERSUPPLY

J4

J1

FAN

J2

J5

J4

J23

J1

MPH A3 T1

AUTOTRANSFORME

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–8


PU_CTRL.BOARD

CMD1.BOARD

INVERT.BOARDHV TANK

TUBE 1

TUBE 2

COMMANDS

REF LEVEL

STATUS

KV MEAS

IGBT CMDS

FLOATING PS

INV CURRENT

HF CURRENT

HIGHVOLTAGE

HIGHVOLTAGE

KV MEASURE

J22

J23

J22

J23MPH A4 A3

MPH A4 A1

MPH A3 A3 MPH A2

J2

J23

J23

J2

J8

J8 J3

J3

P1 P2 P1 P2

J9–J10KV+ KV–

MEAS

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–9


PU_CTRL.BOARD

INVERT.BOARD

CMD1.BOARD

CMD2.BOARD ROTCTL.BOARD

MAINPS.BOARD

HEATER.BOARD

DC_FILTER BOARD

DC POWER

DC POWER

DC MEASUREDC LEVELDC LEVEL

DC

LE

VE

LMPH A3 A3 MPH A3 A1

MPH A5 A2MPH A5 A1

MPH A4 A3

MPH A4 A2

MPH A3 A2

J22 J2

MPH A4 A1

J5

J1

J5

J5

J4J5

J4J5

DC

PO

WE

R

J6

J2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–10


PU_CTRL.BOARD CMD2.BOARD

TUBE 1

TUBE 2

COMMANDS

STATUS

DRIVETUBE 1

DRIVETUBE 2

IGBT CMDS

CURRENT MEASROTCTL.BOARD

ROTOR

ROTOR

MPH A3 A2

MPH A3 A2ST2 SEC2

ST1 SEC1

MPH A4 A3 MPH A4 A2

MPH A5 A2

J4

J5

J4 J2J19 CommandsSUPPLY

J7J6

J2

J5J3/J4

CHILLER orLOST-WATERCOOLER

CH1

CHILLER BoardMPH A5 A1

MPH A3 T1

AUTOTRANSFORMERMAINPS.BOARD

MPH A3 A2

J7J1

J3

115Vac

FANS

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–11

Blank page.

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–12

ILLUSTRATION 2–10DCPS BLOCK DIAGRAM (SEE SM SCHEMATIC FOR DETAILS)

F3

100 A

F2

100 AF1

100 AXJ3

4

R1

1

�

1 3 5 21

2 4 6 22

R S T GND

EMCFILTER

MPH A3 FL1

MPH A1 SW1

MPH A3 K1 (CT2)

A

B

See ON/OFFBlock diagram

17 �F

DS1

0,47

DC FILTER BOARD – MPH A3–A1

F4

15 A

F5

5 A

3000 �F

3000 �F

XJ4

XJ5

XJ2

XJ5XJ6

1 3

1 3

1–2–3

10–11–12

+ DC

– DC

R7/2.7 k�

0 VM + 10 VM+ 15 VM

DC < 30 V

– 15 VM

MAINS PS – BOARD MPH A3–A2

U4

U4

U1

U4

U1

DS1

DS2

U5

U6

U7

400 < DC < 780

+ 10 V

+ 10 V

DS7

0 V

+ 5 VS

DS4

DS3– 15 VM

+ 15 VM

0 VM

5 VS

0 V

U2

U8+ 10 VM

0 VM

0 VM

U9

U11

0 VM0 V

0 VM

U10

+ 5 V

16

142

20

9

11

1

6

+ M

EA

S–S

UP

PLY

– M

EA

S–S

UP

PLY

ME

AS

–DC

–BU

S

MAINS

–ON–ENABLE

–OK–DC–BUS

MEAS DC BUS 0

MEAS DC BUS 1

+ 5 VS

–DC–DROP–RESET

1–2–3

10–11–12

+ DC

– DC

+ DC–BUS

– DC–BUS

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–13

ILLUSTRATION 2–10DCPS BLOCK DIAGRAM (SEE SM SCHEMATIC FOR DETAILS) (CONT’D)

1–2–3

10–11–12

XJ5COMMAND 1

BOARDMPH A4–A1

SeeBlock Diagram

page 4/70+ 5 V

+ 5 VNF

0 V

0 V

BP1

16

142

1314

20

9

11

–ON–ENABLE

–OK–DC–BUS

MEAS DC BUS 0

MEAS DC BUS 1

+ 5 VS

–DC–DROP–RESET

XJ2

+ DC

– DC

XJ34

1

9 3 6 10 1211

7 3 1 15 1116LF

TUBEI

LFTUBE

II

SFTUBE

I

SFTUBE

II

HV–TANK–MPH A2

HEATER BOARD MPH A5–A1

X301

Q201

Q202

220 nF

C205

X301

Q101

Q102 220 nF

C105

XJ2 ROTOR CONTROLLER BOARDMPH A5–A2+ DC

C1000

C1001 I

II

I

II

X2

1–XJ5

P

C

A

P

C

A

1–XJ4

4–XJ4

LS

X1HS

12–16/XJ4–XJ5

4– XJ5

X2LS

X1HS

(See stator BlockDiagram)

STATOR I/STATOR II

INVERTER BOARD – MPH A3–A3

HV–TANKMPH A2

HV+

HV–

To X–Ray tube

P2

P1

P1

P2

T21

T22

C100T11

T12

+ DC–BUS

– DC–BUS

XJ2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–14

ILLUSTRATION 2–11ON/OFF AND LV SUPPLIES BLOCK DIAGRAM

MPH A3 K1

R S T GND

MAINS

EMC FILTER

MPH A3 FL1

MPH A1 SW1

SeeDCPS

BLOCK DIAGRAM

MPH A3 T1

B

A

480 V455 V

430 V405 V380 V

240 V220 V115 V0480 V

220 V

0220 V

ROOM DISTRIBUTION MPH A1

See Room DistributionBlock Diagram in Service Manual

MPH A1 AT1

TH

TH230 V

0 VF16–10A

F17–10AMPH A1 A1

12

UPPERCABINET

MAINS–PS–BOARDMPH A3–A2XJ2 XJ5

710

1

4

3

6

3

9

21

1

24

2023

1

XJ1

4

XJ3

B

A

MPH A1 K2(CT1)

(CT2)

Phase 3Phase 2Phase 1

�2–S

Common–CT

115 V–S

�1–S

Phase 1–S

See Tube FunctionBlock Diagram

X2

X2

X1

X1

F1–3A

TB1

F2–3A

F3–3A

THERMAL – SAFETY

DS11

DS6X1

X2

24 VL

+ 15 VR

SeeDCPSBlock

diagram

3 �Detector

T1–T2–U12

15 VS

– 15 VS

5 VS

0 V

U13C24/C25R85/82 k�

+ 300 V

0300 V

DS12

3–6

1–4

XJ4

DS7 DS9 DS8

17

11–21

232420

0 V

–PH–ON

2526

6

53

4

16

–GEN–ON

–SYS–ON

–ON–ENABLE

XJ5

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–15

ILLUSTRATION 2–11ON/OFF AND LV SUPPLIES BLOCK DIAGRAM (CONT’D)

EXTENSION RACK MPH A6

XJ5

1 3 17–21 18 13

1622F1

XJ3

3A F23A

1–43–6

XJ2

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD MPH A6–A3

TRANSFORMERMPH A6–A7 MPH A6 PS1

+ 5 V/+ 15 VMPH A6 PS2

15 VRF

L N L NCONTROLCONSOLE

MPH A7

XJ2

XJ2OFF

14–15–33–3414 Vac

17–18–36–37

25

24

619

125

24

J12

ON

XJ10 XJ1A XJ1B XJ5 XJ73–4–7 2 5 6 8 12 XJ9

7 6 2

K1K2

ON/OFF

XJ1 J102–5 3–6 1 4 8 12

ROOM IF CPU MPH A6–A1230 Vac

or 115 Vac forwall BuckiesMPH A6–A4

To PrinterMPH A9

To IONchamber230 Vcc

ToProgram’XMPH A7

DS3 DS4

DS6

DS1

14–1533–34 36–37

17–18 1–43–6

F63.2 A

F9B3.2 A

F9A3.2 A

0 V

F7

3.2 ADS2

F43.2 AT

619

1

XJ13XJ14XJ15XJ16

P

F50.1 A

230 Vac

10 9 11–12XJ4 1–4 3–6 XJ6 9–12 7 10 4–6 1 3

8–11

DS5

DS7 DS9 DS10 DS8

0 VF13

3.2 AF12

3.2 AF14SAT

F113.2 A

+ 5

V

+ 1

5 V

– 15

V

15 V

RF

0 V

RF

F4

14 Vac 14–15–33–34

014 Vac

17–18–36–37

24 V

L–R

TN

24 V

L

–SY

S–O

N

FromMPH A6–A7

TRANSFORMER

BP1ON

BP2OFF

COMMAND 1 – BOARDMPH A4–A1

7 6 2

XJ7

XJ4

DS15

17

11–21

23

24

20

0 V

+ 15 VNF

– 15 VNF

+ 5 VNF

DS22

0 V

1–4 2–3 8–90 V

0 V

–PH–ON

2526

6

5

3

4

16

–GEN–ON

–SYS–ON

–ON–ENABLE

24 VL

–PH–OK

IN1

X5

15 VS

+ 15 VS

U20

+ 15 V – 15 V

X5

�TU21

� 5

24 VL RTN24 VL

Q4

XJ2

XJ1

XJ7

15

45

DS16DS17

DS18

DS14

DS21

DS19

DS20

DS13

DS11

DS12

X10 X6X6

15 VS

X10R

15 VS24 V

�T1U21

�T2U21

5 V

– 15 V+ 15 V

X6X10

R

X10

X10

X6X6

R

R

+5 V

+ 15 V

– 15 V

5–6

7–10

11–12

F4

F2

F3

F1–2A

L

N

MPH A5PS1

L N

MPH A5 PS2

F5

SAT 24 VS

–POW–ON–CMD

PU–CTRL–CPU

MPH A3–A4

–POW–ON

U2 U7Phase

controller

To CMD2MPH A4–A2+ 24 V – OLEO31–3233–34

For gatecontrol

B

115 Vac

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–16

ILLUSTRATION 2–12SERIAL LINKS BLOCK DIAGRAM

U47

68360

TAV.R

5MRYD2

5MTXD2

U67

SMTXD2–232

SMRXD2–232

U66

11

MAX

23212

14

13

SMRXD2–485(not used)

TXD4–232

TXD4

RXD4

TAV.R

J17

J18

0 V 5

3

2

Not used

TAVRXD4–232

U67

DEB.TVT220

5

4

6

8

7

3

2

TAV.T

U66

9 8

May232

10 7

DE–COM (1)

TXD3

RS–REBOUCLAGE–X (0)

RXD3

TDX4–485

RXD4–485

SMTXD1

SMRXD1

3

4

3

1

3

4

3

1

3

4

3

1

MAX485

DE

DI

A

B

U37

DE

R0

A

B

U36

DE

R0

A

B

U9

DE

R0

A

B

U8

DE

R0

A

B

U35

DE

R0

A

B

U34

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

U4968302

TXD2

RXD2

RX–DX3TX–DX3

J3 J5

F17–A

F17–B

F18–A

F18–B

F1–A

F1–B

F2–A

F2–B

F19–A

F19–B

F20–A

F20–B

ConsoleTX

ConsoleRX

TAV–TX

TAV–RX

PROGRAMYTX

PROGRAMYRX

23

57

24

58

1

35

2

36

25

59

26

60

23

57

24

58

1

35

2

36

25

59

26

60

F17–A

F17–B

F18–A

F18–B

F1–A

F1–B

F2–A

F2–B

F19–A

F19–B

F20–A

F20–B

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

DE

OUT

A

B

U34

DE

DI

A

B

U35

DE

OUT

A

B

U18

DE

DI

A

B

U19

DE

OUT

A

B

U40

DE

OUT

A

B

U41

MAX5853

1

3

4

3

1

3

4

3

1

3

4

Room if CPU–RESET (1)

Rebouclage – 1 – (0)

PU – CTRL – CPUMPH A4–A3

ROOM IF CPUMPH A6–A1

Test RX

Test TX

T1

R1

R2

11

12

9

MAX232

14

13

8

T1

R1

R2

U13

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–17

ILLUSTRATION 2–12SERIAL LINKS BLOCK DIAGRAM (CONT’D)

ROOM IF CPUMPH A6–A1

5

3

2

Not used

DEBUGJ4

J2

PUPITRE(–TX)

PUPITRE(RX)

TAV(TX)

TAV(RX)

PROG_X(TX)

PROG_X(RX)

PRINT_X(TX)

PRINT_X(RX)

REBOUCLAGE 2 (0)

VCC

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U26MAX485

3

24

1

6

7

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U32MAX485

3

24

1

6

7

VCC

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U39MAX485

3

24

1

6

7

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U44MAX4853

24

1

6

7

VCC

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U38MAX485

3

24

1

6

7

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U43MAX485

3

24

1

6

7VCC

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U25MAX485

3

24

1

6

7

DE_RE

DIR0

AB

U31MAX485

3

24

1

6

7

R?10%1%0.125W

PUPITRE_TX_APUPITRE_TX_B

R?10%1%0.125W

PUPITRE_RX_APUPITRE_RX_B

R?1001%0.125W

R?1001%0.125W

R?10%1%0.125W

TAV_TX_ATAV_TX_B

R?10%1%0.125W

TAV_RX_ATAV_RX_B

R?1001%0.125W

R?1001%0.125W

R?10%1%0.125W

PROG_X_TX_APROG_X_TX_B

R?10%1%0.125W

R?1001%0.125W

R?1001%0.125W

R?10%1%0.125W

PRINT_X_TX_APRINT_X_TX_B

R?10%1%0.125W

PRINT_X_RX_APRINT_X_RX_B

R?1001%0.125W

R?1001%0.125W

PROG_X_RX_APROG_X_RX_B

J11 J12 J1

J10

35

10

36

11

37

12

38

13

41

16

42

17

39

14

40

15

35

10

36

11

37

12

38

13

41

16

42

17

39

14

40

15

26

7

27

8

28

9

29

10

30

11

31

12

30

11

31

12

26

7

27

8

28

9

29

10

30

11

31

12

J130

11

31

12

J1

B1

B3

B47

B19

B47 B6

TAV or IntegratedConsole

DS3

RX

DS4

TX

DS7

RX

DS8

TX

Console

PROGRAM’X MPH A8–A1

DS6

DS5

TX RXXJ43 2

To Print’X MPH A9

DISTRIBUTION – BOARDMPH A6–A3

CONTROL CONSOLEMPH A7–A2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–18

ILLUSTRATION 2–13TUBE FUNCTION – STATOR CONNECTIONS – TUBE MX100

XJ2

–RESET–INFOU32 25

CMD1 BoardMPH A4–A1

7

XJ5

7

XJ5

–PUMP–ON

XJ1

XJ1

XJ7

DS13X3

+ 15 VR

3 1

See ON/OFFBlock Diagram

MAINS PS BOARDMPH A3–A2

DS5F33A

F43.2 A

20 23

F13A

21

9

1

480 V

220 V

115 V

0480 V Phase 1–S

115 VS

See ON/OFF Block Diagram

MPH A3–T1

MAINSSee ON/OFF

Block Diagram

XJ3

XJ149

–T2–SEL–START

ROTOR CTRL BOARD – MPH A5–A2

LS/HSSelection (X1)

Phase shiftcapacitor

(C1000–C1001)

3 1XJ1

DS6

X2

X2

K1

X5

XJ5

112–16

4

10

9

23

24

XJ4

X2

X2

K1

X2

X5

MAINSCOMMON

AUX

112–16

4

10

9

23

24

MAINS

COMMONAUX

46 48 COMMON–SAFETY

THERMAL–SAFETY

O/L

–PU

MP

–A

O/L

–PU

MP

–B+ 15 V

DS9

X2

K1

0 V

+ 15 V + 15 V

X2 X5

DS3

DS8

X2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–19

ILLUSTRATION 2–13TUBE FUNCTION – STATOR CONNECTIONS – TUBE MX100 (CONT’D)

XJ4

XJ249 46 48

29

35

39

29

35

39

–T2–SEL–START

THERMAL SAFETY

COMMON–SAFETY


J19

INIT

INIT25

XJ22

–RESET–INFO

MPH A1–A2PLUG PANEL

ST1135

10

7

11

12

MAINSCOMMONAUX

FAN

FAN

PRESSURE–SWITCH

PRESSURE–SWITCH

BlackWhiteGreen

Stator

MBrown

Blue

Orange

Yellow

Fan115 Vac

Pressureswitch

40°

X–RAY–TUBE 1

135

10

7

11

12

MAINSCOMMONAUX

FAN

FAN

PRESSURE–SWITCH

PRESSURE–SWITCH

BlackWhiteGreen

Stator

MBrown

Blue

Orange

Yellow

Fan115 Vac

Pressureswitch

40°

X–RAY–TUBE 2

3

1

3

1

XJA

ST2

XJB

�P

PU–CPUMPH A4–A3

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–20

ILLUSTRATION 2–14BLOCK DIAGRAM – TUBE FUNCTION – STATOR CONNECTIONS – TUBE CGR

XJ2



7

XJ5

7

XJ5

XJ1

XJ1XJ7

DS13X3

+ 15 VR

3 1



DS5F33A

F43.2 A

20 23

F13A

21

9

1

480 V

220 V

115 V

0480 V Phase 1–S

115 VS


MPH A3–T1

MAINSSee ON/OFF

Block Diagram

XJ3

XJ1

49


LS/HSSelection (X1)


(C1000–C1001)

3 1 XJ1DS6

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

46 48

COMMON–SAFETY

THERMAL–SAFETY

O/L

–PU

MP

–A

O/L

–PU

MP

–B

+ 15 V

DS9

X2

K10 V

+ 15 V + 15 V

X2 X5

DS3 DS8

XJ4

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

XJ5

47

1

12–16

4

10

9

23

24

21

22

1

12–16

4

10

9

23

24

21

22

0 V

0 V

X5

X2

X2

X2

K1

X5

X5

X2

X2

X2

K1

X5

WATER–SAFETY

–PUMP–ON

CR42

CR41

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–21

ILLUSTRATION 2–14BLOCK DIAGRAM – TUBE FUNCTION – STATOR CONNECTIONS – TUBE CGR (CONT’D)

XJ4

XJ249 46 48

29

35

39

29

35

39

–T2–SEL–START

THERMAL SAFETY

COMMON–SAFETY

CMD2 Board – MPH A4–A2

J19

INIT

INIT25

XJ22

–RESET–INFO

PLUG PANEL – MPH A1–A2

X–RAY–TUBE 1

220 V

47

4444 WATER–SAFETY

M

ST11

3

5

10

7

11

12

SEC1

1

2

P

C

A

1

2

3

4

PR170°C

40°C

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

THERMAL–SAFETY

WATER–SAFETY

M

P

C

A

ST21

3

5

10

7

11

12

SEC2

1

2

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

THERMAL–SAFETY 70°C

220 Vac

Not used

X–RAY–TUBE 2HOUSING ST240 SV

3

1

XJB 3 1 3 1 XJA

XJA

3

1

XJB

INTERFACE GAINE ST240 SVMounted on MPH A3–T1

K1

K1220 V

F1 3.2 AT

DS1 K1

33°C 45°C

PU–CPUMPH A4–A3

�P

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–22

ILLUSTRATION 2–15BLOCK DIAGRAM – TUBE FUNCTION – STATOR CONNECTIONS – TUBE MX 120

XJ2



7

XJ5

7

XJ5

XJ1

XJ1XJ7

DS13X3

+ 15 VR

3 1



DS5F33A

F43.2 A

20 23

F13A

21

9

1

480 V

220 V

115 V

0480 V Phase 1–S

115 VS


MPH A3–T1

MAINSSee ON/OFF

Block Diagram

XJ3

XJ1

49


LS/HSSelection (X1)


(C1000–C1001)

3 1 XJ1DS6

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

46 48

COMMON–SAFETY

THERMAL–SAFETY

O/L

–PU

MP

–A

O/L

–PU

MP

–B

+ 15 V

DS9

X2

K10 V

+ 15 V + 15 V

X2 X5

DS3 DS8

XJ4

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

47

1

12–16

4

10

9

23

24

21

22

1

12–16

4

10

9

23

24

21

22

0 V

0 V

X5

X2

X2

X2

K1

X5

X5

X2

X2

X2

K1

X5

WATER–SAFETY

–PUMP–ON

CR42

CR41

13

14

XJ5

2

3CHILLERBOARD

See Ill. 2–16

NOTUSED

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–23

ILLUSTRATION 2–15BLOCK DIAGRAM – TUBE FUNCTION – STATOR CONNECTIONS – TUBE MX 120

XJ4

XJ249 46 48

29

35

39

29

35

39

–T2–SEL–START

THERMAL SAFETY

COMMON–SAFETY


J19

INIT

INIT25

XJ22

–RESET–INFO


X–RAY–TUBE 1

220 V

47

4444 WATER–SAFETY

M

ST11

3

5

10

7

11

12

SEC1

1

2

1

3

5

11

12

1

2

70°C

40°C

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

THERMAL–SAFETY

WATER–SAFETY

M

P

C

A

ST21

3

5

10

7

11

12

MAINS

COMMON

AUX

PRESSURE–SWITCHPRESSURESWITCH

X–RAY–TUBE 2

3

1

XJA

3

1

XJB

40°C

PU–CPUMPH A4–A3

�P

10

7

5

6 OIL PUMP

5

6 OIL PUMP

FAN

WHITE

BROWN

ORANGE

YELLOW

FAN

FAN

PRESSURE–SWITCH

BLUE

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–24

ILLUSTRATION 2–16BLOCK DIAGRAM – TUBE FUNCTION – WATER CIRCULATION

XJ2



7

XJ5

7

XJ5

XJ1

XJ1XJ7

DS13X3

+ 15 VR

3 1



DS5F33A

F43.2 A

20 23

F13A

21

9

1

480 V

220 V

115 V

0480 V Phase 1–S

115 VS


MPH A3–T1

MAINSSee ON/OFF

Block Diagram

XJ3

XJ149


3 1 XJ1DS6

48

COMMON–SAFETY

O/L

–PU

MP

–A

O/L

–PU

MP

–B

+ 15 V

DS9

X2

K10 V

+ 15 V

X2 X5

DS3 DS8

47

4

0 V

X5

WATER–SAFETY

SEC1

–PUMP–ON

–T2–SEL–START

XJ4

XJ7

XJ5

1

21

22

4

9

10

2

14

13

6

21

22

X5

CR41

CR42

0 V

115 Vac

1

2


SEC21

2


5

6

3

2

XJ6

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–25

ILLUSTRATION 2–16BLOCK DIAGRAM – TUBE FUNCTION – WATER CIRCULATION (CONT’D)

XJ4

XJ249 48

29

39

29

39

–T2–SEL–START

COMMON–SAFETY


J19

INIT

INIT25

XJ22

–RESET–INFO

PLUG PANELMPH A1–A2

X–RAY–TUBE 1

47

4444 WATER–SAFETY

40°C

WATER–SAFETY

3

4

X–RAY–TUBE 240°C

WATER–SAFETY

3

4

–WATER–CMD

–WATER–SAFETY

–T2–SEL–START

WATER–SAFETY

–WATER–CMD

J24

9

10

2

14

13

6+ 15 VK2

+ 15 V

K1

FREE

CHILLER BOARD – MPH A5–A3

4

3

1

2

2

1

4

3

1 4 J5 J3K1

DS1K1

115 Vac

DS2K2

K2

J4

4

3

1

2

CH1

4

3

1

2

Chiller or lost water cooler

Controlwaterflow

Watercirculation

�P

PU–CPUMPH A4–A3

115 Vac

6 52 3

PUMP T1

PUMP T2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–26

ILLUSTRATION 2–17SWITCHING TUBE BLOCK DIAGRAM

XJ19

U68EPLD

OUTBUF

U50U45

CPU–BOARDMPH A4–A3

0 V

INIT

32

45

41

49

48

47

Bits

HV_SWITCH_CTRL

HV_SWITCH_MOTOR_OFF

T1_POSITION

T2_POSITION

HV_SWITCH_COMMON

HV_SWITCH_INDEX

XJ4

32

45

41

49

48

47

XJ1

6

38

36

37

41

39

47–48

40–4142–43

0 V

47–48XJ5

+ 24 V

COMMAND 2–BOARDMPH A4–A2

47–48XJ1

XJ3

1

3

2


COMMAND 1–BOARDMPH A4–A1

+ 24 V – OLEO

mA_Anode

mA_Cathode

mA_Return

K1

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–27

ILLUSTRATION 2–17SWITCHING TUBE BLOCK DIAGRAM (CONT’D)

HEATER–BOARDMPH A5–A1

XJ1

6

38

36

37

41

39

47–48

40–4142–43

XJ4

3

6

5

2

1

4

+ 15 V

DS302

X302

0 VX302

0 V

XJ3

5

10

13

8

2

1

6

14

12

XJ1

”

T1_POSITION

T2_POSITION

HV_SWITCH_COMMON

HV_SWITCH_INDEX

mA_Anode

mA_Cathode

mA_Return

mA_A

mA_C

T1

T2

M

HV+

HV–

I+

II+

I–

II–

HV TANKMPH A2

To X

–ray

tube

s

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–28

ILLUSTRATION 2–18AEC BLOCK DIAGRAM

HDLC CLK_AEC68302

68360

COUNTER DAC

.–. 2

GAIN

MUX

X1X10

5V

AEC_COMPBRIGHT_ION

U30

U49

U51K3 to K10

U17/U6

U12

U15

Q1

U5U4/U14

U30

J3 J5 J2

26

27

2829

305316

23

32733

Reset_AEC

V OUT 1

V OUT 2

V OUT 3

V OUT 4

AEC SELECTION

CELLS SELECTION

+ 15 V COMMON

PU_CTRL_CPUMPH A4 A3

ROOM_IF_CPUMPH A6 A1

TRANSFORMERMPH A6 A7


BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–29

ILLUSTRATION 2–18AEC BLOCK DIAGRAM (CONT’D)

��

POWER AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDMPH A6 A3

XJ3

16

13

1

3��

��

XJ3

3–6

1–4

DS4

+ 230 VDC �

�

XJ11

2726

28

29

305316

2332733

XJ15AEC1

XJ16AEC2

XJ13AEC3

XJ14AEC4

P

D

H

AJKF

P

P

P

D

DD

HH

H

AJKF

AJKF

AJKF

C

E

B

R

C

E

B

R

C

E

B

R

C

E

B

R

– 15 V

+ 230 VDC

– 15 V

– 15 V

SHIELD

V OUT 1

V OUT 2

V OUT 3

V OUT 4

SELECTION AEC1

SELECTION AEC2SELECTION AEC3

SELECTION AEC4+ 15 V

LEFT CELLMIDDLE CELL

RIGH CELL

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–30

Blank page.

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–31

ILLUSTRATION 2–19DIAGRAM OF INTERLOCK DOOR AND ROOM LIGHT

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY BD.

J6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

MAX

485U20

0VRF

K23 RAD


F6A

F6B

U922

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36

J5

7

41U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

0VRF

K23

led PG1

led GR1

OPTOU78_FLUORO_PREP_A

K20

9_FLUORO_REQUEST

U92

A4 8 _FLUORO_PREPled SC1

K20 FLUOROJ9

9

J5

TABLE BD From POSITIONNER

K24–K5 9

J2 SAS PL1

MM

13 13 18 DD

K14 FOOT SWITCHFLUORO

See RFblock diagram

see RF bloc diagram for RF

_PREP_SW

7 7

30 30

J4

K10

K9

JumpJ8 J9 2

1

8–9

6

4

Door switch

J5 J3

VAC2

VAC1

VAC2

1–2 7

93–6

From DIST BD XJ5

LINEON

X–RAYON

_PREP_SW

_FLUORO_REQUEST

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–32

ILLUSTRATION 2–20RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN DIRECT WORKSTATION

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

EXP_DEMAND

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

K19

K12

K14

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

OPTOU78

U69

MAX

485U20

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92

U67

2

4

17

5

6

A2

A1

A4

A3

Q2

D0_D15

K13

K19

K12

_WS_RAD

_WS_DIR_UX

_WS_DIR_UY

U61

U6615

Q16

2

5

Q1

Q2

*CR36



K22:PREP_SW

_START_EXP

K23:EXP_SW

J5

7

41


MA

X

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63 SEL_EXP_CMD1

SEL_EXP_CMD0EPLDU30

EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

SEL_EXP_CMD0:selection Exposure in Rad orFluoroSEL_EXP_CMD1:selection Exposure in Rad orFluoroK14: EXP_DEMAND in Direct Mode

U92

U92

U65

U65

U65

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

K12:Workstation DIRECT TubexK13:Workstation RADK19:Workstation DIRECT Tubey

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9 0VRF

K23

led PG1

led GR1

led GR2

led GR3

_WS_RAD

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–33

ILLUSTRATION 2–21RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM FOR WALL BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 1/2

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

MAX485U20

0VRFK23


F6A

F6B

U922

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36




D.DUMOURIER3/11/94

J57

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9 0VRF

K23

CONTROLCONSOLE


J7A or J7B

K24–9

_INHIBIT–EXP By COLLIMATOR see Rad interface Collima-tor Diagram

Sheet 1

99

D0_D15

_WS_RAD

K13:WORKSTATION RAD

led PG1

led GR1

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–34

ILLUSTRATION 2–22RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN WALL_BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 2/2

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

U81

U81

U65

Q5

Q6

12

15

14

16

K13

14

16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69

U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7

22

22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1

WALL BUCK.BD (Two Wall Buckies available)

K1

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

J1

K2

K3

K8

K7

J3

J5

4–6

4–6

1–2

1–2

START GRID

START GRID

START X–RAY

START X–RAY

7

9

7

91–2

1–2

K2

K1

K2

K1


XJ5


WALL BUCKY 2 WALL BUCKY 1

K7

K8

led GR2

led GR3DS4

DS2

DS3

DS1

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–35


J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOORJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

MAX

485U20

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36



J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

K23


J7A or J7B

K24–9

_INHIBIT–EXP by Collimator (see Collimator block diagram)

Sheet 1

9

D0_D15

_PREP_SW

_PREP_SW

K3 K1

or Jumps

CONTROL CONSOLE

_END_PREP1

BEGIN_END_EXP1

U65

U65

U67

U67

Q1 2

Q3 6

END_PREP

BEGIN_END_EXP

K11

K16

J2

K3

K3

K1

K1

7

24

28

7

24

28

9

K5

K4

K67–9

4–6

1–2

(K1–K3:see sheet 2 Arterio block dia-gram) )

ARTERIO

PREP INFO

END PREP INFO

BEGIN END EXP INFO

K13:WORKSTATION RAD

_WS_RAD

led PG1

led GR1

led PG2

led GR4

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–36


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

U81

U65

Q6 15 16

K13

16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69

U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1

WALL BUCK.BD

K1_WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

K3

K8

J1

J5

4–6

1–2

START X–RAY

7

91–2

1–2

K1

K1

AC SUPPLYFrom DIST.BD XJ5


TO ARTERIO

K8

ENABLE EXPled GR2

led GR4

led DS3

led DS4

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–37

ILLUSTRATION 2–25RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM FOR TABLE_BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 1/2

J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36


K24 K9:Inhibit Exposure by Collimator


J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9 0VRF

K23

CONTROL CONSOLE


J7A or J7B

K24–K9

_INHIBIT–by collimator If required see collimator block diagram

Sheet 1

99

D0_D15

K13:WORKSTATION RAD

led PG1

led GR1

_WS_RAD

MAX485U20

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–38

ILLUSTRATION 2–26RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN TABLE BUCKY WORKSTATION SHEET 2/2

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

K13

Sheet 2

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7A or B

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UX

J10

K25

K26

J11

J5

4–6

4–6

1–2

1–2

START GRID

START GRID

START X–RAY

START X–RAY

7

9

7

91–2

1–2

K17

K21

K26

K25


XJ5


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UY

(TWO TABLE BUCKY AVAILABLE)

10

12

10

12

Q36

Q49

U69

U69

K10

K17

K21

_EXP_START_BUCK_UX

_EXP_START_BUCK_UY

BUCKY TABLE 1 BUCKY TABLE 2

K27

K28

K18

K19

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UX

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UY

U81

U81

Q7

Q819

16

U65

18 18

2020

K28

K27

led GR2

led GR3 led DS1

DS2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–39


J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOORJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36



J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

K23


J7A or J7B

K24

_INHIBIT–EXP by Collimator see collimatorblock diagram

Sheet 1

9

D0_D15

_PREP_SW

_PREP_SW

K10 K18

or Jumps

CONTROL CONSOLE

7 7

9

K22

PREP INFO

J12

8–9

(see sheet2 page 20)

led PG1

led GR1

1


1

2

MAX485U20

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–40


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

_EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63 SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7A or B

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UX

J10

K25

J12

J5

4–6

1–2

START GRID

START X–RAY

7

91–2

1–2

K17

K25



(TWO TOMO TABLE BUCKY AVAILABLE)

10 10Q36

Q4

U69

U69

K10

K17

_EXP_START_BUCK_UX

BUCKY TABLE 1

K18 K28_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UX

U81

Q716

U65

18 18

K28

K294–6

TOMO STROKESTART

K18

1

2

_EXP_START_TOMO_UX

TOMO1

K29

led GR2

led GR3

3

3

4

5x X–RAY sequence

with TOMOGRAPH

led DS1

DS2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–41


ROOM_IF_CPU

OPTOU97

U93

OPTOU98

OPTOU99

_TOMO_TIME1_A

_TOMO_TIME2_A

_TOMO_TIME3_A

_TOMO_TIME4_A

_TOMO_TIME5_A

_TOMO_SEL

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

2

4

6

8

11

13

J6 J7A or B J14

_TOMO_TIME1

_TOMO_TIME2

_TOMO_TIME3

_TOMO_TIME4

_TOMO_TIME5

_TOMO_SEL

D0_D15


4

5

6

7

8

3

9

1

2TOMO SELECTION

13

15

17

19

21

23

13

15

17

19

21

23

0VRF K18

K28

See sheet 2page 20

See sheet 2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–42


J7 J2 J7 J12 J2

DIST.BD

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOORJ6 J7

_PREP_SW

_EXP_SW0VRF

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

*SW1

K24

K13

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

K23


F6A

F6B

U922

4

17

A2

A1

A4

*CR36



J5

7

41


U92

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

3

4

22

3

22

4

16

20

24

16

20

24

1

2

3

5 5

J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

K23


J7A or J7B

K9

_INHIBIT–EXP by Collimator see colli-mator block diagram

9

D0_D15

_PREP_SW

_PREP_SW

K20 K19

or Jumps

CONTROL CONSOLE

7 7

9

K23

PREP INFO

J13

8–9

(see sheet 2)

led PG1

led GR1

1


1

2

MAX485U20

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–43


ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

U6615

Q16

D0_D15

_START_EXP_A

_EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69U67

5

6A3

Q2

_START_EXP

MAX

485U42

F23A

F23B

J5

29

63 SEL_EXP_CMD1*


EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

J6 J7A or B

22 22

26

11

26

11

K21

_START_EXP_1


_WS_TAB_BUCK_UY

J11

K26

J13

J5

4–6

1–2

START GRID

START X–RAY

7

91–2

1–2

K21

K26



(TWOTOMO TABLE BUCKY AVAILABLE)

Q36

Q4

U69

U69

K20

K21

_EXP_START_BUCK_UX

BUCKY TABLE 2

K19 K27_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UY

U81

Q716

U65

K27

K304–6 TOMO STROKE

START

K19

1

2

_EXP_START_TOMO_UX

TOMO212

20 20

12

K30

led GR2

led GR3

3

3

4

5

x X–RAY Sequencewith TOMOGRAPH

led DS1

DS2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–44


ROOM_IF_CPU

U93

_TOMO_TIME1_A

_TOMO_TIME2_A

_TOMO_TIME3_A

_TOMO_TIME4_A

_TOMO_TIME5_A

_TOMO_SEL

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

2

4

6

8

11

13

J6 J7A or B J15

_TOMO_TIME1

_TOMO_TIME2

_TOMO_TIME3

_TOMO_TIME4

_TOMO_TIME5

_TOMO_SEL

D0_D15


4

5

6

7

8

3

9

1

2 TOMO SELECTION

13

15

17

19

21

23

13

15

17

19

21

23

0VRF K19

K27

See sheet 2

Seesheet 2

OPTOU97

OPTOU99

OPTOU98

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–45

ILLUSTRATION 2–33RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM COLLIMATOR ON FIRST TUBE SHEET 1/3

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

15

J6 J7A or B

22


_WS_DIR_UX

J9

Q1

Q3

U69

U69

K12

Q6

6

D0–D15

U69

10_WS_TAB_BUCK_UX

Q7

Q5

U69

18

14

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UX

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

6

10

18

14

22

2

6

16

12

U66

K14

K15

K4

K2

K11

K12 / K14/K15 ou K4

K16

7 7

K24

K24 K9**K9:See sheet 2 (Inhibition by collimator on second Tube)

SW1

9 9

0VRF

K24

*K9

SW1:Normally set in position 2–3


+15VRF

FREE_ADJUST_C1



PREP_1_E1

TUBE_SELECTION_A1

ENABLE_EXP_J1

2

3

4

1

5

7

15

6 COMMON_H1Common info to collimator

2

13

CONTROLCONSOLE

(see page 22)_PREP_SW

K24 _INHIBIT_EXP

K24

0VRF_EXP_REQUEST

K23

K23

_EXP_SW

(see page 22)

XJ4

To firstCOLLIMATOR

C

D

U

H

E(common H)

A(Common H)

J

Rled DS3

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–46

ILLUSTRATION 2–34RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM COLLIMATOR ON SECOND TUBE SHEET 2/3

ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

K13_WS_RAD

U61

15

J6 J7A or B

22


_WS_DIR_UY

J8

Q2

Q4

U69

U69

Q6

D0–D15

U69

_WS_TAB_BUCK_UY

Q8

Q6

U69

_WS_TOMO_BUCK_UY

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UY

22

5

9

19

15

U66

7 7

0VRF


+15VRF

FREE_ADJUST_C2



PREP_1_E2

TUBE_SELECTION_A2

ENABLE_EXP_J2

2

3

4

1

5

6 COMMON_H2

Common info to collimator

CONTROLCONSOLE

_PREP_SW

K9

See SHEET 1 FORINHIBIT EXPOSURE bysecond COLLIMATOR (K9)

8

12

20

16

8

12

20

16

XJ5

7

15

C

D

U

H

E(Common H)

A(Common H)

J

R

TO second COLLIMATOR

K1

K5

K6

K13

K7

K3

K8

K5/K6/K7/K13

see RAD interfaceblock diagram

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–47

ILLUSTRATION 2–35RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM COLLIMATORS SHEET 3/3

ROOM_IF_CPU

OPTOU100

OPTOU101

OPTOU90

U83 _FIELD_SIZE_A_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B_A

_FIELD_SIZE_C_A

_FIELD_SIZE_D_A

_FIELD_SIZE_e_A

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

2

4

6

8

11

25

27

29

31

33

J6 J7A or B

_FIELD_SIZE_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B

_FIELD_SIZE_C

_FIELD_SIZE_D

_FIELD_SIZE_e

D0_D15

_FIELD_SIZE_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B

_FIELD_SIZE_C

_FIELD_SIZE_D

_FIELD_SIZE_e

25

27

29

31

33

0VRF

0VRF

K16 (See sheet 1)

K8 (See sheet 2 )

J9 XJ4

J8 XJ5

To COLLIMATORSTABLE–TOMOCOLLIMATOR.BD

( Two collimators available )

9

10

11

12

13

14

V

W

X

Y

HH

MM

9

10

11

12

13

14

V

W

X

Y

HH

MM

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–48

ILLUSTRATION 2–36RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATIONS SHEET 1/2 (PREP AND EXPOSURE SWITCHES)

J9 J2ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_PREP_SW_B

_EXP_SW_AA

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

_RAD_PREP_A

_EXP_REQUEST_A

_RAD_PREP

_EXP_REQUEST

K22

K23–K24

OPTOU77

OPTOU77

OPTOU88

0VRF

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92 2

4

17

A2

A1

A4

D0_D15

2

12

Q1

Q5

U92

U66

U65

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

POSITIONNERJ5

K23

K22K13

K23

0VRF

INTERFACE TABLE BD

N

J

B

AA

EE

T

L

3

5

13

3

5

13

1

2

13

5

14

4

15PREP_INFO_L

ENABLE _PREP_N

MAX485U20

K23

_EXP_ENF6A

F6B

J5

7

41

_RF_SEL

U61

4

18 18

4

K14

CR1

CR4

_WS_RF

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

_RF_PREP_REQUEST

_RF_EXP_REQUEST

1

2

3

4

0

K22=RF_prep requestK23=Exposure requestK24=Inhibit by collimator (not used0

x STEPS FOR SEQUENCEIN RAD MODE

K14=Interlock ky room doorK13=Enable prep by positionner

K22 Exposure requestK23=Prep request

5 5J4–1 J4–2 J8 J9

0VRF

SAS PL1

led PG1

led GR1

SW4

SW4=ON if wall bucky

DS1

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–49

ILLUSTRATION 2–37RAD INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATION SHEET 2/2 (EXPOSURE)

J9 J2ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

D0_D15

POSITIONNERJ5

INTERFACE TABLE BD

STEPS FOR SEQUENCEIN RAD MODE

x

_START_EXP_A

EXP_DEMAND_1

EXP_DEMAND

K15

OPTOU78

U69

U67

6A3

_START_EXP_1

MAX485U42

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1

SEL_EXP_CMD0EPLDU30

EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

5Q2

38 38

K27_K14 M520 ENABLE_EXP_INFO_M

6

17_RF_SEL

F

H

6

START_EXP_1

6Q3

BEGIN_END_EXP

K16U67

BEGIN_END_EXP_1 40 40

7 7

19 W7K25_K14BEGIN_END_EXP_INFO_W

U65

(see Sheet 1 )

T4

COMMON_INFO_T

COMMON_INFO_T4T

K14=WORKSTATION RFK25=BEGIN_END_EXPOSUREK27=EXPOSURE DEMAND

K16=BEGIN_END_EXPOSUREK15=EXPOSURE DEMAND

SAS PL1

led GR2

led GR3

led GR4

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–50

ILLUSTRATION 2–38FLUORO INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATIONS SHEET 1/2 (FLUORO SWITCH)

J9 J2ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

WALL BUCKY .BD

INTERLOCK DOOR

JUMP JUMPJ6 J7

_DOOR_INTERLOCK

OPTOU78

OPTOU88

0VRF

To PU_CTRL_CPU

17

A4

D0_D15

2Q1

_DOOR_INTERLOCK_A

J5

K24

INTERFACE TABLE BD

T

13 13 18

4

FLUORO_INFO_R

MAX485U20

K20

_EXP_ENF6A

F6B

J5

7

41

_RF_SEL

4

K14

_WS_RF

1

2

0

x

R

FOOT_SWITCH

FLUORO_SW_MM

19Q8

POSITIONNER


18

4

CR1

K24

K24

K5

16 16_WS_FLUORO

_FLUORO_PREP_A

K20

9

9 9 MM

DD

_FLUORO_REQUEST

U92

U92

U66

U66

A48

U69

U65

_FLUORO_PREP

K14=WORKSTATION RFAND WALKL BUCKYK24=FLUORO SWITCH

K5=FLUORO WORKSTATION

K20=FLUORO REQUEST

5 J4_1 J4–2 J8 J90VRF

5

SAS PL1

led SC1

24

DS1

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–51

ILLUSTRATION 2–39FLUORO INTERFACE DIAGRAM IN RF WORKSTATIONS SHEET 2/2 (FLUORO X–RAY)

J9 J2ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

D0_D15

POSITIONNER

J5INTERFACE TABLE BD


x

_START_FLUORO_A

FLUORO_DEMAND_1

FLUORO_DEMAND

K17

OPTOU87

U65

U67

11A1

_START_FLUORO

MAX485U42

J5

29

63SEL_EXP_CMD1

SEL_EXP_CMD0EPLDU30

EXP_CMD

To PU_CTRL_CPU

U92

9Q4

36 36

K1

3

10

21_RF_SEL

Y

D

4 FLUORO_EXP_Y

12Q5

BEGIN_END_FLUORO

BEGIN_END_FLUORO

11 11

K25(see Sheet 1)

30 30NOT USED

K21

U67

U81

SEL_EXP_CMD1=Selection exposure in rad or fluoroSEL_EXP_CMD0=Selection exposure in rad or fluoro

K17=FLUORO DEMAND

K1=FLUORO_INFOK21=START FLUORO

SAS PL1

led SC2

led SC3

led SC4

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–52

ILLUSTRATION 2–40INTERFACE WITH IMAGE INTENSIFIER

J9 J4ROOM_IF_CPU.BD

D0_D15

J5INTERFACE TABLE BD J3 to IMAGE

INTENSIFIER

U82Q4

9U60

_MAX_REG_FLUORO 28 28

_AUTO_BRIGHT_CTRL 26 26U60U82

Q512

U69_WS_FLUORO

U66

Q8 1916 16

MAX485U70

HV_ONMAX485U53

HV_ON

J534

68

(From PU_CTRL_CPU)32

34

X_RAY_ON_A

X_RAY_ON_B

FLUORO_DEMAND_1

FLUORO_DEMAND

K17U67

9Q436 36

32

34

PREP_SWSee Sheet1(Rad in RF)

OPTO U1

K5K5

K5

K6

K3

ABS_ON_K

SW1

COMMON_F

FLUORO_M

K12

SW3

From POSITIONNER K23

K19 COMMON_C

PREP_DD

MAGNIFIER 1_FF

MAGNIFIER 2_HH

_MAGNIFIER 1

_MAGNIFIER 2

23

25

23

25

OPTOU96

OPTOU96

_MAGNIFIER1_A

_MAGNIFIER2_A

U84

A3

A4

15

17

PREP_HK16

COMMON_F

COMMON_F

7

8

6

5

1

10

3

2

9

_RF_SEL

(See sheet 1 FluoroInterface Diagram)

K

F

H

M

DD

C

FF

HH

JJ

Sw1–3–4:Set at Installation

led SC2

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–53

ILLUSTRATION 2–41SELECTION GENERATOR TO POSITIONNER IN RF MODE

U66Q3

6

U69

U81

Q512

U69U66Q2 5

Q49

U69

U81U61

Q615

U69U66Q7 16

TABLE.BD

_WS_SFD

_WS_TOMO

_WS_SPE

_WS_DIG

_WS_WALL_BUCK_UX

_WS_FILM

K11

K9

K20

K10

K26

POSITIONNER

K2

K15U65U66

Q1 2 _WS_RF

SW5

K14TUBE_INFO_FF

SPECIAL_INFO_V

SPOT_FILM_INFO_C

TOMO_INFO_A

DIGITAL_INFO_K

WALL_BUCKY_INFO_BB

_FIELD_COMMON_INFO_M

SW2

K9 orK10 orK11

TOMO_COMMON_B

_WS_TOMO_WS_DIG or_WS_SFD

D0_D15

J5J9 J2

J3

8

7

3

12

11

3

16

4

C

A

V

K

BB

M

FF

B

U66

U66

8

12

6

10

18

14

4

4 TCOMMON_INFO_T

COMMON K11–9–20–10–26––14

8

12

6

10

18

14

4

ROOM_IF_CPU

SAS PL3

SAS PL1

BLO

CK

S D

IAG

RA

MS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

2–54

ILLUSTRATION 2–42SELECTION FROM POSITIONNER IN RF MODE

ROOM_IF_CPUTABLE.BD POSITIONNER

OPTOU97

U93

OPTOU98

OPTOU99

OPTOU95

OPTOU100

OPTOU101

OPTOU90

OPTOU89

U83

_TOMO_TIME1_A

_TOMO_TIME2_A

_TOMO_TIME3_A

_TOMO_TIME4_A

_TOMO_TIME5_A

_TOMO_SEL

_DSA_MODE_A

_SETUP_DSA_A

_FIELD_SIZE_A_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B_A

_FIELD_SIZE_C_A

_FIELD_SIZE_D_A

_FIELD_SIZE_e_A

_EXP_WITHOUT_GRID_A

_SERIAL_EXP_A

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2

A3

2

4

6

8

6

8

11

13

15

11

13

15

17

27

29

31

33

35

37

21

19

39

41

43

45

47

17

15

27

29

31

33

35

37

21

19

39

41

43

45

47

17

15

J9 J5 J3SAS PL3

1

2

5

6

9

16

15

20

10

13

14

17

18

22

21

11

HH

A

L

R

V

F

X

Y

N

W

S

H

AA

BB

EE

C

_TOMO_TIME1

_TOMO_TIME2

_TOMO_TIME3

_TOMO_TIME4

_TOMO_TIME5

_TOMO_SEL

_DSA_MODE

_SETUP_DSA

_FIELD_SIZE_A

_FIELD_SIZE_B

_FIELD_SIZE_C

_FIELD_SIZE_D

_FIELD_SIZE_e

_EXP_WITHOUT_GRID

_SERIAL_EXP_RF_SEL

MAGNIFIER1_DD

MAGNIFIER2_T

COMMOM_FF

K18

K17

(See Sheet1 FluoroInterface Diagram)

DD

T

FF

J4

To IMAGE INTENSIFIER

MAGNIFIER1_FF

MAGNIFIER2_HH

FF

HH

1

4

7JJ

_REF_SEL

D0_D15

8

7

12

B

M


XJ3


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–1

CHAPTER 3 – DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

��

��

�0$ �#2& �� 3#33'.$-8��'#33'.$-8 7+4*+/ 4*' �� #$+/'4

�0$ �#2& �� $0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� $0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� $0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� +-4'2 �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� #+/ �07'2 �511-8 �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� +-4'2 #33'.$-8 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� /6'24'2 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� 4#/, �!��0402 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� '#4*'2 �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� 0402 �0/420--'2 �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� *+--'2 �/4'2(#%' �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� 07'2 �511-8 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� 00. �� 0#2& 2'1-#%.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� #$-' �/4'2(#%' �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� &+342+$54+0/ $0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� !#-- �5%,8 �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� #$-' �0.0 �0--+.#402 �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� '/302 �0#2& 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� 07'2 �511-+'3 2'1-#%'.'/4

�0$ �#2& �� '1-#%'.'/4 0( �20)2#.9" %0.10/'/43

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LYGE Medical Systems MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2

REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–2

�� ! �� &��% �"�� $�� "�� "�!��

�� ! �� !�� !

�� #�� "��! ��!��

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.:

MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2 Job Card DR 001 1 of 2

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY WITHIN THEMPH CABINE T Date:

Time: Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–3

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.

SECTION 3SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Prior to access components into the cabinet, you must follow the following steps.

� Switch off the system.

� Remove the cabinet front cover panel.

� Switch the MAIN SWITCH to “ 0 ” position.

THERE IS STILL POWER INSIDE THE CABINET !

For any D/R action inside the cabinet you must take the safety precautions as follows:

� SWITCH OFF the main wall Breaker.

� LOCK OUT and TAG OUT (Make sure nobody can power on while you are working into the cabinet).

SECTION 4PREREQUISITES

Turn the Cabinet Door and set it against a wall. Use the Door Diagrams reference designators forcomponent location.

WARNING

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 001 2 of 2DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY WITHIN THE MPHCABINE T


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–4

For some action, you will need to open further doors:

� Open the MPH A4/A5 (electronic panel).

� Open the MPH Extension Rack MPH A6.

4.1 Opening the MPH Rack Extension MPH A6 (see Illustration 1)

4.1.1 90° position

1. Loosen the two screws (Item 1) located on the Extension Rack door.

2. Pull the two sliders (Item 2) toward you.

3. Rest the door on the sliders.

4.1.2 Position 170°

1. Loosen the two screws (Item 1) located on the Extension Rack door.

2. Tilt the door to the mechanical stop of the Rack.

ILLUSTRATION 1OPENING THE MPH RACK EXTENSION MPH A6

1

2

90° position 170° position

� Open the MPH1 A1 A1Room Distribution panel.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A4 A1 CMD1 BOARD REPLACEMENTDate:

Time: 0h30 + calibration Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–5

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

TBD.


Perform Job Card DR 001.


None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Remove MPH A4 front cover.

� Disconnect all connectors from the board XJ 1 to XJ10, XJ23, and the 4 optical fibers.

� Remove screws retaining the board.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 002 2 of 2MPH A4 A1 CMD1 BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–6

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A4

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

F1F2F3F4F5

2 A2 A1 A5 A5 AXJ XJ XJ

5.2 Reassembly

� Refer to central listing in the service manual:

– Check presence of ST1 shunt.

– Check IN1 position is ON (Down).

� Proceed in the reverse order.

5.3 Calibration

Power ON and perform:

� HV calibration, Job Card DR 025.

� KV + and Minus calibration, Job Card DR 025.

� Perform functional checks (VF 001) in Chapter 4.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.:


Purpose: MPH A4 A2 CMD2 BOARD REPLACEMENTDate:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–7

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

TBD.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly


� Disconnect all connectors from the board XJ 1 to XJ5.


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 003 2 of 2MPH A4 A2 CMD2 BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–8

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A4

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

F1F2F3F4F5


5.2 Reassembly

� Refer to central listing in the service manual:

– R253 and R 225 are factory adjusted.

– Jumper CC1 must be connected between points 1 and 2.


5.3 Calibration

Power on and perform:

� KV + and Minus calibration, Job card DR 025.

� Run diagnostics MENU 1, HEAT, ANOD, Job card VF 004 in Chapter 4.

� Heating current calibration, Job card RG 006 in SM.

� Perform functional checks (Job card VF 001) in Chapter 4.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A4 A3 CPU BOARD REPLACEMENTDate:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–9

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

TBD.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

If there is no data base backup on site, save parameters (IST 013). If this is not possible, proceed.


� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board .


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 004 2 of 4MPH A4 A3 CPU BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–10

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A4

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

F1F2F3F4F5


5.2 Reassembly

� If it has not been possible to save parameters, it might be possible to get them back using the new board:swap the R20 PROM. (! Do not make any short circuit on pins. – Observe antistaticrecommendations).


� Save the parameters.

� Switch off and swap the U20 PROM.

� Restore the parameters onto the new PROM.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–11

5.3 Calibration

Power on and perform/check:

� If you are unable to restore parameter (No back up and no save possible), run a complete calibrationas per Service Manual.

� Otherwise, perform:

– HV calibration (Job Card DR 025).

– Heating current calibration, Job Card RG 003 in SM.

– Set Date and time (Diag, menue MODA) See SM Job Card RG 001, § 5.7.

– Perform CPU memory backup, see SM Job Card IST 013, § 5.7.

� Perform functional test (Job card VF 001) in Chapter 4.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–12

Blank page

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A3 A1 DC FILTER BOARD REPLACEMENT Date:

Time: 1 h Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–13

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

EXTREME CAUTION!

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Remove the plexiglas cover.

� Dismount the cable between the DC Filter board and the Inverter (1).

� Dismount the orange cables (2) on the DC Filter board.

� Remove the 4 connectors (XJ2 to XJ5).

� Dismount the 3 MAINS bars on the fuse (3).

� Dismount the screws (4).

� Remove the 8 screws (5) and take the part out.

WARNING

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 005 2 of 4MPH A3 A1 DC FILTER BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–14

ILLUSTRATION 1

35XF2

MPH A3 T1

4 2MPH A3 A2

1MPH A3 A3

6

2

1

3

5XF2

MPH A3 T1

5XF2

MPH A3 T1

3MPH A3 A2

4CT2

MPH A3 K1

7

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–15

5.2 Reassembly


� Ensure bars are well tightened; connectors well seated, orange cables well tightened.

5.3 Calibration


� Perform functional checks (Job Card VF 001 in Chapter 4).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–16

Blank page

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A3 A2 MAIN POWER SUPPLY BOARDREPLACEMENT Date:

Time: 0h30 Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–17

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Open the electronic panel, MPH A4/A5.


� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board (6 connectors and a flat cable).

� Remove the mounting 6 screws.

� Remove the board.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 006 2 of 4MPH A3 A2 MAIN POWER SUPPLY BOARDREPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–18

ILLUSTRATION 1

2MPH A3 A2

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–19

5.2 Reassembly

� Check fuses rating. as per Central listing in SM. section 3


� Make sure connections are well sit or tightened.

5.3 Calibration


� Check that the LED’s are on , as per central listing in SM. section 3

� Perform functional checks.

Take electrical safety precautions when measuring the voltages.CAUTION

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–20

Blank page

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A3 FL1 EMC FILTER ASSEMBLYREPLACEMENT Date:

Time: 1h Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–21

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

EXTREME CAUTION!

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

1. Remove the EMC covers.

2. Remove the plexiglas cover.

3. Dismount the metallic cover of Room Distribution

4. Dismount the fuses rail fixed on the EMC Filter cover.

5. Remove the 3 links on contactors A3 K1 (2).

6. Disconnect the 3 mains cables on the main switch MPH A1 SW1 (3).

7. Loosen the 2 screws olsdin the EMC filter in the lower part.

8. Remove the 2 screw on the top and remove the assembly.

WARNING

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 007 2 of 2MPH A3 FL1 EMC FILTER ASSEMBLY REPLACE-MENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–22

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A3 FL1EMC FILTER

2

5.2 Reassembly


� Ensure bars are well tightened; connectors well seated, orange cables well tightened.

5.3 Calibration


� Perform functional checks (Job Card VF 001 in Chapter 4).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A3 A3 INVERTER REPLACEMENTDate:

Time: 1h Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–23

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

EXTREME CAUTION!

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly


� If needed, remove the EMC covers on the hv tank, to improve access.


� Disconnect the 4 optical fiber plugs.

� Remove connectors J1, J2, J3.

� Disassemble the 2 wires on the HV tank primary winding wires (1).

� Dismount the 2 X 2 orange cables (2) on the DC Filter board (MPH A3 A1).

WARNING

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 008 2 of 4MPH A3 A3 INVERTER REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–24

� Dismount the cable between Inverter and DC Filter board.

� Remove XJ 7 connector on Main power supply board (MPH A3 A2).

� Loosen the 2 lower retaining screws and unscrew the 4 others (4).

� Remove the inverter by sliding it upwards and front.

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A3 A3

4

4

1

2 3

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–25

5.2 Reassembly



5.3 Calibration

Power on and perform/check: (on both tubes)

� KV + and – calibration, Job card DR 025.

� mA calibration, Job Card DR 025.

� Perform functional checks.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–26

Blank page

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A2 HV TANK REPLACEMENTDate:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–27

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly


� Remove the EMC covers on the HV tank.

� Disconnect all cable connectors from the HV tank:

– HV cables,

– Motor cable,

– Ground cables,

– HV primary cables,

– KV feedback,

– other plugs.

� Remove screws holding the HV tank on the front (1).

� Slide out the HV tank.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 009 2 of 2MPH A2 HV TANK REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–28

ILLUSTRATION 1

1

5.2 Reassembly



5.3 Calibration

Power on and perform/check: (on both tubes)

� HV calibration, Job Card DR 025.

� KV + and – calibration, Job card DR 025.

� mA calibration, Job Card DR 025.

� Heating current calibration, Job Card RG 003 in SM.

� Perform functional checks (VF 001 in Chapter 4).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A2 A2 HV TANK SWITCH MOTORREPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–29

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly


� Remove the EMC covers on the hv tank.

� Disconnect the motor power cable at the back of the motor (1).

� Remove the 3 screws holding the motor cover (2).

� Remove the setscrew with cone point from the motor shaft (Illustration 2) and remove the motor (4 screws).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 010 2 of 2MPH A2 A2 HV TANK SWITCH MOTOR REPLACE-MENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–30

ILLUSTRATION 1

1 2

ILLUSTRATION 2

5.2 Reassembly


5.3 Calibration


� Run application and perform tube switch.

� Perform functional check on both tube.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A5 A1 HEATHER BOARDREPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–31

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Open the Electronic Panel MPH A4/A5.

� Remove MPH A5 rear cover.

� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board (XJ1 to XJ4).

� Loosen the screws retaining and remove the board.

� Shift upwards and remove.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 011 2 of 2MPH A5 A1 HEATHER BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–32

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A5(REAR VIEW)

1

MPH A5 A1

5.2 Reassembly


� Ensure connectors are well seated.

5.3 Calibration


� Run DIAG, Menue 1, Heat.

� Perform functional checks (VF 001).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A5 A2 ROTOR CONTROLLER BOARDREPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–33

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly



� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board (XJ1 to XJ5).

� Loosen the screws and remove the board.


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 012 2 of 4MPH A5 A2 ROTOR CONTROLLER BOARDREPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–34

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A5(REAR VIEW)

1

MPH A5 A2

COUPLING JUMPER CC1

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–35

5.2 Reassembly

The new spare part is rotor controller board design for drive mixed stator types (Stator 50/110 and 23:23).

This board is compatible with all MPH/SCPU generator versions

5.2.1 Pre–requisite: Position of CC1 jumper

a. Generator MPH V3 with PU–CPU SW ≥ V2.3

Only this configuration can drive mixed stator types

CC1 Jumper must be placed in V2 position.

b. Generator MPH with PU–CPU between SW V1.xx to V2.2

CC1 Jumper must be placed in V1 50/110 position for 50/110 stator

CC1 Jumper must be placed in V1 23/23 position for 23/23 stator

c. Generator SCPU all SW

CC1 Jumper must be placed in V1 23/23

5.2.2 Reassembly

Proceed in the reverse order

Ensure connectors are well seated

5.3 Calibration


� Run DIAG, Menu 1, ANOD, see VF 004 in Chapter 4.


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–36

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A5 A3 CHILLER INTERFACE BOARDREPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–37

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly



� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board.

� Loosen the screws retaining the metal frame holding the board (1).

� Remove the board.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 013 2 of 2MPH A5 A3 CHILLER INTERFACE BOARDREPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–38

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A5(REAR VIEW)

MPH A5 PS1

1

MPH A5 PS2

CHIILERINTERFACEBOARD

MPH A5 A3

5.2 Reassembly



5.3 Calibration


� Check chiller control operation.

� To be completed later.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A5 PS 1, PS 2 POWER SUPPLY REPLACE-MENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–39

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly



� Disconnect all cable connectors from the PS.

� Remove the screws retaining the PS and remove.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 014 2 of 2MPH A5 PS 1, PS 2 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–40

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH A5(REAR VIEW)

MPH A5 PS1

MPH A5 PS2

5.2 Reassembly



5.3 Calibration


� Power on and check output voltages with a DVM (+ 24 V or + 15 V).

� On PS 1, Adjust +5 volts (–0, + 0.1 v) measured onthe CPU board, MPH A4 A3 (Test point P 5 V).


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A6 A1 ROOM I/F CPU BOARD REPLACE-MENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–41

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board (J1, J2, J5, J6, J9, J10).



� Remove the PROM U 57 if not ordered along with the replacement board.

Take EMC precautions for this action.CAUTION

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 015 2 of 4MPH A6 A1 ROOM I/F CPU BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–42

ILLUSTRATION 1

VIEW WITHPANEL CLOSED

MPH A6 A1

5.2 Reassembly

� Fit the PROM U 57.

� Set U 62 and SW 1 as per Central listing in the Service Manual.



5.3 Calibration


� Power on and perform functional checks (VF001).

5.4 MPH A6 A1 Room I/F Board PROM U U 57 replacement

5.4.1 Disassembly

� Perform Job Card DR 015.

� Remove the prom U57. (Warning: Take electromagnetic precautions).

Take EMC precautions for this action.CAUTION

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–43

ILLUSTRATION 2

U 57

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–44

5.4.2 Reassembly



5.4.3 Calibration


� Power on and perform functional checks (VF 001).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A6 A2 TABLE INTERFACE BOARDREPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–45

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board (XJ2, XJ3, XJ4, XJ5).

� Loosen the screws retaining the metal frame holding the board.


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 016 2 of 2MPH A6 A2 TABLE INTERFACE BOARD REPLACE-MENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–46

ILLUSTRATION 1

VIEW WITHPANEL CLOSED

MPH EXTENSION RACKFRONT PANEL

MPH A6 A2

5.2 Reassembly


� Set SW 1, 2, 3, 4, as per Central listing in the Service Manual.


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A6 A3 DISTRIBUTION BOARDREPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–47

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Open down the front panel door.

� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board (XJ 2 to 16).

� Remove the II sensor board MPH A6 A6 if present.

� Cut the tieraps if necessary.



DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 017 2 of 2MPH A6 A3 DISTRIBUTION BOARD REPLACE-MENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–48

ILLUSTRATION 1

MPH EXTENSION RACKREAR PANEL

VIEW WITHPANEL OPEN

MPH A6 A3DISTRIBUTION

BOARD

MPH A6 A5TABLETOMO

COLLIMATORBOARD

1

MPH A6 A6

MPH A6 A3

1

5.2 Reassembly


� Check fuse rating as per Central listing in the Service Manual.


5.3 Calibration


� Power on and perform functional checks.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A6 A4 WALL BUCKY BOARDREPLACEMENT Date: 07/96



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–49

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly


� Loosen the 8 screws retaining the metal frame holding the board (1).


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 018 2 of 2MPH A6 A4 WALL BUCKY BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–50

ILLUSTRATION 1


VIEW WITHPANEL OPEN

1

MPH A6 A4

5.2 Reassembly


� Check presence of J8 – J9 Jumper as per Central listing in the Service Manual.

� Reconnect cable On J8, J9 if your system is PRESTIGE SI.


5.3 Calibration



DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A6 A5 TABLE TOMO COLLIMATORBOARD REPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–51

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Disconnect all cable connectors from the board (XJ).



DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 019 2 of 2MPH A6 A5 TABLE TOMO COLLIMATOR BOARDREPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–52

ILLUSTRATION 1


VIEW WITHPANEL OPEN

1

MPH A6 A5

5.2 Reassembly


� Set SW 1 and jumper TP1 and TP2 as the replaced board, or refer to IST 009 in the SM.


5.3 Calibration



DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A6 A6 II SENSOR BOARDREPLACEMENT Date:



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–53

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly:


� Remove the screws holding the board (1) and remove.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 020 2 of 2MPH A6 A6 II SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–54

ILLUSTRATION 1


VIEW WITHPANEL OPEN

1MPH A6 A6

5.2 Reassembly

� Set SW 1 as per Central listing in the Service Manual.



5.3 Calibration


� Power on.

� Perform calibration RG 004:

– §5.3 (Adjust R6),

– §5.5 (HVPM, SCOP) (NOT NEEDED if your system is fitted with IMAGEUR image Chain).

� Perform calibration RG 006 : HVPM . DIG.. (IF Digital is present on your system).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 1


Purpose: MPH A6 PS1/ PS2 POWER SUPPLIESREPLACEMENT Date:

Time: 1h + calibration Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–55

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

None.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

� Remove the protective cover:

– Loosen the 4 screws (1).

– Slide left and remove.

� Disconnect all cable connectors from the power supply you need to replace.

� Remove the screws holding the power supply.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 021 2 of 2MPH A6 PS1/ PS2 POWER SUPPLIESREPLACEMENT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–56

ILLUSTRATION 1

1

VIEW WITHPANEL OPEN

MPH A6 PS2POWER SUPPLY + 15 V

MPH A6 PS1POWER SUPPLY +/– 15 V, + 5 V

MPH A6 A5TABLETOMO

COLLIMATORBOARD


5.2 Reassembly



5.3 Calibration


� Power on and verify the voltage ( PS1: +/–15, +5v , PS2: +15v ) with a DVM.

� Adjust voltage if necessary as per Central listing in the Service Manual.

� For the PS 2, adjust voltage +5V (60, + 0.1v) on the Room I/F cpu Board MPH A6 A1, Test point VCC(+5V).


DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.: 3


Purpose: REPLACEMENT OF PROGRAM–XCOMPONENTS Date:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–57

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� PROGRAM–X front panel MPH A8–A2.

� PROGRAM–X control board MPH A8–A1.

� New back–up battery.

� PROGRAM–X display unit MPH A8–A3.

SECTION 2TOOLS

� Screwdrivers: 5,8 mm.

� Flat wrenches: 8,10 mm.


� Check that installation is switched OFF.


� None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Replacement of PROGRAM–X Front Panel MPH A8–A2 (see Illustration 1)

1. Lift up Control Panel (6).

2. Loosen screws (5) to release PROGRAM–X Front Panel MPH A8–A2 (4) from two U–channels (3).

3. Remove connector (PROGRAM–X Front Panel to PROGRAM–X Control board).

4. Remove ground connection from PROGRAM–X Control board.

5. Remove PROGRAM–X Front Panel (4).

6. Install new PROGRAM–X Front Panel.

7. Carry out the removal operations, in the reverse sequence (4 thru 1).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 022 2 of 8REPLACEMENT OF PROGRAM–XCOMPONENTS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–58

5.2 Replacement of PROGRAM–X Control Board MPH A8–A1 (see Illustration 1)

1. Remove protection cover (8).

2. Remove connectors connecting Control board to:

– PROGRAM–X Front Panel MPH A8–A2, XP5 (W17).

– PROGRAM–X Display Unit MPH A8 A3, XP6 (W16).

– A/N keyboard MPH A8–A4, XP4 (W15).

3. Disconnect cable W14 (ground), cable W18 (service terminal) and cable W32 (connection toMPH A1).

4. Remove four Phillips screws securing PROGRAM–X Control Board (9) to plate (11).

5. Remove PROGRAM–X Control Board (9).

6. Check that the straps, on the new board, are in the same positions as those on the old board.

7. Install new PROGRAM–X Control Board.

8. Carry out the removal operations, in the reverse sequence (1 thru 4).

9. Check that the back–up battery is correctly connected, and check the position of the jumper (see Illustration 4).

5.3 Replacement of PROGRAM–X Display Unit MPH A8–A3 (see Illustration 1)

1. Remove cover (12).

2. On the PROGRAM–X Control board (9), disconnect connector XP6.

3. Remove three screws (14) securing Display Unit (1) to stand (13).

4. Remove Display Unit (1) with connecting cable, W16.

5. To install a new screen in the Display Unit, see 5–4, below.

6. To reassemble, carry out the disassembly operations, in the reverse sequence (4 thru 1).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–59

ILLUSTRATION 1PROGRAM–X CONSOLE WITH COMPONENTS

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–60

5.4 Replacement of PROGRAM–X Screen (see Illustration 1)

1. Remove cover (12).

2. On the PROGRAM–X Control board (9), disconnect connector XP6.

3. Remove three screws (14) securing Display Unit (1) to stand (13).

4. Remove Display Unit (1) with connecting cable W16.

– See Illustration 2.

5. Remove four screws (1) to separate front panel (3) from rear cover (2).

6. Remove cable W16 (connecting screen to PROGRAM–X Control board).

– See Illustration 3.

7. Remove four screws (1).

8. Remove screen (2) from housing.

9. Install new screen.

10. To reassemble, carry out the disassembly operations, in the reverse sequence (7 thru 1).

5.5 Replacement of A/N Keyboard (see Illustration 1)

1. Slide out keyboard (7) and lift off slides.

2. Disconnect cable W15 (connecting keyboard to PROGRAM–X Control board).

3. Remove keyboard from slides.

4. Install new A/N keyboard on slides.

5. To reassemble, carry out the disassembly operations, in the reverse sequence (2 followed by 1).

5.6 Replacement of back–up battery

� To replace the back–up battery, see sm.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–61

ILLUSTRATION 2DISPLAY UNIT MPH A8 A3 (CROSS–SECTION)

�

�

�

��

ILLUSTRATION 3PROGRAM–X SCREEN

�

�

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–62

SECTION 6PROGRAM–X CONTROL BOARD

6.1 LED Functions

��

��

�&%�&%�2&&.!&,,/7�2&&.!&,,/7�2&&.!&,,/7

��/.3/,& 2&$&04*/.�/.3/,& 42".3-*33*/.�&26*$& �&2-*.", 2&$&04*/.�&26*$& �&2-*.", 42".3-*33*/.�&.&2"4/2 2&$&04*/.�&.&2"4/2 42".3-*33*/.

6.2 Switch Positions (see Illustration 4)

��

��

�� 4)25 ��

�� 4)25 ��

�."4/-*$ �� #"$+50�� "."4/-*8 � /2 ��90& /' "."4/-*$ �� ."4/-*$ �� #"$+50�� 02/(2"- "%%2&33*.( ,*-*4�"$+50 #"44&29 ��"$+50 #"44&29 � *%&/ 0/,"2*49�5::&2 �*8&% '2&15&.$9 �� /2 6"2*"#,& ��'2&15&.$9�5::&2 0/7&2 3500,9�/4 53&%

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–63

ILLUSTRATION 4PROGRAM–X CONTROL BOARD MPH A8–A1

��

��

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–64

Blank page

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.:


Purpose: REPLACEMENT OF X–RAY TUBE ANDEXPOSURE COUNTER RECORDING Date:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–65

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� New X–ray tube.

SECTION 2TOOLS

� Service Terminal and calibration and service diskettes.

� 9–wire cable from Emergency Kit.

� Dosimeter.

� Digital voltmeter.

� 2-mm-thick copper plates.


� Check that installation is switched OFF.


� None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

To replace the X–ray tube (usually following arcing, or faults in heater or anode rotation), record counterreadings as follows:

1. Connect the Service Terminal and start up.

2. Select MENU 2 and enter <F5> (NEXP).

3. Enter <F1> to select X–ray tube.

4. Enter <F5> once to display each counter, and enter values on form (see page 3).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 023 2 of 4REPLACEMENT OF X–RAY TUBE ANDEXPOSURE COUNTER RECORDING


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–66

5. Reset counters by entering <CONTR>–<H> twice on Service Terminal (Time ON and NEXPGcounters cannot be reset).

6. Replace X–ray tube (see sm Job Card RG002 and RG003).

7. Run Job Card RG 004.

8. Run Job Card RG 010 if Print-X is installed (Calibration, Dose in Rad Mode).

9. Run Job Card RG 011: Magnifier Ratio and Calibration of Ion Chamber.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–67

�� !�� "�!�� !��"�!��

�%8) 3*6)%(-2+�

�%8) 3* 4988-2+-283 7)6:-')�

�%8) 3* 4988-2+-283 7)6:-')�

�((6)77 3* -278%00%8-32� �)2)6%836 �()28-*-'%8-32 �)2)6%836 �()28-*-'%8-32

)6-%0 �3� !=4) ��!� �!� � �>�

�48-32 �*09363� �� )8'��

3*8;%6) :)67-32� 3*8;%6) :)67-32�

�278%00%8-32'32*-+96%8-32

$�6%= 7=78)1� !9&) ��!9&) ��

�3928)6 2%1) �)7'6-48-32 !9&) � !9&) �

�� #��"� �91&)6 3* 8-1)7 ?23 ;%61 94� 73*8/)=46)77)( ��$�

�$ � � 1%00 �3'%0� !38%0 �%( <�6%= 32�8-1)�,3967�

�$ �� %6+) �3'%0� !38%0 �%( <�6%= 32�8-1)�,3967�

�$ �� 09363� 838%0 �%( <�6%= 32�8-1) �,3967�

��!�� !38%0 78%836 32�8-1) �,3967�

��$� � �91&)6 �%( �<43796)7 1%00 �3'%0

��$�� 91&)6 �%( �<43796)7 �%6+) �3'%0

� � � � � �91&)6 3* �� 8)',2-59) 6%( )<43796)7 1%00 �3'%0

� � � � �� 91&)6 3* �� 8)',2-59) 6%( )<43796)7�%6+) �3'%0

�� !9&) 74-8 '3928)6

�� !38%0 �-03.390)7 1%00 �3'%0

�� !38%0 �-03.390)7 �%6+) �3'%0

!�� !38%0 8-1) �� -7 8962)( 32 �-2 ,3967�'%2238 &) 6)7)8�

��$�� !38%0 0-*)8-1) 291&)6 3* �%( )<43796)7�'%2238 &) 6)7)8�

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–68

Blank page

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.:


Purpose: REPLACEMENT OF PRINT–X COMPONENTSDate:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–69

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� Printer, MPH A9 A1.

� Power supply, MPH A9 A2.

SECTION 2TOOLS

� Standard screwdrivers.

� Tube wrenches: 7 and 8 mm.


� Check that the installation is switched OFF.


� None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Printer MPG6 A1

See Illustration 1.

1. Disconnect 12 V cable from rear of printer.

2. Disconnect RS232 cable from rear of printer.

3. Remove the four screws from printer support (Item 3).

4. Replace printer (1), and secure with four screws to the support.

5. Connect 12-V cable to rear of printer.

6. Connect RS232 cable to rear of printer.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 024 2 of 4REPLACEMENT OF PRINT–X COMPONENTS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–70

5.2 Power Supply MPH A9 A2

See Illustration 1.

1. Remove the rear cover (Item 2) from the stand (8 screws).

2. Disconnect the cables as follows:

– cable MPH A9–A2 XJ1 to printer MPH A9–A1 (Item 7).

– cable MPH A9–A1 to Control Console MPH A7–A2 XJ4 (Item 5).

3. Disconnect cable W34 (Item 4) as follows:

– cable MPG 6 A2 to terminal AC (L) and AC (N) and FG (green/yellow cable).

MPH A9–A2 MPH A6–A3

AC (L) –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– XJ1A

AC (N) –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– XJ1B

FG ––––––––––––––––green/yellow–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

4. Remove the two screws behind the power supply support (Item 6).

5. Replace power supply and carry out Steps 1 thru 4 in reverse order (4 thru 1).

6. Tiewrap the cables to the power supply mount using the tiewraps.

7. Reinstall the rear cover (Item 2) on the printer stand (8 screws).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–71

ILLUSTRATION 1Print-X assembly

2

3

7

6

45

1

MPH A9 A1 MPH A9 A1

MPH

XJ1

A9 A2

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–72

Blank page

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Version No.:


Purpose: kV/mA MEASUREMENT CALIBRATIONDate:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–73

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� None.

SECTION 2TOOLS

� 1 Service Terminal.

� 1 MPH Service diskette.

� 1 ammeter (5mA – 100mA) – (Flucke 8060A).

� 1 oscilloscope, double trace with memory.

� 1 HV probe (Macklett with or without display),or 1 Keithley probe (type 35080 with measurement pack 32867C and 32869C).

� 2 coaxial cables, 50�, L = 5m.

� 2 oscilloscope probes (X1 or X10).


� Take all precautions necessary for work in an ionization environment.


1. Competence in using the Service Terminal and the ”MPH Installation” software (LG001).

2. Programming the techniques performed (RG001).

3. X–ray tube parameters entered in memory (RG002).

4. X–ray tube filament heater calibration (RG003).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 025 2 o f8kV/mA MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–74

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Menu structure

��

� �

� ��

��

��

� �

��

�

��

Menu 6 is used to adjust or check the kV+/kV– voltage divider, and to calibrate the kV and mA setpoints asfollows:

1. Connect the HV probe in series with the X–ray tube or position the Keithley probe in the X–ray beam.

2. Switch on the generator. Connect the Service Terminal and call Menu 6.

MENU 6 KMADJ HVADJ DOSE

F1 F3 F7

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY

Job Card DR 025 3 of 8kV/mA MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–75

5.2 kV Voltage Divider Calibration Menu

1. Enter <F3> (HVADJ)

kV T1 L 80kV HV+ 50mA

F1/F2 F3/F4 F5/F6 F9/F10

Note: This voltage is independent of the X–ray tube and focal spot. Therefore, use the function keys to selectthe X–ray tube (using direct technique) and focal spot (F1/F2, F3/F4) to be adjusted.

2. Connect one channel of the oscilloscope to the external voltage divider (Macklett model: anodepolarity, 1V = 10kV) (Keithley model: 0.1V = 10kV).

3. Connect the other channel to TP2 MEAS_KV COMMAND 1 BOARD (MPH A4–A1) (0.5V = 8 kV).– ’Scope scanning time = 10ms/square. – ’Scope used in memory function with triggering on the rising front of the external kV voltage divider.

4. On the Service Terminal, check the HV+ selection. If necessary, correct using F6 or F5.

5. Check that the X–ray current = 50mA, and correct, if necessary, using F9/F10.

6. Execute an exposure (Rad Prep and Exposure).

7. Check that the ’scope is correctly synchronized.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–76

5.2.1 kV+ Form Adjustment on COMMAND 1 Board (MPH A4–A1)

��

��

��

��

��

��

� Using P1, adjust the form of the internal voltage divider kV+ rising edge.

Note: If the adjustment cannot be made, use keys F9/F10 to change the X–ray current and repeat theadjustment procedure.

��

��

�

��

��

5.2.2 kV– Waveform Adjustment

� Macklett probe: apply the kV– return signal, from the external voltage divider, to the ’scope, in placeof the kV+ return signal.

� Keithley probe: do not modify the connections made above. Adjust using P2 (as in Para 5.2.1).

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–77

5.2.3 Calibration & Measurement Chains

1. Call Menu 6 (Enter <F1>)

KMADJ kV mA

F1 F3

2. Enter <F1>

kV T1 L 40kV N=0? 50 mA

F1/F2 F3/F4 F5/F6 F9/F10

Note: This adjustment is used to calibrate the kV measurement sent by the microprocessor and is independentof the X–ray tube and focal spot. Therefore, the function keys should be used to select the X–ray tube(with direct technique) and focal spot to be adjusted.

3. Measure the kV value, using the Macklett or Keithley probe. In the case of a Keithley probe with pack32867C, use F5 to select 60kV for the first step.

4. Check that the X–ray tube output display = 50mA. If necessary, correct using keys F9/F10.

5. Execute an X–ray exposure.

6. On the oscilloscope (or using the Macklett probe if available) note the kV value to one decimal place.

7. Enter the kV reading, completing to three integer digits plus the one decimal place, i.e. complete with aleading zero if the value is less than 100.

Example:for 40.2Enter <0> <4> <0> <2>

8. Enter <W> to validate. If the value is incorrect, enter <BK SP> to erase, and repeat the procedure.

9. Repeat the procedure for 80kV and 120kV. In the case of a Keithley probe, change the pack for 120kV(32869C in place of 32867C).

10. On the Service Terminal, enter <Q> and check the kV values on Application for 40kV, 120kV and100kV, over 50ms.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–78

5.2.4 mA Measurement Calibration

MENU 6 KMADJ HVADJ

F1 F3

1. Enter <F1>

KMADJ kV mA

F1 F3

This menu is used to calibrate the microprocessor mA measurement.

2. Connect an ammeter (20mA rating) to the shunt (ST1A–ST1B) of the COMMAND 1 Board(MPH A4–A1).

3. Enter <F3>.

MA 10 mAS XX.XX? X.XX

read value corrected value

4. Enter the value corresponding to the ammeter reading.

Example:for 10.01 mAEnter <1> <0> <0> <1>

and validate with <W>.

5. Enter <F3>.

MA 10 mAM XX.XX? XX.XX

6. Enter the read value, validate <W>.

7. Set the ammeter to > 200 mA.

8. Enter <F3>.

MA 100 mAM XXX.X? XXX.X

9. Enter value, validate <W>.

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–79

10. Enter <F3>.

MA 100 mAL XXX.X? XXX.X

11. Enter value, validate <W>.

Note: Press <F3> to leave the calibration unchanged.

Q:Exit

R:Return

KMADJ : Calibration of kV and mA measurementsHVADJ : Calibration of kV voltage dividers

MENU6 ��

��

��

��

DIS

AS

SE

MB

LY/

RE

AS

SE

MB

LY



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

3–80

Blank page

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–1

CHAPTER 4 – DIAGNOSTICS


1–1 Overview

The MPH is included in a SAS architecture. The diagnostics are divided in two modes.

These modes are as follows:

� MPH Power on/Reset Diagnostics (PRD): this set of diagnostics runs at each start ofthe MPH firmware independently of the mode of work (application, service ordiagnostic).

There is two CPU boards, one for the Power Unit control and one for the Room Interfacewith communicate thru a HDLC link.

For each PRD, the CPUs send a tracking code to the resident leds.

A set of eight switches is present on the two MPH cpus and allows the operator to selectthe PRD to loop on one specific test or on all the tests. In case of error, the Power UnitControl cpu sends an error message to a serial link dedicated to the TAV display and halts.The Room Interface cpu (slave cpu board) reports an error message to thePU_CTRL_CPU (master cpu board) via a HDLC link. The tracking code of is stilldisplayed on the resident leds and is then an error code.

The goal is to ensure that the cpu is working.

� MPH Diagnostics (SLD):

The goal is to determine which FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) is faulty in case of a MPHapplication error.

The purpose of the MPH diagnostics is to provide an as automatic as possible way todetermine the faulty FRU’s with a confidence level which is 95%.

The MPH has been split into several major functions , each function being present onseveral boards.

So, one MPH diagnostic checks a part of a function situated on one board.

Some tests could require by agreement manual operations on the TAV or inside the MPH.

The TAV will prompt the user when external stimulus is required. All operator inputs areentered via the TAV or insite.

The SLD are selected by the operator who can choose a functional test, which includes all thetests on each board for a defined function, or a single test, which represents the test of a part ofa function on one board.

The operator can also select a loop on test(s) mode.

The diagnostics inside the MPH include the following functions:

� the set of test procedures, each one driving a specific diagnostic and so hardware lines.

� some hardware functions dedicated to diagnostic purpose on each board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

SGE Medical Systems MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2

REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–2

DIAGNOSTICS BLOCK DIAGRAM

DiagnosticProtocol

Testsprocs

Hardwarefunctions

Display

Appli.

HDLC link

ROOM INTERFACE

POWERUNIT CONTROLTAV

TAV

ROOM INTERFACE

POWER UNIT CONTROL

1–2 Block convention

The blocks that are not completely grey are not completely tested.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–3

SECTION 2PRD DESCRIPTION

2–1 Functional Overview

2–1–1 Functional requirements for PRD

Input Data

The high frequency generator Power On/Reset sequence MPH PRD, is initiated by one of thefollowing conditions:

� Power applied to MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU boards.

� Reset signal generated by board resident manual reset switch.

The occurrence of any of these signals will reset the CPU boards.

PU_CTRL_CPU board

The reset will force the CPU32+ core of the 68360 processor to read the two first addresses ofthe Flash–EEPROM which are the initial system stack pointer (SSP) and the initial programcounter (PC). The PC is the start of PRD.

If the code read from the switches is normal mode, PRD are executed.

If the code is equal to debug or monitor mode, PRD are bypassed.

Upon completion of each respective test, the PU_CTRL_CPU board resident switches areread.

If the code read from the switches is equal to the loop on code, the test will be executed again.

A loop on all tests mode is also used.

This sequence continues until the switch code is changed or power removed from thePU_CTRL_CPU board.

All PRD tests are Flash–EEPROM resident and during the normal execution sequence, nomanual interaction is required. All switches are normally set OFF.

ROOM_IF_CPU board

The reset will force the 68000 core of the 68302 processor to read the two first addresses of theEPROM which are the initial system stack pointer (SSP) and the initial program counter (PC).The PC is the start of PRD.

If the code read from the switches is normal mode, PRD are executed.

If the code is equal to debug or monitor mode, PRD are bypassed.

Upon completion of each respective test, the PU_CTRL_CPU board resident switches areread.

If the code read from the switches is equal to the loop on code, the test will be executed again.

A loop on all tests mode is also used.

This sequence continues until the switch code is changed or power removed from thePU_CTRL_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–4

All PRD tests are EPROM resident and during the normal execution sequence, no manualinteraction is required. All switches are normally set ON.

Output Data

Prior to the execution of each respective test, a tracking code is output to the resident on boardLED display. In the event of a test failure in a non–loop mode, the PU_CTRL_CPU sends anerror code to the TAV via the RS232 channel, and then is forced to the halt state and thetracking code becomes an error code.

Functional Processing And Performance

The purpose of this group of tests is to verify operation of functions on the MPH CPU boardsthat are required to be functional to establish reliable communications. This set of diagnosticsenforces a confidence building sequence of test execution.

The primary functions of the board are tested and if these functions are within test limits, theyare used to test other board functions.

If the primary functions are not testable, the test sequence is aborted.

The following synoptics demonstrates the functions verified during the PU_CTRL_CPU andROOM_IF_CPU PRD sequence. Diagnosis is to a Field Replaceable Unit level (CPU boardsfor PRD).

The boards functions should be tested in the specified sequence presented in the followingparagraph.

As PU_CTRL_CPU, ROOM_IF_CPU board can execute PRD sequences itself. It is thereason why communication between both boards is the last PU_CTRL_CPU (master board)PRD sequence which can’t be ended since ROOM_IF_CPU PRD sequences are not finished.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–5

PRD Leds

PRD switches

PRD Leds

PRD switches68360

68302

TAV

ROOM_IF_CPU board

PU_CTRL_CPU board

SCC4

HDLClink

MPH A4–A3

MPH A6–A1

Distributionboard J12

MPH A6–A5

J11

MADRIDConsoleMPH A7

ServiceTerminal

J18

OR

J2

J1

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–6

2–2 User/Operator Interface

2–2–1 MPH Power on / Reset Diagnostics. Summary Of Switches And LEDS Utilization

PU_CTRL_CPU Read the tracking code on Leds

87654321

DS8DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7

PU_CTRL_CPU BOARD MPH A4–A3

CPU68360

ONOFF

HALT

RESETM15VP15V5V

Least Significant Bit Most Significant Bit

U46

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–7

PU_CTRL_CPU board Leds signification

NAME OF TEST Error codeon LEDS

PRD7 PRD6 PRD5 PRD4 PRD3 PRD2 PRD1 PRD0

Normal modeExtended modeDebug modeMonitor mode

non applicable

Loop on all testsLoop on all tests(extended mode)

non applicable

Alive test FEH � � � � � � � �

EPROM checksum 84H � � � � � � � �

68360 Internal RAM 99H address9AH data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

� �

�

�

Short RAM 97H address98H data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

RAM test (extended mode)

97H address98H data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

Long RAM 97H address98H data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

68360 Processor TestBEH � � � � � � � �

68360 Watch_dogTest

8FH � � � � � � � �

68360 Internal timersTimer 1 LinearityTimer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 Timer 1 InterruptionTimer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4

87H88H89H8AH8BH8CH8DH8EH

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

� : led on, � : led off

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–8

ROOM_IF_CPU Read the tracking code on Leds

DS8

DS15

DS14

DS13

DS12

DS11

DS10

DS9

CPU68302

ON

HALT

RESET

M15V P15V5V

Least Significant Bit

Most Significant Bit

87654321

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U B

OA

RD

MP

H A

6–A

1

OFF

U62

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–9

ROOM_IF_CPU board Leds signification

NAME OF TEST Error codeon LEDS

DS15 DS14 DS13 DS12 DS11 DS10 DS9 DS8

Normal modeExtended modeDebug modeMonitor mode

non applicable

Loop on all testsLoop on all tests(extended mode)

non applicable

Alive test FEH � � � � � � � �

EPROM checksum 84H � � � � � � � �

68302 Internal RAM 99H address9AH data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

Short RAM 97H address98H data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

RAM test (extended mode)

97H address98H data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

Long RAM 97H address98H data

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

68302 Processor TestBEH � � � � � � � �

68302 Watch_dogTest

8FH � � � � � � � �

68302 Internal timers10msTimer 1

Timer 2

88H89H linearity 8BH interruptions8AH linearity 8CH interruptions

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

� : led on, � : led off

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–10

PU_CTRL_CPU & ROOM_IF_CPU PRD Description

PU_CTRL_CPU & ROOM_IF_CPU Alive Test

The purpose of this test is to verify minimum CPU functionalities.

This test will have the following functionality:

� Verify a limited subset of the processor instruction set.

� Verify ability to initialize each register of the CPU32+ or 68000 core.

� This test do not use the RAM.

In the event of a failure, the board diagnostics is unpredictable, therefore isolation should bethe board level.

PU_CTRL_CPU FlashEEPROM or ROOM_IF_CPU EPROM checksum test

The purpose of this test is to verify the integrity of the Flash–EEPROM/EPROM located onthe MPH CPU boards. This test will have the following functionality:

� Verify checksum of each Flash–EEPROM/EPROM device.

In the event of a failure, change the CPU board (diagnosis should be made to the memoryconfiguration logic).

PU_CTRL_CPU & ROOM_IF_CPU RAM memory test

The purpose of this test is to verify the random access memory used by the software as a dataand stack area. This test could run in three different mode, the first one (short part) runs innormal mode, the second and third ones (extended or long part) run only if somebody ask forthem with the switches.

PU_CTRL_CPU & ROOM_IF_CPU Short RAM memory test

The test should have the following functionality:

� Verify ability to correctly address board resident volatile RAM devices.

� Verify ability to write and read with one pattern each memory cell of the volatile RAMarray.

� Test the 68360/68302 internal RAM.

In the event of a failure, change the CPU board (diagnosis should be made to the defectiveRAM component or memory location).

PU_CTRL_CPU & ROOM_IF_CPU RAM Test (Extended Mode)


� Verify ability to correctly address board resident RAM devices.

� Verify ability to write and read with different patterns each memory cell of the volatileRAM array

In the event of a failure, change the CPU board (diagnosis should be to the defective RAMcomponent or memory location).

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–11

PU_CTRL_CPU & ROOM_IF_CPU Long RAM Test


� Verify ability to correctly address board resident RAM devices.

� Verify ability to write and read each memory cell of the RAM array.

� Verify for each 32 bits cell that other cells are still zero.

In the event of a failure, change the CPU board (diagnosis should be to the defective RAMcomponent or memory location).

ROOM_IF_CPU 68302 tests

1. Processor Test

The purpose of this test is to verify any instruction that has not yet been verified or usedby the PRD. The test should have the following functionality:

� Verify ability of processor to execute:

– call,

– conditional jump,

– multiply,

– divide,

– addition,

– subtraction,

– software interrupts.

In the event of a test failure, change the CPU board (diagnosis should be made to the68360/68302 processor).

2. Watch_dog test

The purpose of this test is to verify that the sequence of reset due to a watchdog timeoutis working properly.

So, the watchdog timer is loaded with 20ms as in application mode.

When the count reaches the reference, the timer sets an output of the microcontrollerwhich generates a reset.

So, this test verifies that the reset occurs 20ms after the end of the counting sequence.

If no reset occurs, the microcontroller goes in halt state (with the associated treatment)if ”loop on test mode” is not selected. If a reset occurs, the status of the sequence beforethe reset is read to know if the test has been performed with the good timing. If it is notthe case, the microcontroller goes in halt state (with the associated treatment) if ”loop ontest mode” is not selected.

In the event of a test failure, change the ROOM_IF_CPU board (diagnosis should bemade to the processor or to the reset management function).

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–12

3. Internal Timers

The purpose of this test is to verify operation of the 68302 internal timers and periodicinterrupt. These timers are used for AEC clock and time measurement.

They are initiated after PRDs of the ROOM_IF_CPU.


� Verify linearity of counting sequence.

� Verify operation of the interrupt generated by the 68302 timers.

In the event of a test failure, change ROOM_IF_CPU board (diagnosis should be madeto the 68302 processor).

PU_CTRL_CPU 68360

1. Processor Test

The purpose of this test is to verify any instruction that has not yet been verified or usedby the PRD. The test should have the following functionality:

� Verify ability of processor to execute:

– call,

– conditional jump,

– multiply,

– divide,

– addition,

– subtraction,

– software interrupts.

In the event of a test failure, change the PU_CTRL_CPU board (diagnosis should bemade to the 68360/68302 processor).

2. Watch_dog test

The purpose of this test is to verify that the sequence of reset due to a watchdog timeoutis working properly.

So, the watchdog timer is loaded with 41,9ms as in application mode.

When the count reaches the reference, the timer sets an output of the microcontrollerwhich generates a reset.

So, this test verifies that the reset occurs 41,9 ms after the end of the counting sequence.

If no reset occurs, the microcontroller goes in halt state (with the associated treatment)if ”loop on test mode” is not selected. If a reset occurs, the status of the sequence beforethe reset is read to know if the test has been performed with the good timing. If it is notthe case, the microcontroller goes in halt state (with the associated treatment) if ”loop ontest mode” is not selected.

In the event of a test failure, change the PU_CTRL_CPU board (diagnosis should bemade to the processor or to the reset management function).

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–13

3. Internal Timers

The purpose of this test is to verify operation of the 68360 internal timers. These timersare used for time, mAs, bright exposure and VRTX clock.

They are initiated after PRDs of the PU_CTRL_CPU.


� Verify linearity of counting sequence.

� Verify operation of the interrupt generated by the 68360 timers.

In the event of a test failure, change PU_CTRL_CPU board (diagnosis should be madeto the 68360 processor).

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–14

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

SCC3

TAVConsole

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC

COMMAND1 board COMMAND2 board

68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O

Exposure controlRESET (PB + Pwr on)

DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod

ROOM_IF_CPU interface

UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPIDriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAMCS2

Drivers RS232 Drivers RS232

I/O

I/O

I/O

RS485Drivers

DECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PRDPU_CTRL_CPU board

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–15

PU_CTRL_CPU BOARD

Power_On Reset Diagnostics

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites: – None

PU_CTRL_CPU ALIVE TEST ERROR CODES

Error (not displayed on console but on leds on the board) Power_On Reset Diagnostics

Description

00h Unknown code

FEh CPU Alive test failure

84h EPROM test failure

97h RAM Address test failure

98h RAM data test failure

99h mc68360 Internal RAM Address test failure

9Ah mc68360 Internal RAM Data test failure

BEh mc68360 Processor test failure

8Fh mc68360 watch_dog test failure

87h mc68360 Timer1 linearity test failure



8Ah mc68360 Timer4 linearity test failure

8Bh mc68360 Timer1 Interrupt test failure

8Ch mc68360 Timer2 Interrupt test failure

8Dh mc68360 Timer3 Interrupt test failure

8Eh mc68360 Timer4 Interrupt test failure

RECOMMENDED ACTION

� Check on PU_CTRL_CPU the following connections:– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J23) and CMD1 (XJ23)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–16

CPU–68302

PU_CTRL_CPU interface

AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE

PU_CTRL_CPU CONNECT.

– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ARCNET COAX

ALIM_OK

REF10V_OKSUPPLY CONNECT

SUPPLY TEST LEDS

– 10V, 1V24 REFERENCE

– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER

– REVISION REGISTER

– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V

– PROGRAMMABLE GAIN

– TRACKING COUNTER

– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS


– ROOM INTERF. DRIVERS

CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU board: PRD

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–17

ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD

Power_On Reset Diagnostics

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites: – None

ROOM_IF_CPU ALIVE TEST ERROR CODES

Error (not displayed on console but on leds on the board) Power_On Reset Diagnostics

Description

00h Unknown code

FEh CPU Alive test failure

84h EPROM test failure

97h RAM Address test failure

98h RAM data test failure

99h mc68302 Internal RAM Address test failure

9Ah mc68302 Internal RAM Data test failure

BEh mc68302 Processor test failure

8Fh mc68302 watch_dog test failure

88h mc68302 10ms Interrupt test failure


8Ah mc68302 Timer2 linearity test failure

8Bh mc68302 Timer1 Interrupt test failure

8Ch mc68302 Timer2 Interrupt test failure

RECOMMENDED ACTION

� Check on CPU the following connections:– Between ROOM_IF_CPU (J2) and DISTRIBUTION (J11)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–18

SECTION 3SLD

3–1 Here to use

3–1–1 TAV Tests Operator Interface

The MPH dialogs with a PC–resident program (called TAV) through a serial communicationslink in order to select and execute the different tests available.

Here are described the different possibilities of selecting and executing tests, how they areorganized and how the results are stored.

Tests Hierarchy

The tests have been grouped functionally, there is a main menu level and then 10 submenusrelated to the functions.

PUCTRL 1. Read Buffers2. Command Buffer3. Power ON SignalCMD1

PUCTRL 1. Read Buffers2. Command Buffer

4. Tube Stator Selection5. Heater Tube Selection

ROTOR

6. HV Switch CommandHEATER

7. HV Switch MotorHV TANK

3. Tube SelectionCMD2

PUCTRL 1. Read Buffers2. Command Buffer3 ADC4. RS485 Interface Drivers5. Exposure Enable6. Analogic7. RS485

ROOMIF

CMD1 8. LV_ENABLE Signal

MAIN PSDC FILTER


5. DC Level Measure

CMD1 3. DC Level Network4. DC Level Detection

F1: ON/OFF TEST

F2: LVPS TEST

F3: DCPS TEST

F4: TUBE TEST

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–19

PUCTRL2. Switches and Leds3. Exposure Enable4. Exposure Management5. Room Input6. Room Output7. RS485

ROOMIF

8. Analogic9. Switches and Leds

II SENSOR 0. HVPM IPM test

PUCTRL 1. Read Buffers2. Command Buffer3. ADC4. DAC5. RS485 Interface Drivers

7. Exposure Management8. RS485

6. Exposure EnableROOMIF

F5: INTERFACE TEST

F6: KV TEST

1. RS 485

INVERTER

2. Current Measurement & IGBT FPS

6. Power Components7. Final Cross Check

CMD1 1. kV Test Relay

3 kV Safeties4. kV Rise and Regulation5. kV Max Safety

PUCTRL 1. Read Buffers2. Command Buffer3. ADC4. DAC

CMD2 5. XS Current Control

7. XS Regulation Safety8. XL Regulation Safety

HEATER 9. Final Cross Check

6. XL Current Control

PUCTRL

1. Xilinx 1ms Internal Timer2. Read Buffers

5. mAs Shunt Measurement6. mA Max Safety

CMD1

3. Command Buffer4. ADC Measurement

F7: KV TEST CONTD.

F8: MA TEST

F9: HEATER TEST


5. IGBT Drivers6. Final Cross Check

CMD2 3. Current Control & HS Mode4. Max Current Safety

ROTOR

F10: ROTOR TEST

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–20

Tests Selection

On the main TAV menu, go to MENU 2 and then select TESTS (F1). By doing so, you enter theMAIN TEST MENU, whose submenus have been presented on the previous paragraph. Onceon the main menu, you can go down to a submenu by pressing F1 .. F10. There is a set of keyson the PC–keyboard that have a meaning concerning tests selection and execution:

� F1 .. F10: While on the main menu, they allow going down to a submenu, as seen onthe tests hierarchy. For instance, to view MA TESTS menu, push F1.

At the top screen line, the name of the menu is displayed.

� 1 .. 9,0: These keys allow the selection (toggle) of a group of tests for execution whenwe are on the main menu, or a single test when we are on a submenu. On the main menu,it selects (toggles the selection) all the tests grouped by F?, being ? the key pushed(1 .. 9,0). If we are on a submenu, it selects the single test designed by the key, for instancefor ON/OFF Tests, key 2 toggles the selection for Command Buffer Test. When a test orgroup is selected, its test box is highlighted.

� A, B, C, D, E, F: These keys are used for the tests that during its execution, requirean additional information. They represent a choice among 6 different values.

� W Select All: Selects all the tests within scope, all the tests in a submenu. Don’t useon the main menu. If this feature is active, its dialog box is highlighted.

� T Select No Operator: Selects all the tests within scope that don’t need theoperator action to be performed, all the tests in a submenu or all the test if we are on themain menu. If this feature is active, its dialog box is highlighted.

� R Return: Go to the previous menu level.

� Q Quit : Quit TAV menus.

� V Execution: Executes the tests selected. While tests are executed, the test boxassociated to the menu and to this feature blinks. If loop on tests is selected, it displaysat the top of the screen the number of loops carried out and the number of errorsencountered. If ’no stop on error’ is not selected, the execution will be stopped if an erroris encountered and the error information will be displayed instead, in this case, pressagain ’V’ when the error information is no longer needed.

� Z ExeErr : When a set of tests is selected and being executed, it doesn’t stop if an erroris encountered, storing its information for later display.

� U Loop: Select loop on tests.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–21

Main Menu Screen

F10

F1 F3 F5 F7 F9

F4 F6 F8F2

9:Heater

W: SelAll R: Return V: Exec Q: Exit Z: ExeErr U: Loop

–––––––––––––––– F1: ON/OFF F3: DCPS F5: INTR_SW/LEF7: KV continuedF9: HEATER

F2: LVPS F4: TUBE F6: KVF8: MAF10: ROTOR

TESTS MAIN MENU

TEST MENU ––––––––––––––––

1:ON/OFF

0:Rotor

6:KV 7:kV ctd4:TUBE 8:mA2:LVPS 3:DCPS 5:INTER

T: SelNop

On the main menu, the keys W, T have a global scope, toggling the selection for all the tests inall the submenus. The 1 .. 9,0 keys, toggles the selection for the submenus associated to eachone: 1 to HEATER TESTS, 2 to ROTOR TESTS , and so on.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–22

Submenu Screen Example

W: SelAll T: SelNopR: Return V: Exec Q: Exit Z: ExeErr U: Loop

––––––––1: Read Buffers 2: Command buffer 3: ADC 4: DAC–––––––––– CMD2 ––––––––––5: XS current control 6: XL current contrl7: XS regulation safety 8: XL regulation safety–––––––– HEATER –––––––––

HEATER TESTS

PUCTRL

Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Test 5 Test 6 Test 7 Test 8

Test 9 Test 10

––––––––

9: Final Cross Check

On the submenus, the keys W, T have a local scope, toggling the selection for all the tests in thesubmenus. The 1 .. 9,0 keys, toggles the selection for the single tests associated to each one: 1to Read Buffers Test, 2 to Command Buffer Test , and so on.

Tests Execution

When tests are beeing executed, the display box V: Exec will blink, and the display box relatedto the test will blink as well. If tests are executed from the main menu, it is the submenu displaybox that blinks.

If the option Execution without stopping on error is selected, the errors found are stored andcan be displayed later (see menu LIST). Otherwise, the execution is stopped and the errorinformation will be displayed on the uppermost line:

Err *** U*** AD**** ED**** AA********Error User Actual Expected ActualCode Status Data Data Address

In the latter case, press V again to go back to tests selection.

In the options loop on tests and no stop on error are selected, the number of loops performedand the number of total errors are displayed on the uppermost line.

While tests are beeing carried out, press V to stop the execution at the end of the running test.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–23

Stored Diagnostics Errors Display

On the main TAV menu, go to MENU 2 and then select LIST (F3).

^H: Clear R: Return Q: Exit Z: AppErr U: DiaErr

MENU LIST: Displays last 16 error codes occuring,number of occurence and the date of the first

F3/F4: Displays last or next error

^H (Ctrl H): To clear 16 codes from memory, enter ^H

Error n * = *** * Nb Date

and enter ^H again to confirm

F3

F4

In this screen, we can select application error codes (Z) or diagnostics error codes (U). Thescreen shown corresponds to Diagnostics:

Error n * = *** * Nb DateError Index Error Number of Times Date of Last Code it Appeared Appereance

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–24

3–1–2 Functional requirements for MPH SLD

Introduction

The purpose of the MPH SLD is to provide an as automatic as possible way to determine thefaulty FRU’s with a confidence level which is TBD.

The diagnostic design described here will be implemented as a functional procedure, thepurpose being to run the MPH functions and identify which board or FRU is faulty as regard tothe concerned function.

The diagnostic functional description involves all the MPH functions and the different FRU’sidentified as part of the generator.

3–1–3 MPH functions

The MPH functions diagnosed by the SLD are the following:

� On/Off Function

� Low Voltage Power Supply

� DC Power Supply

� Tube Selection

� kV Command

� mA Measure

� Heater

� Rotor Controller

� Switches and LED’s

� Room Interface

3–1–4 MPH FRU’s

The Field Replaceable Units involved in the above functions are the following:

� PU_CTRL_CPU board

� ROOM_IF_CPU board

� CMD1 board

� CMD2 board

� HEATER board

� ROTCTL board

� MAINPS board

� DCPS board

� HV tank

� +/– 15, 5V Power supply

� 24V Power supply

� Auto transformer

� EMI Filters

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–25

� Air Filters

� Fuses (Pocket 1)

� Fuses (Pocket 2)

� ON/OFF Contactor

3–1–5 SLD design description

The method used to describe the MPH SLD follows the different functions identified above.For each function, a general block diagram showing the FRU’s is given, followed by all thetests necessary to diagnose properly the described function. Each test is detailed by itspre–requisites, its sequencing and a hatched block diagram of the involved FRU.

One exception is made for CPU boards, since it supports all the functionalities of thegenerator. In this case, most of the tests are similar from one function to another, so that thedescription of the test is lead by the functions. Each test description gives the sequencing andthe functions it involves, in order that the test can be reported in the diagnostic software as partof each function.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–26

SECTION 4APPLICATION ERROR CODES

4–1 Software Processing

4–1–1 Class I Error Treatment

Stops the exposure and inhibits it.Stop the filaments heating.Set the anode rotation in free run.Stops a running tube switch.

4–1–2 Class II Error Treatment

No treatment, the exposure restarts if number of spits, for this exposure, is less than 7.

4–1–3 Class III Error Treatment

Stops the exposure and inhibits it.

4–1–4 Class IV Error Treatment

Stops the exposure and inhibits it.Stop the filaments heating.Set the anode rotation in free run.Stops a running tube switch.

4–1–5 Error transmission Mechanism

All the errors codes are sent to the APPLICATION task where they are treated and sent to thecontrol panel (TAV/Integrated Console/Control Console).The error code is stored in the last 16 errors list if it is different from the last error code thatoccurred.For the thermic errors, the temperature led flickers on the control panel until the defaultdisappears.

Note: Errors codes are composed of three numbers, if four numbers are displayed, the firstnumber is the number of the tube (1 or 2).

Ex: error code 1 710

Tube identifier(1 or 2)

Error code

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–27

��

MPHCode

Internal Code Cause Effect Action

110 TUB_SEL_ROT_ON New tube demand while rotoris running

classIVExposure inhibitedNo tube commutation

Reset errorRepeat the tube or technicchange

112 MA_SCALE_ERR

KVMA_TEST_SEL_ERR

mA scale switches replies anddemand mismatch. Those sig-nals are tested 20ms after thescale change command andeach 10ms.kV and mA test switchesreplies and demand mismatch.kV and mA test switches ismade after each power on. Thereplies status are tested 20msafter the change command andeach 10ms.

classIVExposure inhibited

Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticsmAMENU2 TEST F8

Note: If it appears in outputof diagnostic test, ignore it.

114 ROT_SEL_ERR Rotor tube switches replies anddemand mismatch


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticstube and rotorMENU2 TEST F4MENU2 TEST F10

115 HEAT_SEL_ERR Heat tube switches replies anddemand mismatch


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticstube and heaterMENU2 TEST F4MENU2 TEST F9

117 TUBE_SEL_ERR High voltage tube switchesreplies and demand mismatch


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticstubeMENU2 TEST F4

118 TUB_SEL_HEAT_ON New tube demand while heat isrunning on one or the two focus

classIVExposure inhibitedNo tube commutation

Reset errorRepeat the tube or technicchange

119 TUB_SEL_KV_ON New tube demand while kVmeasured > 9kV


Reset error and wait fewminutesRepeat the tube or technicchange

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–28

MPHCode


200 MAX_TUBE_CURRENT

Tube current max detection(mA_max signal)

class IINot displayed on con-trol deskIncrement tube spitnumberRestart the exposure

201 UNKNOWN_RES_SAF Tube spit without safety signalset (res_safety signal)

class IINot displayed on con-trol deskIncrement tube spitRestart the exposure

202 KV_REGUL_ERROR KV regulation error (regul_outsignal)


203 KVMAX_FAILURE KV max detection (kv_maxsignal)


204 KV_DROP KV drop on both side(kv_drop_cat and kv_drop_ansignals)


205 KV_DROP_AN KV drop on anode side(kv_drop_cat signal)


206 KV_DROP_CAT KV drop on cathode side(kv_drop_cat signal)


207 MAX_INV_CURRENT Max inverter current detection(i_inv_max signal)


DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–29

MPHCode


300 HEATF_XL_PREH Heat fault detection during pre-heat on large focus (heat-fault_xs signal)


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticsheaterMENU2 TEST F9

301 HEATF_XL_BOOST Heat fault detection duringboost on large focus (heat-fault_xl signal)



302 HEATF_XL_HEAT Heat fault detection during heaton large focus (heatfault_xl sig-nal)



303 PRES_XL_PREH No current in large focus heatcircuit during preheat (pres-ence_xl signal)



304 PRES_XL_BOOST No current in large focus heatcircuit during boost (pres-ence_xl signal)



305 PRES_XL_HEAT No current in large focus heatcircuit during heat (presence_xlsignal)



306 OVER_XL_PREH Overload current detection inlarge focus heat circuit duringpreheat (over_xl signal)



307 OVER_XL_BOOST Overload current detection inlarge focus heat circuit duringboost (over_xl signal)



308 OVER_XL_HEAT Overload current detection inlarge focus heat circuit duringheat (over_xl signal)



DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–30

MPHCode


309 HE_HEAT_XL One of the heat safety signal isactivated while large focus heatcircuit is not running (heat-fault_xl, overl_xl, presence_xlsignals)



320 HEATF_XS_PREH Heat fault detection during pre-heat on small focus (heat-fault_xs signal)



321 HEATF_XS_BOOST Heat fault detection duringboost on small focus (heat-fault_xs signal)



322 HEATF_XS_HEAT Heat fault detection during pre-heat on small focus (heat-fault_xs signal)



323 PRES_XS_PREH No current in small focus heatcircuit during preheat (pres-ence_xs signal)



324 PRES_XS_BOOST No current in small focus heatcircuit during boost (pres-ence_xs signal)



325 PRES_XS_HEAT No current in small focus heatcircuit during heat (pres-ence_xs signal)



326 OVER_XS_PREH Overload current detection insmall focus heat circuit duringpreheat (over_xs signal)



327 OVER_XS_BOOST Overload current detection insmall focus heat circuit duringboost (over_xs signal)



DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–31

MPHCode


328 OVER_XS_HEAT Overload current detection insmall focus heat circuit duringheat (over_xs signal)



329 HE_HEAT_XS One of the heat safety signal isactivated while small focusheat circuit is not running(heatfault_xs, overl_xs, pres-ence_xs signals)



410 DC_BUS_ERROR DC bus out of range(dc_bus_fault signal)


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticson/off and DC busMENU2 TEST F1MENU2 TEST F3Then follow the faulty treeON/OFF and DCPS

411 FPS_ERROR Inverter floating power supplydefault (fps_fault signal)


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticson/off and DC busMENU2 TEST F1MENU2 TEST F3Then follow the faulty treeON/OFF

412 LV_SUPPLY_ERR Low voltage power supplyerror (_lv_enable signal)


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticson/off and lvpsMENU2 TEST F1MENU2 TEST F2Then follow the faulty treeON/OFF

420 MAIN_DROP Main power supply error(MAIN_DROP signal)

classIExposure inhibited

Reset error.

501 ERR_PILE The battery for the non volatileRAM reach its maximum timeof use 3 years

Error is displayed ateach switch ON

Change the RAM onPU_CTRL_CPU and batteryon program’x (if present).See preventive maintenanceon SM ch4

502 ERR_RAM RAM checksum faulty. Exposure inhibiteduntil checksum bemade.

MENU5 of maintenancemenu.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–32

MPHCode


504 ERR_COD_TAB_FAIL

ERR_COD_TAB_FULLERR_FLOATVRTX_ERR

Shift between the error codetable and the internal code.Error code table too largeFloating calculation error.VRTX error

classIExposure inhibited

Reset error

505 WATCHDOG_ERROR Reset due to watch_dog time-out

classIThe CPU is reset

Reset error

506 TUBE_CMD_ERROR Demand tube number > 3 classIVExposure inhibited

Reset error

507 ROT_CMD_TUB_CH New rotor command while tubeis changing


Reset error.

511 NO_KV_FEEDBACK KV < 6kv 500�s after expo-sure_command (kv_inf_kv0signal)

classIIIStop exposure

Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnostickVMENU2 TEST F6MENU2 TEST F7

512 KV75_ERROR KV don’t reach 75% of askedvalue 10ms after the start of theexposure



513 HE_INVERTER Inverter safety is set out ofexposure (safety, kv_inf_kv0,exp_time_max, restart-ing_safety, kv_drop,kv_drop_an, kv_drop_cat,kv_max, mA_max, regul_out,i_inv_max, kv_sup_75kvn sig-nals)


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnostickVMENU2 TEST F6MENU2 TEST F7

515 CONNECTIC_FAULT Link with CMD1 and CMD2board is corrupted (_continuitysignal)


Reset error.Check cables betweenPU_CTRL_CPU and CMD1and CMD2 boards.

516 ADC_FAIL A/D inverter does not end theconversion or the re_read ofdemands (ich_lf or ich_sf orkv_demand) is too far from thesent value


Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticskV and heaterMENU2 TEST F6MENU2 TEST F7MENU2 TEST F9

Note: If it appears in outputof diagnostic test, ignore it.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–33

MPHCode


520 ETHER_ERROR Error in communication ether-net

Ethernet serial linknot usedclassIVExposure inhibited

521 HDLC_ERRORRX_CHECKSUM_ERRRX_OVERRUNRX_CRC_ERRORRX_ABORT_SEQ

Error in communicationbetween ROOM_IF_CPU andPU_CTRL_CPU boards


Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticinterfaceMENU2 TEST F5

522 SCC3_ERROR Error in communication withTAV/GPX


Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticinterfaceMENU2 TEST F5Then check with faulty treeserial link

523 SCC4_ERROR Error in communication controldesk



524 SMC1_ERROR Error in communication withAPR



525 SMC2_ERROR Error in communication debugterminal

Serial link not usedclassIVExposure inhibited

526 TST_COM_ERR Check each 10s the commu-nication betweenPU_CTRL_CPU andROOM_IF_CPU boards. Errorwhen message missing orwrong message fromROOM_IF_CPU.

Exposure inhibited Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticsInterface MENU2 TEST F5then check with faulty treeserial link

540 END_OF_T_BOOST Boost time > 400ms classIVExposure inhibited

Reset error.

543 TMAX_10S_OVERFLOW

Safety.Exposure time maximum, 10s(exp_time_max signal)


Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnostickV MENU2 TEST F6 MENU TEST F7

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–34

MPHCode


544 EXP_CMD_NOT_OK Exposure command while PUnot ready (rotor not running orclass I, III or IV error not resetor rotor or inverter or tubesafety set or selected tube notcorresponding to the askedtube)


Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticinterfaceMENU2 TEST F5Then check with faulty treeinterface

545 REPETITIVE_ERROR 7 tube spits detected during theexposure


Reset errorIf it reappears, warm-up thetube then find the default inrunning diagnostic kVMENU2 TEST F6MENU2 TEST F7

547 THERM_INV Inverter temperature, calculatedeach 10ms, reaches maximum

classIVExposure inhibitedLed flickers on thecontrol panel whileinverter temperaturedoes not authorize anew exposure

Wait for cooling, red triangleOFF

550 XILINX_CONF_ERR Xilinx not configured. classIVExposure inhibited

Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticinterfcaeMENU2 TEST F5

551 UNKNOWN_SAFETY Safety without safety signal set(safety signal)



552 ERR_MAS_MAX Exposure stopped by mAscounter instead of time counter.

Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticmAMENU2 TEST F8Then run heating currentcalibration SM RG003

553 ERR_TEMPS_MAX Exposure stopped by timecounter instead of mAs counter.

Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnostickV MENU2 TEST F6 MENU2 TEST F7

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–35

MPHCode


554 MA_METER_SAT mA > 20mA during fluoro Reset errorIf it reappears, run mA(MENU6 kmadj) and heatingcurrent calibration SMRG003

557 TOMO TOO SLOW X-Ray cut by generator insteadTomograph if Tomo time prior

Reset errorCheck Tomograph time cutOff

558 TOMO TOO QUICK X-Ray cut by Tomographbefore generator if generatortime prior

Reset errorCheck Tomograph time cutOff

559 NO_MA_FEEDBACK mA < 0.15mA ( x100 scale),mA < 1.5mA (x10 scale) ormA < 4 (x1 scale) 20ms afterthe start of exposure


Reset errorIf it reappears, find thedefault by running mA andheater diagnosticsMENU TEST F8MENU TEST F9If still no problem found,tube filament has short cir-cuitIf heater diagnostics run withno errors, check mA kV mea-surement circuit.

710 ST_OVL_HS_ACC Overload current in rotor con-troller circuit in high speedacceleration (_start_ovl signal)

classIVStop the exposure

Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticrotorMENU2 TEST F10

711 ST_OVL_HS_RUN Overload current in rotor con-troller circuit in high speed run(_start_ovl signal)



712 ST_OVL_HS_BR Overload current in rotor con-troller circuit in high speedbrake (_start_ovl signal)



713 ST_OVL_LS_ACC Overload current in rotor con-troller circuit in low speedacceleration (_start_ovl signal)



DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–36

MPHCode


714 ST_OVL_LS_RUN Overload current in rotor con-troller circuit in low speed run(_start_ovl signal)



716 THERMAL_SAFETY Tube thermal safety (ther-mal_safety signal)

classIVExposure inhibitedLed flickers on thecontrl panel all thetime thermal safety ispresent

Wait for cooling (thermic ledOFF and red triangle OFF)See tube fonctionsblock diagram

717 ST_OVL_LS_BR Overload current in rotor con-troller circuit in low speedbrake (_start_ovl signal)



718 LS_RTN_ERR Rotor speed selection error(signal _ls_rtn)



719 THERM_ROT Rotor inverter temperature, cal-culated each 10ms, reachesmaximum

classIVExposure inhibitedLed flickers on thecontrol panel whilerotor inverter tempera-ture does not authorizea new rotor cycle(acceleration, run andbrake)

Wait for cooling (thermic ledOFF and red triangle OFF)

720 CUR_ST_HS_ACC No current in rotor controllercircuit in high speed accelera-tion (cur_start_on signal)



721 CUR_ST_HS_RUN No current in rotor controllercircuit in high speed run(cur_start_on signal)



722 CUR_ST_HS_BR No current in rotor controllercircuit in high speed brake(cur_start_on signal)



DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–37

MPHCode


723 CUR_ST_LS_ACC No current in rotor controllercircuit in low speed accelera-tion (cur_start_on signal)



724 CUR_ST_LS_RUN No current in rotor controllercircuit in low speed run(cur_start_on signal)



725 CUR_ST_LS_BR No current in rotor controllercircuit in low speed brake(cur_start_on signal)



726 HE_ROTOR Rotor inverter current overloadwhile rotor is off (start_ovl sig-nal)



901 HDLC_COMM Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU boardBuffer length max or less than1 byte

Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticinterfaceMENU2 TEST F5

902 RX_OVERRUN Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU board”over run” communicationerror


903 RX_CRC_ERROR Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU board”CRC” communication error


904 RX_ABORT_SEQ Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU board”abort sequence” communica-tion error


905 HDLC_ERROR Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU board”carrier” communication error


DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–38

MPHCode


906 UART_ERROR Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU boardError in communicationbetween PRINT’X or debugconsole and ROOM_IF_CPUboard.

Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticinterfaceMENU2 TEST F5Then check with faulty treePrint’X

907 ERR_FLOAT Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU boardError during floating calcula-tion

Reset error

908 ERR_ALIM Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU boardPower supply error (ALIM_OKsignal)

Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticlvpsMENU2 TEST F2

909 ERR_REF10V Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU board10V reference power supplyerror (REF10V_OK signal)


910 ERR_VREF Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU boardRoom power supply error(_VREF_TEST signal)


911 TST_COM_ERR Sent by ROOM_IF_CPU boardto PU_CTRL_CPU boardDuring the communication testbetween PU_CTRL_CPU andROOM_IF_CPU, the messagesent by PU_CTRL_CPU iswrong.This test is made each 10s

Reset error.If it reappears, find thedefault in running diagnosticlvpsMENU2 TEST F2Then check with faulty treeserial link

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–39

4–2 Diagnostic error list

Error Code Designation See page

001, 002, 003 Calibration of heating current RG 003 4–45

31, 32, 52 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDCommand Buffers Test

4–46

33, 34, 53 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDRead Buffers Test

4–49

35, 36, 37, 38, 54, 55, 57 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDPU_CTRL_CPU ADC and Measurement Function Test

4–53

39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 58, 59,60

MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDPU_CTRL_CPU DAC Converter Test

4–57

44, 45, 46, 47, 300, 301 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDSPU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU EXP ENABLESignal Test

4–62

48, 270, 271, 272, 273,274, 275, 276, 277, 278,302, 303

MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDSPU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU ExposureManagement Test

4–66

52, 31, 32 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDCommand Buffers Test

4–70

53, 33, 34 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDRead Buffers Test

4–71

54, 55, 57, 35, 36, 37, 38 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDPU_CTRL_CPU ADC and Measurement Function Test

4–72

62, 63 MPH ON/OFFCMD1 POWER_ON signal test

4–75

74 MPH LV POWER SUPPLYCMD2 LV_ENABLE signal test

4–79

85 MPH DC FILTERCMD1 DC Level Network test

4–83

86, 87 MPH DC FILTERMAINPS DC Level Detection test

4–87

88, 89, 90 MPH DC FILTERDC_FILTER DC level measure test

4–91

101 MPH TUBE SELECTIONCMD2 Tube Selection test

4–93

102 MPH TUBE SELECTIONROTCL Tube Stator Selection test

4–95

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–40

Error Code See pageDesignation

103 MPH TUBE SELECTIONHEATER Heater Tube Selection test

4–97

104 MPH TUBE SELECTIONHEATER HV Switch Command test

4–99

105, 106 MPH TUBE SELECTIONHV TANK HV Switch Motor test

4–101

117, 118 MPH KV COMMANDCMD1 KV TEST Relay test

4–105

119, 120, 121, 122, 123,124, 125, 317

MPH KV COMMANDCMD1 Current Meas & IGBT FPS test

4–109

126, 127, 128, 129, 130,131, 132,

MPH KV COMMANDCMD1 kV Safeties test

4–113

133, 134, 135, 136, 137,138, 139, 140, 141, 317

MPH KV COMMANDCMD1 kV Rise and Regulation test

4–117

142, 143, 144, 145, 146,147, 317

MPH KV COMMANDCMD1 kV MAX Safety test

4–121

148, 149, 150, 151, 152,153, 154, 155, 156, 317

MPH KV COMMANDINVERT Power Components tests

4–125

157, 158, 159, 160, 161,162, 163, 164, 165, 317

MPH KV COMMANDFinal Cross check

4–129

176, 177, 178 MPH MA MEASURECMD1 mA Measure Shunt validation

4–135

179, 180 MPH MA MEASURECMD1 mA MAX Safety test

4–138

191, 192, 193 MPH HEATERCMD2 XS Current Control test

4–142

194, 195, 196 MPH HEATERCMD2 XL Current Control test

4–146

197, 198, 199, 200, 201 MPH HEATERCMD2 XS Regulation & Safety test

4–150

202, 203, 204, 205, 206 MPH HEATERCMD2 XL Regulation & Safety test

4–154

207, 208, 209, 210, 211,212, 213

MPH HEATERFinal Cross check

4–158

224, 225, 226, 227 MPH ROTOR CONTROLLERCMD2 Current Control and HS Mode test

4–162

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–41


228, 229, 230, 231 MPH ROTOR CONTROLLERCMD2 Max Current Safety test

4–166

232, 233, 244 MPH ROTOR CONTROLLERCMD2 IGBT Drivers test

4–170

234, 235, 236, 237, 238,239

MPH ROTOR CONTROLLERFinal Cross check

4–174

244, 232, 233 MPH ROTOR CONTROLLERCMD2 IGBT Drivers test

4–178

250 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDPU_CTRL_CPU Switches and LED’s test

4–180

256, 257 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDXilinx 1ms internal timer test

4–182

258, 259, 260, 261, 262,

263, 264, 265, 266, 267,268, 269

MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARDPU_CTRL_CPU Serial Interface Drivers Test

4–184

270, 271, 272, 273, 274,275, 276, 277, 278, 302,303, 48

MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDSPU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU ExposureManagement Test

4–186

279, 280, 318 MPH II_SENSOR BOARDII_SENSOR HTPM Test

4–188

285, 286, 287, 308, 309,310

MPH ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDROOM_IF_CPU Serial Interface Drivers Test

4–191

299 PU_CTRL_CPU ROOM_IF_CPUCommunication Test

4–194

300, 301, 44, 45, 46, 47 MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDSPU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU EXP_ENABLESignal Test

4–195

302, 303270, 271, 272, 273, 274,275, 276, 277, 278, 48

MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPUBOARDSPU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU ExposureManagement Test

4–196

304, 305, 306 MPH ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDInputs Buffers Test

4–199

307 MPH ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD Output Buffers Test

4–203

308, 309, 310285, 286, 287

MPH ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD ROOM_IF_CPU Serial Interface Drivers Test

4–191

311, 312, 313, 314, 315 MPH ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDROOM_IF_CPU Analogictest

4–205

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–42


316 MPH ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDROOM_IF_CPU Switchesand LED’s test

4–211

317, 119, 120, 121, 122,123, 124, 125133, 134, 135, 136, 137,138, 139, 140, 141142, 143, 144, 145, 146,147, 148, 149, 150, 151,152, 153, 154, 155, 156,157, 158, 159, 160, 161,162, 163, 164, 165

MPH KV COMMANDCMD1 Current Meas & IGBT FPS testCMD1 kV Rise and Regulation testCMD1 kV MAX Safety testINVERT Power Components testsFinal Cross check

4–212

318, 279, 280 MPH II_SENSOR BOARDII_SENSOR HTPM test

4–213

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–43

4–3 Diagnostic error code description

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–44

SCC3

TAV Console

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPI DriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAM CS2


I/O

I/O

I/O

RS485DriversDECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardRead Buffer Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–45

Error Code 001, 002, 003

ERROR IN HEATING CURRENT CALIBRATION

(RG 003)

Calibration stoppage.

Heater current instability algorithm fault – error 001.

Too many spits or aborted exposure – error 002.

No mA return – error 003.

Code 001

Restart calibration of focal spot if reappers – Change tube.

Code 002

1) Warm–up tube with low mA and increase kV value, step by step.

2) Restart calibration if persist – Change tube.

Code 003

Run diagnostic test = mA and calibration of mA return = Menu 6.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–46

Error 31, 32Error 52

MPH PU_CTRL_CPU BOARD

Command Buffers Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to verify that the hardware command lines are properly output from the PU_CTRL_CPU.The principle of the test is to write and read values and take decisions by comparison.

Test type : No manual interaction. LOOP–ON allowed.

Sequence : The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :– Tests the ”DC_BUS_OK” and ”ON_ENABLE” to know if there is some voltage remaining on the DC bus. If it is the case, thetest controls the DC bus to stop, initializes a message to the user : ”waiting DC bus to stop”, retest the DC bus every 100ms.– Check if the signal ”DONE” (port PB13 of 68360) is high (configuration complete) or low (no available configuration) : if”DONE” is high, the sofware can read the internal revision register and check if it is compatible with both software and hardwareconfiguration.– Writes all the outputs with a zero.– Writes in each buffer AAh, 55h, 00 and verifies the read values including margin effect on the other buffers.

PU_CTRL_CPU COMMAND BUFFERS ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board Command Buffers Failure

Hardware Status Description

31 DC_BUS errorUser Status : 1 DC_BUS_FAULT incompatible with ON_ENABLE 3 DC_BUS remains ON after the OFF command

32 Read write failureActual address : address of the failureActual Data : value read Expected Data : value expected at this address

52 Xilinx configuration not finished

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–47

RECOMMENDED ACTION

� Check pre–requisites are completed (see above)

� Action :

Error User Status Conclusion

31 Any PU_CTRL_CPU, CMD1 or MAINPS or cables betweenCMD1 and MAINPS faulty. Not conclusive

32 Any PU_CTRL_CPU faulty. Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board.

52 Any Xilinx or associated logic failure.Replace PU_CTRL_CPU.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–48

SCC3

TAVConsole

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPIDriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAMCS2


I/O

I/O

I/O

RS485Drivers

DECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardRead Buffer Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–49



Read Buffers Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – PU_CTRL_CPU Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK.– PU_CTRL_CPU Command Buffers passed OK.

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to check all the input lines from CMD1 and CMD2 boards (except line_drop line which causesa ”NMI” interrupt to the PU_CTRL_CPU by hardware).Moreover, this SLD tests the two SAFETIES interrupts and the EXP_75 interrupt wired to the port C (edge active interrupt of68360).The inputs are connected to three couples of eight input buffers.Each input comprises a low band–pass filter connected to the input of a buffer.A pull–up resistor is connected on each input. Two test signals are present on the PU_CTRL_CPU board. Each one is connectingthe half of the resistors to the +5V in application mode.In diagnostic mode, these relays allow the software to connect either a 5V to the resistors or a 0V.

Test type : No manual interactions.

Sequence : The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :– Check if the signal ”DONE” (port PB13 of 68360 is high (configuration complete) or low (no avaible configuration). If ”DONE”is high, the software can read the internal revision register and check if it is compatible with both software and hardware configura-tion.– The test consists in connecting a low logical level to some inputs and a high to other ones and to check the value read accrossthe buffers by the software.Then the opposite level is connected to the same inputs and another check is done by software. This is done by putting the CMD1and CMD2 output buffers in the high impedance state.– Enables EXPOSURE_75, SAFETY and RESTARTING_SAFETY interrupts.– Sets those signals to active state and checks interrupts occur.– Restores initial configuration.


DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–50

PU_CTRL_CPU READ BUFFERS ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board Read Buffers Failure

Description33 stocked buffer error

User_status = XYX = buffer number (1 = U71 or U73, 2 = U57 or U69, 3 = U50 or U45)Y = step in the testActual Data = read value

(see schematics for more details on the bits )Expected Data = expected value

34 Interrupt errorUser Status = XY (X = INT number in fault : 1 for EXP_75 + 2 for SAFETY + 4 for RES_SAFETY)(Y = step : 7 for falling edge of the 3 ; Bh for rising edge of EXP_75)

53 Xilinx configuration not completed.

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on PU_CTRL_CPU the following connections :– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J22) and CMD1 (XJ2)– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J23) and CMD1 (XJ23)– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J19) and CMD2 (XJ4)

� Action :


33 Any Follows the described Identification Procedure.

34 Any PU_CTRL_CPU faulty. Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board.

53 Any Xilinx or associated logic failure.Replace PU_CTRL_CPU.

Identification Procedure :

STEP 1– Disconnect the following flat cables :

– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J22) and CMD1 (XJ2)– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J19) and CMD2 (XJ4)

– If the test still fails, PU_CTRL_CPU faulty. Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board. – If the test indicates no error, go to STEP 2.

STEP 2– Reconnect the flat cable between PU_CTRL_CPU (J22) and CMD1 (XJ2).– If the test fails, CMD1 faulty. Replace CMD1 board.– If the test indicates no error, CMD2 faulty. Replace CMD2 board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–51

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–52

SCC3

TAVConsole

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPIDriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAMCS2


I/O

I/O

I/O

RS485Drivers

DECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardA/D Converter andMeasurement FunctionTest

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–53

Error 35, 36, 37, 38Error 54, 55, 57


PU_CTRL_CPU ADC and Measurement Function Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK.– ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to verify that the multiplexors located before the A/D converter are selectable, that the A/Dis selectable and working properly (the offset and linearity of the A/D converter are within acceptable limits). Thetest is also designed to verify that the analog buffers, the mAs measurement and time measurement functions are wor-king properly.

Test type : No manual interactions. LOOP–ON allowedSequence :The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :

– Read status register and check if ’_UNDER+15V’, ’_UNDER–15V’ signals are all at ’1’ level.

– Check if the signal ”DONE” (port PB13 of 68360) is high (configuration complete) or low (no avaible configura-tion) : if ”DONE” is high, the sofware can read the internal revision register and check if it is compatible withboth software and hardware configuration.

– A special meas_test switch selects in parallel with the multiplexor the following 4 voltage references : input number 1 : 8.26V 240mV accuracy

input number 2 : 2.5V 80mV accuracyinput number 3 : –8.26V 240mV accuracyinput number 4 : –2.5V 80mV accuracy

– The sofware first tests its ability to select the right input of each multiplexor. So each input is successively selectedand a A/D conversion is made.

– Then, the sofware verifies that for each MUX the value read for the input number 1, 2, 3, 4 are matching the refe-rence voltages with the above accuracy. The signal ”_BUSY_ADC” which means ”end of conversion” is testedhere. This test verifies that the MUX and buffer and the ADC and the address decoding are working.

– Then, by using the input 1, 2, 3 and 4 the software determines the linearity and the offset of the ADC and checksif they are within acceptable limits : this is sufficient to insure a slope within a 5% tolerance window to the nominalslope. Offset should be less than 240mV.

– Then the software switches the reference voltage of 8.26V on the mA buffer.

– The signal INHIB_KV_75 (inside the Xilinx) is generated. It allows the mAs clock to reach the microprocessorwithout KV_75 presence.

– Then the software does a mAs measurement during 400ms and verifies that the value read matchs 666mAs(8.33V=666mA for the high mA scale) with a precision of +/– 10%.

– Then the software resets the INHIB_KV_75 signal. It resets the mAs and time counters and generate the KV_75signal in order to start the mAs counters.

– Then the software does a mAs and time counting measurement during 400ms and verifies that the mAs value readmatches also 666mA with a precision of +/–10%.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–54

PU_CTRL_CPU ADC AND MEASUREMENT FUNCTION ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board ADC and Measurement Function Failure

Description35 ADC Conversion failure due to busy signal (not terminated after 50 � sec)

36 Multiplexer , selection , buffer , offset , slope or ADC failureUser Status : MUX input with bad selection [1,2,3,4]Actual Data : value read *Expected Data : value expected at this selection *

37 mAs measurement failureActual Data : effective mAs read (1bit.mAs)Expected Data : 29Ah (666mAs) User Status : 1 if real KV75 ; 0 if inhibKV75

38 time measurement failureActual Data : effective time read (100 pulses /ms)Expected Data : 9C40h (40000 = 400ms)

54 Under +15V failure

55 Under –15V failure

57 Xilinx configuration not completed

* 1 bit equal 1mV

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on PU_CTRL_CPU the following connections :– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J23) and CMD1 (XJ23)

� Action :


Any Any PU_CTRL_CPU faulty. Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–55

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–56

SCC3

TAVConsole

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPIDriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAMCS2


I/O

I/O

I/O

RS485Drivers

DECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardD/A Converter Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–57

Error 39, 40, 41, 42, 43Error 58, 59, 60


PU_CTRL_CPU DAC Converter Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – PU_CTRL_CPU Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK– ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– PU_CTRL_CPU ADC and measurement function test passed OK

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to verify that the D/A converter used for output the kV voltage reference, I_sf current refe-rence and I_if current reference works properly.This DAC is in fact four DAC working in parallel.The access of each DAC independently is verified first.Then, the offset, slope and monotonicity are verified for each DAC.

Test type : No manual interactions. LOOP–ON allowedSequence :The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :

– Read status register and check if ’_UNDER+15V’, ’_UNDER–15V’ signals are all at ’1’ level.


– Successively, the PU_CTRL_CPU software writes 5V in each DAC and verifies that the output of the one selectedis at 5V and the others at 0V.

– Then for each DAC, the software :

=> Selects the output, writes 0V and determines the offset of the DAC coupled to the ADC. The offset must be lessthan +/–60mV.

=> Then verifies the slope by writing successively FF0h (9.961V theoretically) and 00Fh (0.036V theoretically) andreading the generated output.The slope is defined as : (output in V ”FF0h” – output in V ”00Fh”) / (9.961–0.036).This slope is the product of the DAC and the ADC slopes.Then the DAC slope must be 2.44mV/bit with a +/–5mV precision.

=> Then verifies the linearity and monotonicity by writing codes from 00Fh to FF0h with 010h steps and verifiesthat the readback is always increasing.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–58

PU_CTRL_CPU D/A CONVERTER ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board D/A Converter Failure

Description39 DAC selection error

User Status : corresponds to the test stepActual Data : value read *Expected Data : 1388H = 5000 *

40 DAC offset errorUser Status : DAC which has a bad offset [1, 2, 3, 4] see signification above.Actual Data : offset read * ***Expected Data : 1EH = 30 or FFE2H = –30 *

41 DAC slope errorUser Status : DAC which has a bad slope [1, 2, 3, 4] see signification above.Actual Data : slope read **Expected Data : 64h = 100%

42 DAC linearity and monotonicity errorUser Status : DAC which has a bad linearity [1, 2, 3, 4] see signification above.Actual Data : value read as the greatest *Expected Data : value read as the smallest *

43 ADC busy error

58 Under +15V error

59 Under –15V error


* 1 bit equal 1mV

** in percentage of the nominal value*** offset may be negative value

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–59

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on PU_CTRL_CPU the following connections :– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J23) and CMD1 (XJ23)

� Action :


39 Any PU_CTRL_CPU faulty, replace it.

40 0001 Do not care because this DAC is not used.



40 0002 PU_CTRL_CPU faulty, replace it.

0003

0004

41 0002 PU_CTRL_CPU faulty, replace it

0003

0004

42 0002 PU_CTRL_CPU faulty, replace it.

0003

0004

43 – PU_CTRL_CPU faulty, replace it.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–60

SCC3

TAV Console

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPI DriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAM CS2


I/O

I/O

I/O


Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardEXP_EN Signal Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–61

CPU–68302


AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE


– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ALIM_OK


SUPPLY TEST LEDS


– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER


– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V



– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS



CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU boardEXP_EN Signal Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–62

Error 44, 45, 46, 47Error 300, 301

MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU BOARDS

PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU EXP ENABLE Signal Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK on both boards.– ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.

Purpose : Verify that when the operator pushes and releases the exposure switch, both CPU board see this signal change.

Test type : Interactive. The operator must push and release the exposure switch when asked by the console.

Sequence : The ROOM_IF_CPU software and PU_CTRL_CPU sofware execute the following steps :


– The software tests the signal DC_BUS_OK andON_ENABLE to know if there is some voltage remainingon DC bus. If it is the case, the test controls the DCbus tostop, initializes a message to the user : ”waiting DC bus tostop”, retest the DC bus every 100ms.

– The software enables EXP_EN interrupt and checks initialsignal state

– The software asks ROOM_IF_CPU software to run expo-sure_enable test

– The software reads the ”RD_SALLE_1” register andcheck if ”_VRF_TEST” signal is on ’1’ level

– The software asks the operator to press exposure switches.

– The software reads EXP_EN signal and verifies its state

– The software reads EXPOSURE_ENABLE signal underinterrupt (Port PC10 of 68360).

– The software asks the operator to release the exposureswicthes.

The software read EXP_EN signal and cheks its state.

– The software reads EXPOSURE_SIGNAL signal andchecks its states under interrupt.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–63

PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU EXP ENABLE SIGNAL ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU Boards EXP ENABLE Signal Test Failure

Description

44 DC_BUS errorUser Status : 1 DC_BUS_FAULT incompatible with ON_ENABLE

3 DC_BUS remains ON after the OFF command

45 Initial status failure

46 EXP_EN signal SET failure

47 EXP_EN RESET failure

300 ROOM_IF_CPU board VREF test failure

301 ROOM_IF_CPU board EXP_EN signal state failureUser Status : 1 EXP_EN not set

2 EXP_EN not reset

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on CPUs the following connections :– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J23) and CMD1 (XJ23)– Between PU_CTRL_CPU (J3) and ROOM_IF_CPU (J5)

� Check the connections between ROOM_IF_CPU and DISTRIBUTION board thenControl desk (TAV or GPX or MADRID dsek or table)

� Action :


44 – Pre–requisites not achieved. Run the corresponding diagnos-tics again.

45 – Check exposure_enable signal on rack extension side. (Seeprocedure below). If ok check exposure_enable signal onROOM_IF_CPU. If OK replace PU_CTRL_CPU board

4647

– Check connections between PU_CTRL_CPU,ROOM_IF_CPU, DISTRIBUTION boards. If ok, replacePU_CTRL_CPU board.

300 Check 15VREF power supply. If OK, replaceROOM_IF_CPU board.

301 Any Check exposure_enable signal on rack extension side. (Seeprocess below). If ok replace ROOM_IF_CPU board

Check extension rack : – Check if leds PG1 and GR1 are on when exposure switches are depressed.– check fuse F11 on distribution board– Check interfcae baord (or table board in ace of RF room) or control console or distribution board in case of rad room. (See inter-face block diagram)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–64

SCC3

TAV Console

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPI DriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAM CS2


I/O

I/O

I/O


Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardExposure Management Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–65

CPU–68302


AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE


– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ALIM_OK


SUPPLY TEST LEDS


– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER


– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V



– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS



CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU boardExposure Management Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–66

Error 48Error 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278

Error 302, 303


PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU Exposure Management Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK for both board.– ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.

Purpose : This test checks if ROOM_IF_CPU board is hardware connected. This test uses two spares lines. F10 differential linecan be multiplexed as a software data test (output = CLK_TEST). This line is loopbacked in the Altera’s Epld onROOM_IF_CPU_BOARD and be checked in the Xilinx (line F11 = ’SPARE_IN’).This test checks ”timer_cut_off” function without enabling exposure. This test includes clock multiplexer, Xilinx internal 24 bitstimer with readback by 68360, programmable delay generator with edge interrupt feedback on 68360.This test checks Xilinx programmable internal filter on the ”Exposure command” and ”EXT_CUT_OFF” lines without enablingexposure.


Sequence : The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :

� The PU_CTRL_CPU software tests the signal DC_BUS_OK and ON_ENABLE toknow if there is some voltage remaining on DC bus. If it is the case, the test controls theDCbus to stop, initializes a message to the user : ”waiting DC bus to stop”, retest the DCbus every 100ms.

Xilinx 24 bits internal timer

� Check if the signal ”DONE” (port PB13 of 68360) is high (configuration complete) orlow (no avaible configuration) : if ”DONE” is high, the sofware can read the internalrevision register and check if it is compatible with both software and hardwareconfiguration.

� Disable exposure : CUT_EXPOSURE = inactive.

� Select CLK_TIMER = CLK_INT = CLK_TEST (sofware clock driver).

� Reset timer : RESET_COMPTEUR=’0’

� Program internal delai (24 bits register to be compare with timer).

� Enable TIMER_CUT_OFF edge interrupt on (PC8 port on 68360)

� Enable timer : RESET_COMPTEUR = active

� Write CLK_TEST=’1’ , CLK_TEST=’0’ (software clock edge).

� Read and check 24 bits timer value (compare with number of positive clock edges).

� Redo the two last actions.

� When the number of positive clock edges is equal to ’DELAI’, TIMER_CUT_OFF mustbe active, an interrupt must be detected on PC8.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–67

Xilinx internal filter

� Enable ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET (drivers of ROOM_IF_CPU board are tri–stated).

� Check TEST_IF_CPU_RESET loopback.

� Change RS_BIT_TEST level (loopback of SPI_CLK).

� Select ”Exposure Command” filter clock (CLK_50KHZ, CLK_5KHZ, CLK_500HZ orCLK_50HZ).

� Select CLK_INT = CLK_TEST (software clock driver).

� Enable input feedback : REBOUCLAGE= active.

� Generate 2500000 software clock pulses (write CLK_TEST=’0’, CLK_TEST=’1’) andcheck if EXT_CUT_OFF_FILT (port PC9 of 68360) and EXP_CMD_FILT(port PC0 of68360) propagation delays (number of software clock pulses) are correct.

� Repeat the four last actions for the 4 clock filters

ROOM_IF_CPU board detection

� ��

Exposure command signal test


– Checks exposure_command initial state (xilinx input)

– Disable exposure command to CMD1 board.

– The software reads the ”RD_SALLE_1” register andcheck if ”_VRF_TEST” signal is on ’1’ level

– Enable exposure_command signal and ask operator topress exposure switches.

– Checks exposure_enable and exposure_commands signalsstate (activated) and enable exposure_command to be trans-mitted to PU_CTRL_CPU board.

– Checks exposure_command state (xilinx input)

– Ask operator to release exposure switches.

– Checks exposure_enable and exposure_commands signalsstate (not activated)

_ Disables exposure_command signals

– Checks exposure_command state (xilinx input)

– Reset CLK_INT and CLK_TIMER

– Enables interrupt on EXP_CMD signal

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–68

PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU EXPOSURE MANAGEMENT ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU Boards Exposure Management Failure

Description

48 DC BUS failure User Status : 1 DC_BUS_FAULT incompatible with ON_ENABLE


270 ROOM_IF_CPU board detection failureuser_status 1 ad, ed

2

271 Xilinx Timer 24 bitsuser_status 1 ad, ed

2

272 Signal ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET failure

273 Xilinx filter test failure user status 1

2


275 EXP_CMD at xilinx input wrong initial state

276 EXP_CMD not active

277 EXP_CMD remains active

278 no EXP_CMD interrupt

302 ROOM_IF_CPU board VREF test failure

303 ROOM_IF_CPU board EXP_CMD signal state failure User Status : 1 EXP_EN not set

2 EXP_EN not reset10 EXP_CMD not set2 EXP_CMD not reset

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU the following connections :– PU_CTRL_CPU (J3) and ROOM_IF_CPU (J5)– PU_CTRL_CPU (J23) and CMD1 (J23)

� Check the connections between ROOM_IF_CPU and DISTRIBUTION board thenControl desk (TAV or GPX or MADRID dsek or table)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–69

� Action :



270 Any Replace PU_CTRL_PU board

271 001 Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board.

271 002 Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board.

272 Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board.

273 any Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board

274 Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board

275 Check exposure_command signal on ROOM_IF_CPU andextension rack side. If OK, replace PU_CTRL_CPU board

276 Check exposure_command signal on ROOM_IF_CPU andextension rack side 9Follow the procedure below). If OK,replace PU_CTRL_CPU board

277 Check Exposure_command signal of ROOM_IF_CPU andextension rack side (Follow the procedure below). If ok,replace PU_CTRL_CPU board

278 Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board

302 Check 15VREF power supply (DS1 ON). If OK, replaceROOM_IF_CPU board.

303 Check exposure command signal on rack extension side.(fol-low the procedure below) If OK, replace ROOM_IF_CPUboard.

Check extension rack : – Check if leds PG1 and GR1 are on when exposure switches are depressed.– check fuse F11 on distribution board– Check interfcae baord (or table board in ace of RF room) or control console or distribution board in case of rad room. (See inter-face block diagram)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–70

Error 52 See Error 31, 32


Command Buffers Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–71

Error 53See Error 33, 34


Read Buffers Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–72

Error 54, 55, 57See Error 35, 36, 37, 38


PU_CTRL_CPU ADC and Measurement Function Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–73

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–74

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETY

REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

KV STATUS

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FILTER

FUSES

3 PHASE

DETECTION


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

LV_ENABLECONTROL

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

IGBT COMMANDS


NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

ctrl. cons.

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRL

CMD2MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+–

+ –

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7 U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U36

U19

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47U17

U18

X8–X9U48U49

PU_CTRL

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ON / OFF

LOGIC

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

GEN_ONCONTACTOR CMD

ON/OFF FUNCTION : POWER_ON Signal Test

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

CMDS +STAT

CMD1.BOARD

U29

U37U38

U26

U17

U58Q10–>Q21

U45

_POW_ON

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–75

Error 62, 63

MPH ON/OFF

CMD1 POWER_ON signal test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF Command Buffers passed OK.– ON/OFF Read Buffers passed OK.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to power on the generator, and check if the PU_CTRL_CPU can drive throughCMD1.BOARD the main contactor command. This assumes that a part of the ON/OFF function is running properly,enough at least to communicate with the system.

Test type : No manual interaction. No LOOP–ON.Sequence :

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the DC_BUS status. If it is on then

� DC_BUS ON PU_CTRL_CPU drives the ON/OFF contactor command OFF.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then drives the ON/OFF contactor command ON and checks the_POW_ON return from CMD1.BOARD is Active (_POW_ON =0)

� PU_CTRL_CPU drives the ON/OFF contactor command OFF and checks the_POW_ON return from CMD1.BOARD is Inactive. (_POW_ON =1)

� PU_CTRL_CPU then checks after 20 seconds that the DC level is under 30 Volts, beforeleaving the test.

CMD1 POWER_ON SIGNAL ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board POWER_ON signal Failure

Description62 DC_BUS error

User Status : 1 ON_ENABLE signal never validated after OFF cmnd (_pow_on test not executed)

2 ON_ENABLE signal never validated after OFF cmnd (however _pow_on test executed)

63 pow_on status errorUser Status : 1 _POW_ON not ON after _POW_ON_CMD

2 _POW_ON reset error

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–76

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on CMD1 the following connections :– Between CMD1 (XJ2) and PU_CTRL_CPU (J22)– Between CMD1 (XJ23) and PU_CTRL_CPU (J23)– Between CMD1 (XJ5) and MAINPS (XJ5)– Between CMD1 (XJ4) and DISTRIBUTION (J9).

� Action :


62 001 No conclusion. Check Not executed (pre–req not met)

002 Fault not located at CMD1 level : No action.

63 Any CMD1 faulty. Replace CMD1 board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–77

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–78

TUBE SELECTION

SPEED SELECTION

NETWORK LEVEL

ROTCTL STATE

CLOCKS

IGBT CMDSLV_EN

CONTROL

3 PHASE REBUILD

LEVEL DETECTION

MAX CURRENT

LEVEL SAFETY

HIGH SPEED

RELAY COMMAND

COMMON

MEASURE

2 PHASEMEASURE

LV_ENABLE

+

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

CMD1

CMD1 CMD1

HEATERCMD2

ROTCTL

ROTCTL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL RUN

BRAKE

U35

Q6

U3–U16–U15

U15

U12–U25–U26

LVPS FUNCTION : LV_ENABLE Signal Test

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

EPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

LV POWER

SUPPLY

CONTROL

U30–Q19–>Q22

CMD2.BOARD

LV_ENABLE

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

HS RELAY RETURNPU_CTRL

COMMANDAND STATE

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈU30

U11

LV_ONCMD1

_24V_OK

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–79

Error 74

MPH LV POWER SUPPLY

CMD2 LV_ENABLE signal test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Volt. Command Buffers passed OK.– Low Volt Read Buffers passed OK.

The purpose of this test is to verify that CMD2.BOARD checks the low voltage power supplies (+5V,+15V,–15V) received fromCMD1.BOARD with a good confidence level and try to identify the faulty component by distinguishing between the power supplycontrol located on CMD2.BOARD and the low voltage power supplies themselves.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to compare the _lv_enable signal indicated to the PU_CTRL_CPU.BOARD with a sepa-rate 24 Volts level detection used specifically as a diagnostic circuit, in order to find out whether the _lv_enable detec-tion or the Power Supplies are faulty. This test checks the consistency of the two detection systems. It assumes thatwhenever the +15 Volts, –15 Volts or +5 Volts are faulty, there is no diagnostic possible because the generator cannotbe switched ON and the communication with the system is limited.

Test type : No manual interaction. LOOP–ON allowed.Sequence :

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the position of the _lv_enable signal which needs to bememorized in the ROTCTL EPLD for the purpose of the test.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the 24 Volts level detection and compares both results.

CMD2 LV_ENABLE SIGNAL ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board LV_ENABLE signal Failure

Description74 LV_ENABLE 24V cross check

User Status : 1 _lv_enable fault2 _24V_ok fault3 _lv_enable and _24V_ok fault

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–80

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� See ON/OFF and Power supplies Bloc Diagram

� Check on MAINSPS Board :F1,F2,F3

Check the five Low Voltage fuses on CMD1 : F1, F2, F3, F4, F5

�

� Check on MAINPS the following connections :– Between MAINPS (XJ3) and Auto–Transformer– Between MAINPS (XJ4) and LV POWER SUPPLIES LV1 and LV2

� Check on CMD1 the following connections :– Between CMD1 (XJ5) and LV POWER SUPPLIES LV1 and LV2

� Check on CMD2 the following connections :– Between CMD2 (XJ5) and CMD1 (XJ1)– Between CMD2 (XJ4) and PU_CTRL_CPU (J19)

� Using a multimeter, check on CMD2 the following voltages :

Voltage Test Point Conclusion

+ 15 Volts P15V If one of these three is failing,– 15 Volts M15V Change LV1 Power Supply 15V.

+ 5 Volts P5V

+ 24 Volts P24V If this one is failing, change LV2 Power Supply 24V.

� Action :


74 001 CMD2 or Power Supplies faulty. If fuse and Power Supplieschecks made, replace CMD2 board.

002 CMD2 faulty. Replace CMD2 board.

003 If fuse check made, LV2 Power Supply 24V faulty. ReplaceLV2 Power Supply 24V.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–81

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–82

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETY

REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

KV STATUS

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FILTER

FUSES

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

LV_ENABLECONTROL

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

IGBT COMMANDS


mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

CPU

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRL

CMD2MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+–

+ –

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U4–U5U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U36

U19

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47U17

U18

X8–X9U48U49

PU_CTRL

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

DCPS FUNCTION : DC Level Network Test

NEWCCT DC1

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

NETWORK LEVEL

È

NETWORK LEVEL

PU_CTRL

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

CMDS +STAT

CMD1.BOARD

U29

U37U38

U26

U17

U58Q10–>Q21

U45

U6–U7

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

U8–U9

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ DIAG CODES

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–83

Error 85

MPH DC FILTER

CMD1 DC Level Network test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC_PS Command Buffers passed OK.– DC_PS Read Buffers passed OK.

The purpose of this test is to verify that CMD1.BOARD distributes the network level information to CMD2.BOARD andPU_CTRL_CPU.BOARD.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to modify, from the PU_CTRL_CPU, the CMD1 DC bus level read cctswith known levels.One transition occurs for each of the 3 signals sequentially, so as to test completely the corresponding logic. Thelevels are coded on 2 bits DC_BUS_MEAS_0 and DC_BUS_MEAS_1.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sets diagnostics bits to indicate test status.

� PU_CTRL_CPU reset the safety signal DC_BUS_FAULT

� PU_CTRL_CPU check status no.1 of the 4 signals DC_BUS_MEAS_0,DC_BUS_MEAS_1, DC_BUS_FAULT, ON_ENABLE.

� PU_CTRL_CPU wait a calibrated delay and checks the status no.2 of the 4 signals.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then resets the corresponding diagnostics bits and the safety signal..

Signal Status 1 Status 2

DC_BUS_MEAS_0 1 0

DC_BUS_MEAS_1 1 0

dc_bus_fault 0 1

on_enable 1 0

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–84

CMD1 DC LEVEL NETWORK ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board DC Level Network Failure

Description85 dc_bus measurement error

User Status : 1 first status failureUser Status : 2 second status failureActual Data : XYZT *Expected Data : XYZT *

* X = ON_ENABLE status; Y = DC_BUS_FAULT status; Z = DC_BUS_MEAS_1 status; T = DC_BUS_MEAS_0status (effective value 0 or 1 )

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on CMD1 the following connections :– Between CMD1 (XJ2) and PU_CTRL_CPU (J22)– Between CMD1 (XJ23) and PU_CTRL_CPU (J23)

� Action :



DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–85

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–86

LV POWERSUPPLY

ISOLATION

TRANSFORMERS

3 PHASE

REBUILD AND

COMPARISON

POWER ON

RELAYS

RECTIFIER

& FILTER

DC FILTER DISCHARGE

ISOLATED 220 Vac

220 Vac

115 Vac

ON COMMANDS

CASING COOLING ROTCTL

CT1

CT2

CMD1

CMD1

CMD1

CMD1

DC Filter

AU

TO

TR

AN

SF

OR

ME

R

LV POWERSUPPLIES

T1–T2 U3–U12

U13–C24–C25

X1–X2–X3

DCPS FUNCTION : DC Level Detection Test

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ENCODED MEASURE

SAFETY RANGE

CMD1

DC VOLTAGE

MEASUREMENT

MAINPS.BOARD

U11–Q1

U1–U4–U9–U10

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–87

Error 86, 87

MPH DC FILTER

MAINPS DC Level Detection test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC_PS Command Buffers passed OK.– DC_PS Read Buffers passed OK.– CMD1 DC Level network passed OK.

The purpose of this test is to verify that it is possible to simulate a voltage level on MAINPS.BOARD and read it back throughCMD1.BOARD and PU_CTRL_CPU.BOARD.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to modify, from the PU_CTRL_CPU, the DC level detected on MAINPS.BOARD byreplacing the DC voltage measure by a known reference on the measure cct, and read the equivalent level on the CPU.


� PU_CTRL_CPU checks if the DC_BUS is OFF else it drives it OFF

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets diagnostic bits which effect is to drive through CMD1.BOARD atMAINPS.BOARD a voltage change in place of the normal measure, so as to detect a levelequivalent to 700 V.

� PU_CTRL_CPU verifies that the 4 signals : DC_BUS_MEAS_0, DC_BUS_MEAS_1,DC_BUS_FAULT, ON_ENABLE signify this 700V level : status 1 .

� After this CPU releases its diag command and checks that the level returns to its originalvalue : status 2.

Signal Status 1 Status 2

DC_BUS_MEAS_0 1 0

DC_BUS_MEAS_1 1 0

dc_bus_fault 0 1

on_enable 0 1

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–88

MAINPS DC LEVEL DETECTION ERROR CODES

Error MPH MAINPS Board DC Level Detection Failure


User Status : 1 DC_BUS_FAULT incompatible with ON_ENABLE 2 DC_BUS remains ON after the OFF command

87 MAIN DC measurement errorUser Status : 1 first status failureUser Status : 2 second status failureActual Data : XYZT *Expected Data : XYZT *

* X = ON_ENABLE status; Y = DC_BUS_FAULT status; Z = DC_BUS_MEAS_1 status; T = DC_BUS_MEAS_0status (effective value 0 or 1 )

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on MAINPS the following connections :– Between MAINPS (XJ5) and CMD1 (XJ5)

� Action :


86 0001 MAINPS faulty. Replace MAINPS board.

0002 No conclusion. pre–req. not acheived.

87 Any MAINPS faulty. Replace MAINPS board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–89

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–90

CT

2

SU

PP

LY N

ET

WO

RK

CT2

INVERT

ROTCTL

HEATER

MAINPS

240 Vdc – 370 Vdc± ±

240 Vdc – 370 Vdc± ±

240 Vdc – 370 Vdc± ±

D1–D2–D3–L1–C1–C2–C3

R2

R7–R8–R9–R10–R11–R12

DC Filter FUNCTION: DC Level Measure Test


ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ


ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

380 Vac – 480 Vac

CAPACITOR

DISCHARGE

FILTER

AC / DC

DC VOLTAGE

MEASUREMENT

DC_PS.BOARD

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–91

Error 88, 89, 90

MPH DC FILTER

DC_FILTER DC level measure test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC_PS Command Buffers passed OK.– DC_PS Read Buffers passed OK.– CMD1 DC Level network passed OK.– MAINPS DC Level detection passed OK.

The purpose of this test is to check the DC voltage generated by DC_FILTER.BOARD and measured by MAINPS.BOARD.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to close the main contactor of the generator and check the level change from the measure-ment path from DC_FILTER.BOARD, MAINPS.BOARD, CMD1.BOARD to PU_CTRL_CPU.BOARD.


� If necessary, the PU_CTRL_CPU commands the closure of the main contactor by settingthe DC_ON command on CMD1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks that the DC level is in the safe range, as indicated by theDC_BUS_FAULT and ON_ENABLE signal and that one of the 2 DC_BUS_MEASsignals at least is at 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then opens the main contactor and checks after around five seconds thatthe voltage level is under 400 Volts : DC_BUS_FAULT is 1 and DC_BUS_MEAS bothat 0.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then checks after 20 seconds that the DC level is under 30 Volts, beforeleaving the test: DC_BUS_MEAS both at 0 DC_BUS_FAULT and ON_ENABLE at 1.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–92

DC_FILTER DC LEVEL MEASURE ERROR CODES

Error MPH DC_FILTER Board DC Level Measure Failure

Description88 DC_BUS error DC_BUS_FAULT incompatible with ON_ENABLE

89 DC_BUS level measure errorUser Status : 1 initial level error 2 slope error status 2

3 slope error status 3 For user_status 2 and 3 only : Actual Data : XYZT *

Expected Data : XYZT *

90 DC_BUS not ON after the ON command

* X = ON_ENABLE STATUS; Y = DC_BUS_FAULT status; Z = DC_BUS_MEAS_1 status; T =DC_BUS_MEAS_0 status (effective value 0 or 1)

RECOMMENDED ACTION


Check on DC_FILTER the following fuses : F1, F2, F3, F4, F5

� Check on DC_FILTER the following connections :– Between DC_FILTER (XJ2) and MAINPS (XJ6)– Between DC_FILTER (XJ3) and CT2 contactor (Auxiliary)

� Action :



89 001 DC_FILTER or CT2 faulty, or line input voltage out of range:Chedk Incoming power to contactor and DC filter.

002 DC_FILTER or CT2 contactor faulty.

003

90 – If led DS1 on DC_FILTER board is OFF, check fuses F1, F2and F3:If OK, check CT2 contactor ONIf OK change DC_FILTER board.

If led DS1 on DC_FILTER board is ON, check fuses F4 and F5:If F4 is blown, check Rotor Control boardIf F5 is blown, check Heater board

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–93

Error 101

MPH TUBE SELECTION

CMD2 Tube Selection test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– Tube Sel. Command Buffers passed OK.– Tube Sel. Read Buffers passed OK.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to send the three tube change commands to CMD2.BOARD and to readback the informa-tion as the NAND function of the commands.


� PU_CTRL_CPU resets the CMD_DIAG bit.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the three tube change commands

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks that _HEAT_CUR_OKD is active.

� PU_CTRL_CPU desactivate then activate each of the three commands and checks that_HEAT_CUR_OKD status change.

CMD2 TUBE SELECTION ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board Tube Selection Failure

Description101 Signal _HEAT_CUR_OKD status error

User Status : 1 _HEAT_CUR_OKD not active2 _HEAT_CUR_OKD active3 Initial status error (with the three tube commands set)10h signal active after reset T2_SEL_START (2 other commands set)20h signal active after reset T2_SEL_HEAT (2 other commands set)30h signal active after reset HV_SWITCH_CTRL (2 other

commands set)

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :



DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–94

115 Vac

HS RELAY CMD

HS RELAY RETURN

IGBT CMDS

ROTOR CONTROLLER

INVERTER

WITH 6 IGBT’S

2 PHASE

MEASUREMENT

OVER CURRENT

COMMON MEASURE

COOLING CMD

OIL PUMP OR BLOWER

HIGH SPEED

RELAY AND

CAPACITORS

ROTOR TUBE

SELECTION

MAINPS

DC_PS

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CASING

CASING

Nb 2

Nb 1

240 Vdc – 370 Vdc± ±

Q1–Q2–Q3–Q4–Q5–Q6

X5

X2

X1

T7–T8 T9

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

_T2_SEL_START

_STAT_START_T2

TUBE SEL FUNCTION : Tube Stator Selection Test

ROTCTL.BOARD

T1–T2–T3–T4–T5–T6

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–95

Error 102

MPH TUBE SELECTION

ROTCL Tube Stator Selection test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– Tube Sel. Command Buffers passed OK.– Tube Sel. Read Buffers passed OK.– CMD2 Tube Selection passed OK.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to drive the tube selection relay of ROTCTL.BOARD from the CPU, and check the swit-ched position indicated by the auxiliary contact of the relay.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a Rotor tube selection command to switch the stator driver to tube 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the corresponding return, indicating that ROTCTL.BOARD isin the position to drive tube 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a Rotor tube selection command to switch the stator driver totube 2.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the corresponding return, indicating that ROTCTL.BOARD isin the position to drive tube 2.

ROTCL TUBE STATOR SELECTION ERROR CODES

Error MPH ROTCL Board Tube Stator Selection Failure

Description102 Rotor switch selection faulty

User Status : 1 rotor tube1 selection error2 rotor tube2 selection error

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on ROTCTL the following connections :– Between ROTCTL (XJ1) and CMD2 (XJ2)

� Action :


102 Any ROTCTL faulty. Replace ROTCTL board.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–96

XS CURRENT

MEASUREMENT

XL CURRENT

MEASUREMENT

HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBT’S

SMALL FOCUS

LARGE FOCUS

TUBE SELECTION

TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

HV SWITCH

COMMAND

AND STATUS

XS IGBT CMDS

XL IGBT CMDS HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBT’S

HEATER XS

TUBE SELECTION

HEATER XL

TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

HV TANK

HV TANK

HV TANK


T201–T202

T203

T101–T102

T103

Q201–Q202–C205

Q101–Q102–C105

X301

X301

X302

TUBE SEL FUNCTION : Heater Tube Selection Test

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ


ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

TUBE SEL RETURN

HEATER TUBE SEL

HEATER.BOARD

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–97

Error 103

MPH TUBE SELECTION

HEATER Heater Tube Selection test

TEST DESCRIPTION


Purpose : The principle of the test is to drive the tube selection relay of HEATER.BOARD from the CPU, and check the swit-ched position indicated by the auxiliary contact of the relay.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a Heater tube selection command to switch the filaments driversto tube 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the corresponding return, indicating that HEATER.BOARD isin the position to drive both filaments of tube 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a Heater tube selection command to switch the filaments driversto tube 2.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the corresponding return, indicating that HEATER.BOARD isin the position to drive both filaments of tube 2.

HEATER HEATER TUBE SELECTION ERROR CODES

Error MPH HEATER Board Heater Tube Selection Failure

Description103 Heater switch selection error

User Status : 1 heater tube1 selection error2 heater tube2 selection error

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on HEATER the following connections :– Between HEATER (XJ1) and CMD2 (XJ1)

� Action :


103 Any HEATER board faulty. Replace HEATER board.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–98

XS CURRENT

MEASUREMENT

XL CURRENT

MEASUREMENT

HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBT’S

SMALL FOCUS

LARGE FOCUS

TUBE SELECTION

TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

HV SWITCH

COMMAND

AND STATUS

HEATER TUBE SEL

TUBE SEL RETURN

XS IGBT CMDS

LF IGBT CMDS HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBT’S

HEATER XS

TUBE SELECTION

HEATER XL

TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

HV TANK

HV TANK

HV TANK


T201–T202

T203

T101–T102

T103

Q201–Q202–C205

Q101–Q102–C105

X301

X301

X302

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

TUBE SEL FUNCTION : HV Switch Command Test

HEATER.BOARD

_HV_SWITCH_CTRL

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–99

Error 104

MPH TUBE SELECTION

HEATER HV Switch Command test

TEST DESCRIPTION


Purpose : The principle of the test is to drive the HV SWITCH command relay on the HEATER.BOARD from the CPU, andcheck the switched position indicated by the auxiliary contact of the relay.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a HV Switch motor command to CMD2.BOARD (henceHEATER.BOARD).

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the corresponding return of the auxiliary contact of the relay,thus indicating that 24 Volts is applied to the motor. This operation puts the HV Switchin an unindentified position as regard to the tube selection.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then stops driving the HV Switch motor, and checks that the relay isagain in its original position.

HEATER HV SWITCH COMMAND ERROR CODES

Error MPH HEATER Board HV Switch Command Failure

Description104 HV switch motor command faulty

User Status : 1 signal _HV_SW_MOTOR_OFF not active2 signal _HV_SW_MOTOR_OFF active3 _HV_SW_MOTOR_OFF initial status error

RECOMMENDED ACTION ERROR 25


� Check on HEATER the following connections :– Between HEATER (XJ1) and CMD2 (XJ1)

� Action :


104 Any HEATER board faulty. Replace HEATER board.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–100

XL XS

TRANSFORMERSTUBE 1

XL XS

TRANSFORMERS

TUBE 2

HIGH

VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMER

ANODE

mA MEASURE

CATHODE

mA MEASURE

kV +

MEASURE

kV –

MEASURE

HV SWITCH

KV +

KV –

KV +

KV –

HEATER

HEATER

INVERT

TUBE 1

TUBE 1

TUBE 2

TUBE 2

CMD1

CMD1

CMD1

HEATER

HEATER

CMD1

kV +

kV –

TUBE SEL FUNCTION : HV Switch Motor Test


ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

SWITCH CMD

SWITCH STATUS

HV TANK

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–101

Error 105, 106

MPH TUBE SELECTION

HV TANK HV Switch Motor test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– Tube Sel. Command Buffers passed OK.– Tube Sel. Read Buffers passed OK.– CMD2 Tube Selection passed OK.– HEATER HV Switch Command passed OK

Purpose : This test aims to drive the HV Switch like normal application, by changing from one tube to another, and check thecorresponding returns. The control of the HV Switch inside the tank involves several signals. One of these drives a motor whichinduces a translation of the isolator. This one bears three contacts : two bold contacts indicating the switch orientation towardsone tube or the other, and an accurate contact which indicates that a tube is actually connected to the tank.

Test type : No manual interaction. No LOOP–ON.

Sequence :

� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a HV Switch motor command to CMD2.BOARD (henceHEATER.BOARD), waits for the tank to be connected to tube 1, and stops the motorcommand.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks both the bold position signal and the index (accurate) signal,indicating that the tank is well engaged to tube 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a HV Switch motor command to CMD2.BOARD (henceHEATER.BOARD), waits for the tank to be connected to tube 2, and stops the motorcommand.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks both the bold position signal and the index (accurate) signal,indicating that the tank is well engaged to tube 2.

HV TANK HV SWITCH MOTOR ERROR CODES

Error MPH HV TANK HV Switch Motor Failure

Description105 HV switch motor error

106 Tube selection errorUser Status : 1 tube1 selection error

2 tube2 selection error

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on HV TANK the following connections :– Between HV TANK (XJ1) and HEATER (XJ4)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–102

� Action :


105 Any Pre–requisites not achieved. Run the corresponding diagnos-tics again.

106 Any If no noise from motor tube switch, motor faulty. Else HVTANK faulty.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–103

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–104

KV FUNCTION : KV TEST Relay Test

CMD1.BOARD

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETY

REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

KV STATUS

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FILTER

FUSES

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

LV_ENABLECONTROL

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

IGBT COMMANDS


NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL_CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRL

CMD2MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+–

+ –

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U58

U36

U19

U29

U37

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47U17

U18

X8–X9U48U49

PU_CTRL

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

CMDS +STAT

U38

U26

U17

Q10–>Q21

U45

U4–U5

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ È ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–105

Error 117, 118

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 KV TEST Relay test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– KV cmd. Command Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. Read Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. A/D converter passed OK.– KV.cmd. Meas. function passed OK.– KV cmd. D/A converter passed OK.– KV cmd. EXP ENABLE passed OK.– KV cmd. Exposure Managt passed OK.

Purpose : The aim of this test is to order the switch of the kV test relays from CPU.BOARD and check the returns. There istwo types of returns : the first one is one of the contacts of the relay, the second one is the kV reference which replacesthe kV measure when the relay is in test position.


Sequence :

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets kV REF to 80 kV.

� PU_CTRL_CPU resets the kV peak measurement

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets TEST kV+ and TEST kV– to 1 and checks the corresponding statusreturn bit and kV measure return as being in the range [76 kV, 84 kV].

� PU_CTRL_CPU resets the kV peak measurement.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets TEST kV– to 0 and checks the corresponding status return bit andkV measure return as being in the range [38 kV, 42 kV].

CMD1 KV TEST RELAY ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board KV TEST Relay Failure

Description117 kV switch status error

User Status : 1 kV+ switch error2 kV– switch error3 kV+ switch init error4 kV– switch init error

118 kV meas out of rangeUser Status : 1 kV measure out off high range (80kV)

2 kV measure out of middle range (40 kV) 3 kV measure > kv_min with kv_ref = 010 ADC conversion error.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–106

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :

Hardware Status User Status Conclusion


118 Any except 0010

118 0010 Pre–requisites not achieved. Run the corresponding diagnos-tics again.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–107

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–108

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FUSES

FILTER

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL_CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRL

CMD2MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+ –

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q12

U36

U19

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47U17

U18

X8–X9U48U49

PU_CTRL

KV FUNCTION : Current Meas & IGBT FPS Test

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

–+INVERTER CURRENT

MEASURE

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

KV STATUS

IGBT COMMANDS

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ


ÈÈÈÈÈ

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETY LV_ENABLECONTROL

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

CMDS +STAT

CMD1.BOARD

U29

U37U38

U26

U17

U58Q10–>Q21

U45U35

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–109

Error 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125Error 317

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 Current Meas & IGBT FPS test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– KV cmd. Command Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. Read Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. A/D converter passed OK.– KV.cmd. Meas. function passed OK.– KV cmd. D/A converter passed OK.– KV cmd. EXP ENABLE passed OK.– KV cmd. Exposure Managt passed OK.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to generate through the IGBT commands a ramp function in place of the inverter currentmeasure. This ramp function triggers the zero current detection and the max current safety. At the same time, theFloating Power Supply (FPS) commands are not looped back on CMD1.BOARD, this creating an error detected bythe EPLD and indicated to the CPU.

Test type : Manual interaction required. LOOP–ON allowed.The operator must press the EXPOSURE_ENA button.

Sequence :

� PU_CTRL_CPU verifies that DC BUS is OFF and drives it OFF if necessary

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the CMD_DIAG bits to validate the faults.

� PU_CTRL_CPU reset safeties

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks that the _KV_OKD signal is ready to be activated.

� PU_CTRL_CPU ask ROOM_IF_CPU to start exp_cmd test

� ROOM_IF_CPU reads the ”RD_SALLE_1” register and check if ”_VRF_TEST” signalis on ’1’ level

� ROOM_IF_CPU enables exposure_command signal and ask operator to press exposureswitches.

� ROOM_IF_CPU checks exposure_enable and exposure_commands signals state(activated ) and enable exposure_command to be transmitted to PU_CTRL_CPU boardso a EXPOSURE_COMMAND signal is sent to CMD1 in order to start the exposure. A”No Radiation” signal is displayed at the console.

� EPLD COMMAND drives T22 IGBT command so as to generate a negative voltageramp function and trigger negative threshold of current measure and maximum currentsafety.

� EPLD COMMAND checks the timing of the zero current detection and the maximumcurrent safety and indicates the test result to the PU_CTRL_CPU.

� EPLD SAFETY detects the faults linked to the maximum current.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks exposure_command state and stops exposure

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the FPS_FAULT signal.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–110


� PU_CTRL_CPU ask ROOM_IF_CPU to start a new exposure

� EPLD drives T21 IGBT command so as to generate a positive voltage ramp function andtrigger positive threshold of current measure and maximum current safety.

� EPLD COMMAND checks the timing of the zero current detection and the maximumcurrent safety and indicates the test result to the CPU.

� PU_CTRL_CPU stops exposure

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the FPS_FAULT and _KV_OKD signals.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then resets the CMD_DIAG bit.

� PU_CTRL_CPU ask operator to release exposure switches.

� ROOM_IF_CPU checks exposure_enable and exposure_command signals state.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks exposure_enable and exposure_command signals state.

CMD1 CURRENT MEAS AND IGBT FPS ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board Current Meas & IGBT FPS Failure


User Status : 1 DC_BUS_FAULT incompatible with ON_ENABLE 2 DC_BUS remains ON after the OFF command

120 EXP_ENABLE status errorUser Status : 1 exposure_enable not set

2 exposure_enable not reset

121 EXP_CMND status errorUser Status : 1 exp_cmnd not set

2 exp_cmnd not reset

122 restarting safety errorUser Status : 1 RESTARTING_SAFETY initial status error

2 restarting safety interrupt not detected

123 _KV_OKD signal status errorUser Status : 1 _kV_OKD initial status error

2 _KV_OKD error

124 I_INV_MAX signal status errorUser Status : 1 unknown signal

2 kv_drop 3 kv_max4 ma_max6 regul_out 10 I_INV_MAX initial status error

For user_status from 1 to 6, the corresponding signal occurs instead of i_inv_max signal

125 FPS_FAULT signal status error

317 EXP_CMD or EXP_EN signal status error on ROOM_IF_CPU sideUser Status : 1 EXP_ENA not active

2 EXP_ENA remains active10 EXP_CMD not active20 EXP_CMD remains active

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–111

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :


119 Any Pre–requisites not achieved. Run the corresponding diagnos-ti i

120tics again.

121


123

124

125


DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–112

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

KV STATUS

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FUSES

FILTER

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

LV_ENABLECONTROL

KV TESTRELAYS

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

IGBT COMMANDS


NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL_CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTCPU

CMD2MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+–

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U36

U19

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47U17

U18

U48U49

PU_CTRL

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

CMDS +STAT

KV FUNCTION : KV Safeties Tets

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETY

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

+ –

È

ÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

CMD1.BOARD

U17

U29

U37U38

U26

X8–X9

U58Q10–>Q21

U45

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–113

Error 126, 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 kV Safeties test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– KV cmd. Command Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. Read Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. A/D converter passed OK.– KV.cmd. Meas. function passed OK.– KV cmd. D/A converter passed OK.

Purpose : The aim of this test is to check several safeties linked to the kV command function. The first safety checked here isdescribed as kV<kV0 fault : each polarity of the kV must be greater than 6 kV, 500 us after the beginning of the expo-sure. If not, a fault is generated. To test it, a 5kV equivalent measure is applied to each polarity. The second safetycontrols that during the exposure the kV error is not greater than 12 kV. To test it, a 13 kV reference is applied to eachpolarity, so as to generate a negative and a positive kV error to trigger the REGUL_OUT fault. The third fault testedhere is the kV_DROP detection, triggered by a steep drop of the kV measure. The length of the test allows to testthe hardware maximum exposure time which is equal to 10 s.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sets TEST KV+ to 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets KV reference to 14 kV and sets CMD_DIAG bits to validate thefaults.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a kV<kV0 status. PU_CTRL_CPU checks thecorresponding fault and releases the CMD_DIAG bits.

� PU_CTRL_CPU reset the safety.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets TEST KV– to 1 and the CMD_DIAG bits to validate the faults.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a kV<kV0 status. PU_CTRL_CPU checks that no faultoccurs and releases the CMD_DIAG bits.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets TEST KV+ to 0 and the CMD_DIAG bits to validate the faults.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a kV<kV0 status. PU_CTRL_CPU checks thecorresponding fault.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets kV reference to 30 kV and TEST kV+ to 1.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a REGUL_OUT fault.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the fault and resets it with CMD_DIAG bits.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets CMD_DIAG bits to validate the faults and TEST kV– to 0. Thisgenerates a kV error equivalent to +15 kV and produces a REGUL_OUT fault.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a REGUL_OUT fault.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the fault and resets it by releasing the CMD_DIAG bits.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets kV reference to 80 kVand the CMD_DIAG bits so that CMD1 EPLD starts its 10 s timer.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–114

� After few ms, PU_CTRL_CPU changes TEST kV+ to 0, which produces a steep drop ofthe kV measure.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a kV DROP fault which is acknowledged by thePU_CTRL_CPU.

� CMD1 restarts automatically the exposure after 4 ms and stops it after 10 s.� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the exposure_time_max fault after 12s and the corresponding

time.� PU_CTRL_CPU resets the CMD_DIAG bits to come back in the original position.

CMD1 KV SAFETIES ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board kV Safeties Failure

Description126 kV switch status error

User Status : 1 kV+ switch error2 kV– switch error

127 SAFETY errorUser Status : 1 SAFETY not set

2 SAFETY set128 kV safety, KV<KV0, error

User Status : 1 KV<KV0 not set2 KV<KV0 not reset3 KV<KV0 initial status error

129 kV safety, EXPOSURE_TIME_MAX, errorUser Status : 1 EXPOSURE_TIME_MAX not set

2 Exposure stop by EXPOSURE_TIME_MAX safety signal <10s

3 EXPOSURE_TIME_MAX initial status error130 RESTARTING_SAFETY error

User Status : 1 RESTARTING_SAFETY not set2 RESTARTING_SAFETY not reset

131 kV restarting safety, REGUL_OUT, errorUser Status : 1 REGUL_OUT not set with kV+ and kV– switches

2 REGUL_OUT not set with kV+ switch3 REGUL_OUT initial status error

132 kV restarting safety,KV_DROP, errorUser Status : 1 KV_DROP not set

2 KV_DROP not reset3 KV_DROP initial status error

RECOMMENDED ACTION� Check pre–requisites are completed (see above)

� Check on CMD1 the following connections :– Between CMD1 (XJ2) and PU_CTRL_CPU (J22)– Between CMD1 (XJ23) and PU_CTRL_CPU (23)

� Action :


Any Any CMD1 faulty. Replace CMD1 board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–115

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–116

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FUSES

FILTER

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE


NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL_CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRLCMD2

MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+

+–

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U36

U19

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47

U18

U48U49

PU_CTRL

CMDS +STAT

KV FUNCTION : kV Rise and Regulation Test

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ ÈÈ


ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETYIGBT COMMANDS

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

KV STATUS

X8–X9

–

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

+

–+

LV_ENABLECONTROL

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

CMD1.BOARD

ÈÈÈÈÈ

U29

U37U38

U26

U58Q10–>Q21

U45

U17

U17

U50U62

U17

U58

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–117

Error 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141Error 317

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 kV Rise and Regulation test

TEST DESCRIPTIONPre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.

– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– KV cmd. Command Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. Read Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. A/D converter passed OK.– KV.cmd. Meas. function passed OK.– KV cmd. D/A converter passed OK.– KV cmd. EXP ENABLE passed OK.– KV cmd. Exposure Managt passed OK.

Purpose : This test checks both regulation measurement systems, the impulse and linear regulation. Its principle is to replacethe kV measure by a signal created by a simulator, almost equivalent to what would be the response of the main inver-ter. The Floating Power Supplies commands generated in such conditions are looped back directly onCMD1.BOARD. This test gives the opportunity to check the rise of the kV waveform detected at each step 100 kVand 125 kV.

Test type : Manual interaction required. LOOP–ON allowed.The operator must press the EXPOSURE_ENA and EXPOSURE_CMD button.

Sequence :� PU_CTRL_CPU verifies that DC_BUS is OFF and drives it OFF if necessary

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets TEST KV+ and TEST KV– to 1 and KV REF to 40 kV.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets CMD_DIAG bits.


� CMD1 switches a relay in order to modify the received reference so as to create an erroron the kV measure.





� PU_CTRL_CPU checks exposure_enable and exposure_command states.

� EPLD COMMAND drives a mock–up inverter as standard application, thuscompensating the error on the kV measure.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the kV return as being in the range [38 kV, 42 kV] as well as ano safety signals from CMD1.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–118



� PU_CTRL_CPU checks kv>75%kvn activated.

� PU_CTRL_CPU stops exposure

� EPLD COMMAND drives a mock–up inverter as standard application, thuscompensating the error on the kV measure.

� EPLD SAFETY checks :– at 600 us that kV<100kV, kV<0.75 kVREF, kV<125kV.– at 1200 us that kV>100kV, kV>0.75 kVREF, kV>125kV.and indicates _KV_OKD to the PU_CTRL_CPU.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the kV return as being in the range [142 kV, 158 kV] as well asa no safety signals from CMD1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then resets CMD_DIAG bits, KV_REF value and the TEST kV+ andTEST kV– bits




CMD1 KV RISE AND REGULATION ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board kV Rise and Regulation Failure

Hardware Status Description133 DC_BUS error

User Status : 1 dc_bus_fault incompatible with on_enable 2 DC_BUS remains ON after the OFF command

134 kV switch status errorUser Status : 1 kV+ switch error

2 kV– switch error

135 EXP_ENABLE status errorUser Status : 1 exposure_enable not set

2 exposure_enable not reset



137 KV>75%KVN, errorUser Status : 1 KV>75%KVN not set during exposure

2 KV>75%KVN set out of exposure

138 kV meas out of rangeUser Status : 1 kV measure out off low range (40kV)

2 kV measure out of high range (150 kV) 10 ADC conversion error.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–119

139 kV safety, SAFETY, errorUser Status : 1 unknown signal

2 kv<kv0 occurs3 exposure_time_max occurs4 dc_bus_fault occurs5 fps_fault occurs6 lv_enable occurs7 line_drop occurs

140 res_safety_falling status errorUser Status : 1 unknown signal

2 kv_drop occurs3 kv_max occurs4 ma_max occurs5 i_inv_max occurs6 regul_out occurs7 kv_drop_an occurs8 kv_drop_cat occurs

141 status test, _KV_OKD, errorUser Status : 1 _KV_OKD not activated

2 _KV_OKD activated



RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :


133 Any Pre–requisites not achieved.

135

136

138 0010


137

138 0001 or 0002

139 Any

140

141

317 Any Pre–requisites not achieved. Run the corresponding diagnostics again.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–120

KV FUNCTION : kV Max Safety Test

CMD1.BOARD

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FUSES

FILTER

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

KV TESTRELAYS

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE


NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL_CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRL

CMD2MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+

+–

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U36

U19

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47

U18

U48U49

PU_CTRL

CMDS +STAT

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETYIGBT COMMANDS

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

KV STATUS

X8–X9

–

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ +

–+

LV_ENABLECONTROL

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

U29

U37U38

U26

U58Q10–>Q21

U45

U17U17

U50U62

U58

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

KV MAXKV<KV0

SAFETIES

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–121

Error 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147Error 317

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 kV MAX Safety test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– KV cmd. Command Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. Read Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. A/D converter passed OK.– KV.cmd. Meas. function passed OK.– KV cmd. D/A converter passed OK.– KV cmd. EXP ENABLE passed OK.– KV cmd. Exposure Managt passed OK.

Purpose : The purpose of the test is to check the max kV detection levels. The principle is to drive the simulator like the previoustest, but this time with one kV measure equal to zero. In this case, the simulator still tries to match the reference,increasing too much the polarity of the other measure, thus triggers the kV MAX fault.

Test type : Manual interaction required. LOOP–ON allowed.The operator must press the EXPOSURE_ENA button.

Sequence :� PU_CTRL_CPU verifies that DC_BUS is OFF and drives it OFF if necessary

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets KV REF to 85 kV and TEST kV+ to 1.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets CMD_DIAG bits.







� EPLD COMMAND drives a mock–up inverter as standard application, thuscompensating the error on the kV measure, in order to match the 85kV reference.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a kV MAX fault.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the fault and stops the exposure

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets TEST kV– to 1 and TEST kV+ to 0.


DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–122

� EPLD COMMAND drives a mock–up inverter as standard application, thuscompensating the error on the kV measure, in order to match the 85 kV reference.

� EPLD SAFETY sends back a kV MAX fault.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the fault and stops the exposure.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then resets TEST kV– to 0 and CMD_DIAG bits.




CMD1 KV MAX SAFETY ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board kV MAX Safety Failure



143 kV switch status errorUser Status : 1 kV+ switch error

2 kV– switch error

144 EXP_ENABLE status error status errorUser Status : 1 exp_enable not set

2 exp_enable not reset



146 kV safety, RESTARTING_SAFETY, errorUser Status : 1 restarting_safety not set_step 1

2 restarting_safety initial status error3 restarting_safety not set_step 2

147 kV safety, KV_MAX, errorUser Status : 1 unknown signal

2 kv_drop occurs4 ma_max occurs5 i_inv_max occurs6 regul_out occurs7 kv_drop_an occurs8 kv_drop_cat occurs10 KV_MAX initial status error11 KV_MAX not reset

For user_status from 1 to 6, the corresponding signal occurs instead of kv_max signal



DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–123

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :


142 Any Pre–requisites not achieved. Run the corresponding diagnos-ti i

144tics again.

145


146

147


DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–124

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

DC_PS

CMD1 IGBT COMMANDSOPTIC

COUPLING

HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 4 IGBT’S

FLOATING

LOW VOLTAGE

POWER SUPPLY

INVERTER

CURRENT

MEASURE

CMD1

CMD1

CMD1

T11–T12–T21–T22

U11–U12–U21–U22

T1–T2

T3–R98

ÈÈÈ


ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

HV TANK



FLOAT. PS COMMANDS

FLOAT. PS RETURN

KV FUNCTION : Power Components Test

INVERT.BOARD

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

240 Vdc – 370 Vdc± ±

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–125

Error 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156Error 317

MPH KV COMMAND

INVERT Power Components tests

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– Tube Selection function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– KV cmd. Command Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. Read Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. A/D converter passed OK.– KV.cmd. Meas. function passed OK.– KV cmd. D/A converter passed OK.– KV cmd. EXP ENABLE passed OK.– KV cmd. Exposure Managt passed OK.– KV cmd. kV Test relays passed OK.– KV cmd. Current meas & IGBT FPS.– KV cmd. kV safeties.– KV cmd. kV rise and regulation.– KV cmd. kV Max safety.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to drive the main inverter of the MPH, loaded by an open circuit in the HV tank. The HVswitch is put in its middle position, so that the (cables + tubes) are isolated from the generator. This test allows tocheck the IGBT commands, the main inverter, the current measure, and the floating low voltage power supply.

Test type : Manual interaction required. No LOOP–ON.The operator must press the EXPOSURE_ENA button.

Sequence :

� PU_CTRL_CPU sends tube selection commands through CMD2 to put HV_SWITCHin middle position in order to isolate the cables and tubes from the HV_TANK.

� PU_CTRL_CPU commands the closure of the main contactor by setting the_POW_ON_CMD command on CMD1.

� In standby mode, CMD1.BOARD sends commands to the FPS and checks the return.PU_CTRL_CPU checks a no fault condition in this mode.






DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–126


� CMD1 drives the inverter as normal application to match the 40 kV reference.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks _kv_okd signal

� At the end of exposure, PU_CTRL_CPU checks a no fault condition from CMD1 andverifies that the measured kV are within the range [36 kV, 44 kV].



� PU_CTRL_CPU switches the main contactor OFF and checks after 20 seconds that theDC level is under 30 Volts, before leaving the test.

INVERT POWER COMPONENTS ERROR CODES

Error MPH INVERT Board Power Components Failure




150 HV switch tube status errorUser Status : 1 Time for tube switch > 2s.

2 One HV switch status remains set while middle position expected.

151 EXP_ENABLE status errorUser Status : 1 exp_enable not set




153 FPS_FAULT status error


2 kv<kv0 occurs4 dc_bus_fault occurs5 fps_fault occurs6 lv_enable occurs7 lmain_drop occurs


2 kv_drop occurs3 kv_max occurs4 ma_max occurs5 i_inv_max occurs6 regul_out occurs7 kv_drop_an occurs8 kv_drop_cat occurs

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–127

156 kV meas out of rangeUser Status : 1 kV measure out range (40kV)

2 _KV_OKD not active10 ADC conversion error.



RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on INVERT the following connections :– Between INVERT (XJ3) and CMD1 (XJ8)– Between INVERT (XJ1) and CMD1 (XJ6)– Between INVERT (XJ11) and CMD1 (XJ11)– Between INVERT (XJ11) and CMD1 (XJ11)– Between INVERT (XJ12) and CMD1 (XJ12)– Between INVERT (XJ21) and CMD1 (XJ21)– Between INVERT (XJ22) and CMD1 (XJ22)

� ��

Hardware Status User Status Conclusion (in order of decending probability)

148 Any Pre–requisites not achieved. Run the corresponding diagnos-ti i149 tics again.

150

151

152

153 Any INVERT Board faulty. Replace INVERT Board.

154 Any except 005 INVERT Board or HV Tank fault.

154 005 INVERT Board faulty. Replace INVERT Board.

155 Any except 002, 007, 008 INVERT Board or HV Tank fault.

155 002, 007 or 008 INVERT Board faulty. Replace INVERT Board.

156 001 INVERT Board or HV Tank fault.


156 002 INVERT or optical fiber Board faulty.


DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–128

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–129

Error 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165Error 317

MPH KV COMMAND

Final Cross check

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– Tube Selection function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– KV cmd. Command Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. Read Buffers passed OK.– KV cmd. A/D converter passed OK.– KV.cmd. Meas. function passed OK.– KV cmd. D/A converter passed OK.– KV cmd. EXP ENABLE passed OK.– KV cmd. Exposure Managt passed OK.– INVERT Power Components passed OK

Purpose : Run the whole kV function of the MPH including cables + tubes, on both tubes.Test type : Non Remote because of X rays generation. Manual interaction required. No LOOP–ON. The operator must press

the exposure switches button.Sequence :

Note: It is recommended to run the test with different kV values.


� The operator chooses via the console, the tube to which he wishes to apply the kVs, thevalue of these kVs, and the time of the exposure. The operator is asked whether thecorresponding HV TANK plugs are connected to either a tube or an adaptor.





� PU_CTRL_CPU checks exposure_enable and exposure_command states and sendEXP_CMD to CMD1 board so as to start the exposure.

� CMD1 drives the inverter as normal application to match the kV reference.

� At the end of the exposure, PU_CTRL_CPU checks a no fault condition from CMD1 andverifies that the measured kV are within the range [90% kV REF, 110% kV REF], thenstops the exposure.


DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–130


� The operator is then asked if he wishes a new exposure. If YES, the sequence returns tostep 2. If NOT, the sequence goes to the next step to end the test.


KV FINAL CROSS CHECK ERROR CODES

Error MPH KV Final Cross check Failure

Description

157 DC_BUS errorUser Status : 1 dc_bus_fault incompatible with on_enable



159 HV switch tube status error

160 EXP_ENABLE status errorUser Status : 1 exp_enable not set




162 KV>75%KVN, errorUser Status : 1 KV>75%KVN not set during exposure

2 KV>75%KVN set out of exposure

163 kV meas out of rangeUser Status : 1 kV measure out range (kV + – 10%)

2 kV remains > 9kV 10 ADC conversion error.


2 kv<kv0 occurs3 exposure_time_max occurs4 dc_bus_fault occurs5 fps_fault occurs6 lv_enable occurs7 main_drop occurs


2 kv_drop occurs3 kv_max occurs4 ma_max occurs5 i_inv_max occurs6 regul_out occurs 7 kv_drop_an occurs (ANODE SIDE)8 kv_drop_cat occurs (CATHODE SIDE)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–131



RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on HV TANK the following connections :– Between HV TANK and TUBE 1 : Anode and Cathode cables.– Between HV TANK and TUBE 2 : Anode and Cathode cables.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–132

� Action :

Hardware Status User Status Conclusion (in order of decending probability)


158

159

160

161

163 010

163 Any except 010 – If two tubes are connected and error appears on both tubes, HV TANKfaulty. Replace HV TANK.

162 Any except 002, 007,008

faulty. Replace HV TANK.–If only one tube,run TEST HIGH in Menu 1

Fill HV receptacles with oil164

008 Fill HV receptacles with oilIncrease kV value up to 150kV.If error 545 appears change HV

Tank.If no error ,HV cables or tube are faullty.Replace the HV cables165

Tank.If no error ,HV cables or tube are faullty.Replace the HV cablesor Tube.

165 002 Symmetric Spark over– If two tubes are connected and error appears on both tubes, HV TANKfaulty. Replace HV TANK.–If only one tube,run TEST HIGH in Menu 1

Fill HV receptacles with oilIncrease kV value up to 150kV.If error 545 appears change HV


165 007 ANODE Side Spark over– If two tubes are connected and error appears on both tubes, HV TANKfaulty. Replace HV TANK.–If only one tube,run TEST HIGH in Menu 1



165 008 CATHODE Side Spark over– If two tubes are connected and error appears on both tubes, HV TANKfaulty. Replace HV TANK.–If only one tube,run TEST HIGH in Menu 1




DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–133

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICSG

E M

edical System

sM

PH

50 V2 - M

PH

65 V2 - M

PH

80 V2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–134

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM

3 EPLD’S

COMMAND

REGULATION

SAFETY

REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

KV STATUS

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA MAX

SAFETY

mA RANGE

CHOICE

FILTER

FUSES

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

LV_ENABLECONTROL

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

IGBT COMMANDS


NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL_CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRLCMD2

MAINPS

MAINPS

>100K

V

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+–

+ –

U42–U43

U61

U22U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U58

U36

U19

U29

U37

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47U17

U18

X8–X9U48U49

PU_CTRL

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

CMDS +STAT

U38

U26

U17

Q10–>Q21

U45

U4–U5

CMD1.BOARD

mA LOOP FUNCTION : mA Measure Shunt Validation

È

ÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

mA MEASURE

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–135

Error 176, 177, 178

MPH MA MEASURE

CMD1 mA Measure Shunt validation

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– mA meas Command Buffers passed OK.– mA meas Read Buffers passed OK.– mA meas A/D converter passed OK.– mA meas Meas function passed OK.

The purpose of these tests is to check the different ranges available on CMD1 with given current references. These current referen-ces replace the actual measure through the measurement shunt.

Purpose : Check the scale of the mA measure with two current references through the measurement shunts. ThePU_CTRL_CPU sets the ranges one after the other and commands the current references directly. The value of thecorresponding mA is read back at the mA return towards the PU_CTRL_CPU.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the range bits (mA_x1, mA_x10) to (1,0) and checks thecorresponding returns.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the TEST_mA output to 1 and checks the corresponding return.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the 10mA_SCE_SEL output to 0 ( 100mA input selected ).

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the mA measure as being in the range [80 mA, 120 mA], hencea [0.40 V, 0.60 V] voltage range read by the ADC.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the range outputs (mA_x1, mA_x10) to (0,1) and checks thecorresponding returns.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the mA measure as being in the range [80 mA, 120 mA], hencea [4.0 V, 6.0 V] voltage range read by the ADC.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the 10mA_SCE_SEL output to 1 ( 10mA input selected ).

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the mA measure as being in the range [8.0 mA, 12.0 mA], hencea [0.40 V, 0.60 V] voltage range read by the ADC.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the range outputs (mA_x1, mA_x10) to (0,0) and checks thecorresponding returns.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the mA measure as being in the range [8.0 mA, 12.0 mA], hencea [4.0 V, 6.0 V] voltage range read by the ADC.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then resets in their original statuses the mA test and range bits.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–136

CMD1 MA MEASURE SHUNT ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD1 Board mA Measure Shunt Validation Failure

Description

176 TEST_mA relay is not in the right position during the test or at the end of the testUser Status : 1 TEST_mA relay failure when commanded ON

2 TEST_mA relay failure when commanded OFF

177 mA scale switches failure :User Status : 11 mA_X1 relay failure when commanded ON

12 mA_X1 relay failure when commanded OFF

21 mA_X10 relay failure when commanded ON22 mA_X10 relay failure when commanded OFF

178 mA measure out of rangeUser Status : 1 mA measure out of range on the large scale

actual data = mA measure in mVexpected data = mA value expected in mV 2 mA measure out of range on the medium scaleactual data = mA measure in mVexpected data = mA value expected in mV 3 mA measure out of range on the low scaleactual data = mA measure in mVexpected data = mA value expected in mV 10 ADC conversion error.

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Confirm MA link ST1A–ST1B

� Action :



177

178 0001, 0002 or 0003


DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–137

mA LOOP FUNCTION : mA Max Safety Test

CMD1.BOARD

kV TEST

KV REF

LV_ENABLEKV RISE

WAVEFORM REGULATION

SAFETY

IMPULSE

REGULATION

LINEARREGULATION

NETWORK LEVEL

TUBE

CURRENT

TEST

mA RANGE

CHOICEmA MEASURE

FILTER

FUSES

3 PHASE

DETECTION

ON / OFF

LOGIC


MAX CURRENT

SAFETY

LV_ENABLECONTROL

KV TESTRELAYS

KV MAX

KV<KV0

SAFETIES

KV DROPSAFETY

KV>75%

FLOATING

POWER SUPPLY

KV TEST STATUS

KV MEASURE

IGBT COMMANDS


NETWORK LEVEL

mA MEASURE + RETURN

LOW VOLTAGE PS

ON COMMANDS_SYS_ON

PU_CTRL

CMD2

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

MAINPS

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

LVSUPPLIES

MAINPS

CTRL_CONS

PU_CTRL

HVTANK

KV

RETURNPU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

INVERT

INVERT

INVERT

CMD2

PU_CTRL

HV TANK

INVERTPU_CTRLCMD2

MAINPS

MAINPS>

100KV

>125K

V

RIS

E D

MD

+–+

+–

+ –

U42–U43

U61

U33U51

Q3–X3–X4 U40

X1–X2

F1–F2–F3–F4–F5 U2–U3

U6–U7U20–U21X6–X10

U27

U28

Q22

U58

U36

U19

U29

U37

U52–U53–U56–U57

U59U60

U47U17

U18

X8–X9U48U49

PU_CTRL

EXPO COMMAND

EXPO ENABLE

CMDS +STAT

U38

U26

U17

Q10–>Q21

U45

U4–U5

PU_CTRL

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

È

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ STATUS

DIAG CODES

SAFETY

REGULATION

COMMAND

3 EPLD’S

mA MAX

SAFETY

U41

U22

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–138

Error 179, 180

MPH MA MEASURE

CMD1 mA MAX Safety test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– mA meas Command Buffers passed OK.– mA meas Read Buffers passed OK.– mA meas A/D converter passed OK.– mA meas Meas function passed OK.

Purpose : Check the level of the maximum tube current safety which corresponds to 1.12 AThe CPU replaces the current measure by a reference voltage so as to trigger the safety.


� The PU_CTRL_CPU sends a specific combination of CMD_DIAG bits to the CMD1board which enables the mA_MAX fault and which starts a voltage ramp at the input ofthe mA_MAX safety comparator.

� 1ms later, the software verifies that the mA_MAX and RESTARTING_SAFETY signalsare not active

� Then 5 ms later, the software checks the mA_MAX and RESTARTING_SAFETY faultsfrom CMD1 ( because mA > 1.12 Amps ).

� PU_CTRL_CPU then sends the NO_DIAG combination of CMD_DIAG bits to theCMD1 board to reset the faults and output the test.

CMD1 MA MAX SAFETY ERROR CODES

Error 39 MPH CMD1 Board mA MAX Safety Failure

Description179 RESTARTING_SAFETY signal error

User Status : 1 RESTARTING_SAFETY interrupt not set during the test2 RESTARTING_SAFETY signal initial status error

180 mA_MAX signal errorUser Status : 1 unknown safety instead of mA_MAX

2 KV_DROP set instead of mA_MAX3 KV_MAX set instead of mA_MAX5 I_INV_MAX set instead of mA_MAX6 REGUL_OUT set instead of mA_MAX7 KV_DROP_AN set instead of mA_MAX8 KV_DROP_CAT set instead of mA_MAX10 mA_MAX initial status error11 mA_MAX not reset at the end of the test12 mA_MAX not set during the test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–139




� Action :


Any Any CMD1 faulty. Replace CMD1 board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–140

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–141

HEATER

REFERENCE

NETWORKLEVEL

ROTCTL CLOCKS

RUN XL

MODE SEL

HEATER

XL CURRENT

REFERENCE

LV POWER

SUPPLY

FUNCTION

MAXIMUM

CURRENTLEVEL

XL IGBT CMDS

LV_ENABLE

MINIMUM

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

XL SHORT CCT

DETECTION

XL SQUARE

FUNCTION

HEATER XL

CURRENT

MEASURE24 V

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

CMD1

CMD1

CMD2STARTER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

CMD2STARTER

+ –

+

+

+

–

–

–

U23

U36–U38

U36–U38

U31

U29

U1U32

U2U34

U22

U20

U1–U6

U2

U8

U34

U32

U41–>U45 Q5

U21 U6–U21

U23 U8–U23

U1

U2

SELECTION

LV_ENABLE

XS CURRENT

XS SQUARE

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

XS IGBT CMDS

CMD2.BOARD

HEATER FUNCTION : XS Current Control Test

MODE SEL

RUN XS

EPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

LV_EN

CONTROL

MINIMUM

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

HEATER XS

CURRENT

MEASUREXS SHORT CCT

DETECTION

SAFETY

SAFETY

HEATER STATE

TUBE SWITCHCOMMAND

& STATE

U11

U7–U18

PU_CTRL ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ DIAG CODES

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–142

Error 191, 192, 193

MPH HEATER

CMD2 XS Current Control test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– Heater Command Buffers passed OK.– Heater Read Buffers passed OK.– Heater A/D converter passed OK.– Heater Meas. function passed OK.– Heater D/A converter passed OK.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to replace the heater inverter current measure by a voltage ramp function and check atknown times the change of the following signals : Zero XS current detection, minimum XS current detection, XSshort cct detection. The start of the ramp being triggered by the XS IGBT commands, the test checks these as well.


� PU_CTRL_CPU verifies that DC_BUS is OFF and drives it OFF if necessary

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XS current reference at 2 amps.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sends to heater EPLD test bits to initiate the test.

� EPLD drives XS IGBT commands so as to generate a positive voltage ramp function andchecks back whether zero XS current detection, minimum XS current detection and XSshort cct detection position correctly.

� EPLD drives XS IGBT commands so as to generate a negative voltage ramp function andchecks back whether zero XS current detection, minimum XS current detection and XSshort cct detection position correctly.

� CMD2 returns test status to PU_CTRL_CPU, indicating test passed / not passed.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks that HEATFAULT_XS has triggered at the end of the ramp

� PU_CTRL_CPU then resets the corresponding test bits,stops the function and resetsafety.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–143

CMD2 XS CURRENT CONTROL ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board XS Current Control Failure



192 HEATFAULT error :User Status : 1 Unable to set HEATFAULT_XS

2 Unable to reset HEATFALT_XS3 Bad initial state of HEATFAULT_XS

193 Test error : User Status : 1 Unable to set heat_cur_okd : one of the current control circuit

is not functioning properly.2 Unable to reset heat_cur_okd3 Bad initial state of heat_cur_okd

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :


191 Any Pre–requisites not achieved.


193

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–144

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–145

HEATER

XS CURRENT

REFERENCE

RUN XS

MODE SEL

NETWORKLEVEL

ROTCTL CLOCKS

HEATER

XL CURRENT

REFERENCE

LV POWER

SUPPLY

XS SHORT CCTDETECTION

XS SQUARE

FUNCTION

HEATER XS

CURRENT

MEASURE

MINIMUM

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

MAXIMUM

CURRENTLEVEL

XS IGBT CMDS

LV_ENABLE

XL SQUARE

FUNCTION

24 V

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

CMD1

CMD1

CMD2STARTER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

CMD2STARTER

+ –

+

+

+

–

–

–

U23

U36–U38

U36–U38

U31

U29

U1U32

U2U34

U22

U20

U1–U6

U2

U8

U34

U32

U41–>U45 Q5

U21 U6–U21

U23 U8–U23

U1

U2

HEATER FUNCTION : XL Current Control Test

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

HEATER STATEÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ XL IGBT CMDS

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

CMD2.BOARD

LV_ENABLE

RUN XL

MODE SEL

XL SHORT CCT

DETECTION

HEATER XL

CURRENT

MEASURE

MINIMUM

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

LV_EN

CONTROL

SELECTION

SAFETY

SAFETY

PU_CTRL

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

DIAG CODES

U5–U17

EPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

TUBE SWITCHCOMMAND

& STATE

U11

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–146

Error 194, 195, 196

MPH HEATER

CMD2 XL Current Control test

TEST DESCRIPTION


Purpose : The principle of the test is to replace the heater inverter current measure by a voltage ramp function and check atknown times the change of the following signals : Zero XL current detection, minimum XL current detection, XLshort cct detection. The start of the ramp being triggered by the XL IGBT commands, the test checks these as well.



� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XL current reference at 2 amps.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sends to heater EPLD test bits to initiate the test.

� EPLD drives XL IGBT commands so as to generate a positive voltage ramp function andchecks back whether zero XL current detection, minimum XL current detection and XLshort cct detection position correctly.

� EPLD drives XL IGBT commands so as to generate a negative voltage ramp function andchecks back whether zero XL current detection, minimum XL current detection and XLshort cct detection position correctly.

� CMD2 returns test status to CPU, indicating test passed / not passed.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks that HEATFAULT_XL has triggered at the end of the ramp


DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–147

CMD2 XL CURRENT CONTROL ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board XL Current Control Failure



195 HEATFAULT error :User Status : 1 Unable to set HEATFAULT_XL

2 Unable to reset HEATFALT_XL3 Bad initial state of HEATFAULT_XL

196 Test error :User Status : 1 Unable to set heat_cur_okd : one of the current control circuit

is not functioning properly.2 Unable to reset heat_cur_okd3 Bad initial state of heat_cur_okd

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :




196

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–148

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–149

NETWORKLEVEL

ROTCTL CLOCKS

RUN XL

MODE SEL

HEATER

XL CURRENT

REFERENCE

LV POWER

SUPPLY

XS SHORT DETECTION

MINIMUM

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

XL IGBT CMDS

LV_ENABLE

MINIMUM

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

XL SHORT

DETECTION

XL SQUARE

FUNCTION

HEATER XL

CURRENT

MEASURE24 V

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

CMD1

CMD1

CMD2STARTER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

CMD2STARTER

+ –

+

+

+

–

–

–

U33

U36–U38

U36–U38

U31

U29

U1U32

U2U34

U22

U20

U1–U6

U2

U8

U34

U32

U41–>U45 Q5

U21 U6–U21

U23 U8–U23

U1

U2

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

XS IGBT CMDS

HEATER STATE

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

HEATER FUNCTION : XS Regulation & Safety Test

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

CMD2.BOARD

LV_ENABLE

RUN XS

MODE SEL

HEATER

XS CURRENT

REFERENCE

XS SQUARE

FUNCTION

HEATER XS

CURRENT

MEASURE

LV_EN

CONTROL

MAXIMUM

CURRENTLEVEL

EPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

SAFETYÈÈÈÈ

SELECTION

SAFETY

U28–U18

PU_CTRL

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

DIAG CODES

TUBE SWITCHCOMMAND

& STATE

U11

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–150

Error 197, 198, 199, 200, 201

MPH HEATER

CMD2 XS Regulation & Safety test

TEST DESCRIPTION


Purpose : The principle of the test is to create on CMD2.BOARD a heater current return which is equivalent to the one normallyreturned by the Heater inverter board. This simulated current is directly driven by the EPLD XS state machinethrough the XS IGBT commands. This mock–up inverter allows testing of the XS current measure, the XS squarefunction, the XS current reference and the XS driving state machine. The levels of the current references correspondto the safety levels for the Small Focus. As the DC power is OFF, there is no heating on the filament so that this testcan last as long as necessary.



� PU_CTRL_CPU sends test bit to CMD2 to indicate test condition.

� PU_CTRL_CPU resets GE_TUBE (5.5A limitation)

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XS current reference at 2.2 amps and drives CMD2 heateras normal application in running mode.

� Heater EPLD drives low voltage mock–up inverter at required current.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks current measure return as being in the range (0.8 , 3) amps.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks heater is properly working (PRESENCE_XS, notHEATFAULT_XS, not OVERL_XS).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XS current reference at 3.2 amps in pre–heat mode andchecks heater fault indication (OVERL_XS).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XS current reference at 5.2 amps in running mode andchecks heater is properly working. (PRESENCE_XS, not HEATFAULT_XS, notOVERL_XS).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XS current reference at 6.2 amps in running mode andchecks heater fault indication. (OVERL_XS)

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XS current reference at 9.5 amps in boost mode and checksheater is properly working. (PRESENCE_XS, not HEATFAULT_XS, not OVERL_XS)an additional test is made to verify the boost safety backup time at 530ms.


DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–151

CMD2 XS REGULATION AND SAFETY ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board XS Regulation & Safety Failure



198 HEATFAULT error :User Status : 2 Unable to reset HEATFALT_XS

3 Bad initial state of HEATFAULT_XS

199 PRESENCE error : User Status : 1 Unable to set PRESENCE_XS

2 Unable to reset PRESENCE_XS3 Bad initial state of PRESENCE_XS

200 OVERFIL error : User Status : 1 Unable to set OVERL_XS

2 Unable to reset OVERL_XS3 Bad initial state of OVERL_XS4 Boost backup_time failure

201 measure error or ADC conversion errorUser Status : 0 Measurement error

Actual Data : measurement value made on XS_current feedback *Expected Data : expected value *

User_ Status : 1 ADC error

* 1 bit equal 1mA

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :




199

200

201 Any except 0001


DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–152

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–153

HEATER

XS CURRENT

REFERENCE

RUN XS

MODE SEL

NETWORKLEVEL

ROTCTL CLOCKS

LV POWER

SUPPLY

XS SHORT DETECTION

XS SQUARE

FUNCTION

HEATER XS

CURRENT

MEASURE

MINIMUM

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XS CURRENT

DETECTION

XS IGBT CMDS

LV_ENABLE

MINIMUM

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

ZERO

XL CURRENT

DETECTION

XL SHORT

DETECTION

24 V

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

CMD1

CMD1

CMD2STARTER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

HEATER

CMD2STARTER

+ –

+

+

–

–

–

U33

U36–U38

U36–U38

U31

U29

U1U32

U2U8

U22

U20

U1–U6

U2

U8

U34

U32

Q5

U21 U6–U21

U23 U8–U23

U1

U2

È


ÈÈ

HEATER STATEÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ XL IGBT CMDS

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ


ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

+

U41–>U45

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

HEATER FUNCTION : XL Regulation & Safety Test

CMD2.BOARD

LV_ENABLE

RUN XL

HEATER

MODE SEL

XL CURRENT

REFERENCE

EPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

LV_EN

CONTROL

XL SQUARE

FUNCTION

HEATER XL

CURRENT

MEASURE

MAXIMUM

CURRENTLEVEL

SAFETY

SAFETY

ÈÈÈÈÈ

SELECTION

U27–U17

PU_CTRL ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

DIAG CODES

TUBE SWITCHCOMMAND

& STATE

U11

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–154

Error 202, 203, 204, 205, 206

MPH HEATER

CMD2 XL Regulation & Safety test


– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– Heater Command Buffers passed OK.– Heater Read Buffers passed OK.– Heater A/D converter passed OK.– Heater Meas. function passed OK.– Heater D/A converter passed OK.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to create on CMD2.BOARD a heater current return which is equivalent to the one normallyreturned by the power board. This simulated current is directly driven by the EPLD XL state machine through theXL IGBT commands. This mock–up inverter allows testing of the XL current measure, the XL square function, theXL current reference and the XL driving state machine. The levels of the current references correspond to the safetylevels for the Large Focus. As the DC power is OFF, there is no heating on the filament so that this test can last aslong as necessary.



� PU_CTRL_CPU sends test bit to CMD2 to indicate test condition.

� PU_CTRL_CPU resets GE_TUBE (5.5A limitation)

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XL current reference at 2.2 amps and drives CMD2 heateras normal application in running mode.

� Heater EPLD drives low voltage mock–up inverter at required current.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks current measure return as being in the range (0.8, 3) amps.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks heater is properly working (PRESENCE_XL, notHEATFAULT_XL, not OVERL_XL).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XL current reference at 3.2 amps in pre–heat mode andchecks heater fault indication (OVERL_XL).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XL current reference at 5.2 amps in running mode andchecks heater is properly working. (PRESENCE_XL, not HEATFAULT_XL, notOVERL_XL).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XL current reference at 6.2 amps in running mode andchecks heater fault indication. (OVERL_XL)

� PU_CTRL_CPU set GE_TUBE( 7.1A limitation) and sets heater XL current referenceat 6.9 amps in running mode and checks heater is properly working. (PRESENCE_XL,not HEATFAULT_XL, not OVERL_XL).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XL current reference at 7.8 amps in running mode andchecks heater fault indication. (OVERL_XL)

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets heater XS current reference at 9.5 amps in boost mode and checksheater is properly working. (PRESENCE_XL, not HEATFAULT_XL, not OVERL_XL)an additional test is made to verify the boost safety backup time at 530ms.


DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–155

CMD2 XL REGULATION AND SAFETY ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board XL Regulation & Safety Failure



203 HEATFAULT error :User Status : 2 Unable to reset HEATFALT_XL

3 Bad initial state of HEATFAULT_XL

204 PRESENCE error : User Status : 1 Unable to set PRESENCE_XL

2 Unable to reset PRESENCE_XL3 Bad initial state of PRESENCE_XL

205 OVERFIL error : User Status : 1 Unable to set OVERL_XL

2 Unable to reset OVERL_XL3 Bad initial state of OVERL_XL4 Boost backup_time failure

206 measure error or ADC conversion errorUser Status : 0 Measurement error

Actual Data : measurement value made on XL_current feedback *Expected Data : expected value *

User_ Status : 1 ADC error

* 1 bit equal 1mA

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :




204

205

206 Any except 0001


DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–156

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–157

TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

HV SWITCH

COMMAND

AND STATUS

HEATER TUBE SEL

TUBE SEL RETURN

TUBE 1 CURRENT

TUBE 2 CURRENT

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2HV TANK


T203

T101–T102

T103

Q201–Q202–C205

Q101–Q102–C105

X301

X301

X302

HEATER FUNCTION : Final Cross Check

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ


ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

XS IGBT CMDST201–T202

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ


ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

XL IGBT CMDS

HV TANK

HV TANK

HEATER.BOARD

XS CURRENT

MEASUREMENT

XL CURRENT

MEASUREMENT

HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBT’S

SMALL FOCUS

HYPO RESONANT

INVERTER

WITH 2 IGBT’S

LARGE FOCUS

TUBE SELECTION

HEATER XS

TUBE SELECTION

HEATER XL

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–158

Error 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213

MPH HEATER

Final Cross check

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– Heater Command Buffers passed OK.– Heater Read Buffers passed OK.– Heater A/D converter passed OK.– Heater Meas. function passed OK.– Heater D/A converter passed OK.– CMD2 XS current control passed OK.– CMD2 XL current control passed OK.– CMD2 XS regul & safety passed OK.– CMD2 XL regul & safety passed OK.

The purpose of this test is to drive heater inverters in final configuration on both filaments and both tubes with power on in orderto identify a faulty inverter or a wrong connection between CMD2.BOARD, HEATER.BOARD, HV TANK and TUBES.

Purpose : The principle of the test is to realise a cross check by driving any available load. A truth table is issued when all theinformation is received. When the test is completed, the following functionalities have been checked : XS inverter, XL inverter,XS current measure, XL current measure, CMD2 to HEATER connection, HEATER to HV TANK connection.


Sequence :


� PU_CTRL_CPU ask operator the room configuration (Two tubes, tube1 only or tube2only).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the tube selection to tube 1 if connected (heater relay only) andchecks tube select return..

� PU_CTRL_CPU drives CMD2 heater XS and XL, both at 2.5 amps in running mode andchecks the current measures as being in the range [ 2.0, 3.0 ] Amps.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the tube selection to tube 2 if connected (heater relay only) andchecks tube select return..

� PU_CTRL_CPU drives CMD2 heater XS and XL, both at 2.5 amps in running mode andchecks the current measures as being in the range [ 2.0,3.0 ] Amps.


DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–159

HEATER FINAL CROSS CHECK CODES

Error MPH HEATER Board final Cross Failure



208 DC_BUS Not ON after the ON command error

209 Heater tube switch errorUser Status : 1 (tube 1 command) ,2 (tube2 command)

210 User Status : 00XX ** measurement errorActual Data : measurement value made *Expected Data : expected value *

User Status : 1 ADC error

211 presence signal errorUser Status : 00XX ** Actual address : 1: run error ; 2: reset error ; 3: initial error

212 0verl signal errorUser Status : 00XX **

Actual address : 1: run error ; 2: reset error ; 3: initial error

213 heatfault signal error User Status : 00XX **

Actual address : 1: run error ; 2: reset error ; 3: initial error

* 1 bit equal 1mA** 1A = XS tube 1 ; 1B = XL tube 1 ; 2A = XS tube 2 ; 2B = XL tube 2

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check on HEATER the following connections :– Between HEATER (XJ1) and CMD2 (XJ1)– Between HEATER (XJ3) and DC_FILTER (XJ5)

� Check on HV TANK the following connections :– Between HV TANK (XJ2) and HEATER (XJ2)– Between HV TANK and TUBE 1 : Cathode Cable tube 1– Between HV TANK and TUBE 2 : Cathode Cable tube 2

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–160

� Action :In case of only one tube, put the anode cable of the selected tube in the cathode plugof the other tube.



209

210 001

210211212213

01A and 02A HEATER faulty. Replace HEATER board

210211212213

01B and 02B HEATER faulty. Replace HEATER board

210211212213

01A only or01B only or02A only or

02B only

HEATER board working properly, check the correspondingfilament and the connection from HEATER board to that fila-ment. See Note1

210211212213

01A and 01B only or02A and 02B only or01A and 02B only or01B and 02A only

HEATER board working properly, check the correspondingfilament and the connection from HEATER board to that fila-ment. See Note1

210211212213

Any other set of results No conclusion. Confirm filament cabling for tube 1 or tube 2,depending on the result.See Note1

Note 1 : after heater board : check connection cables from heater board to HV tank , check filament transformer , check HV cables, check corresponding filaments **** 1A = XS tube 1 ; 1B = XL tube 1 ; 2A = XS tube 2 ; 2B = XL tube 2

RETURN HV CABLES TO ORIGINAL TUBE CONFIGURATION

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–161

NETWORK LEVEL

LV_EN

CONTROL

MAX CURRENT

LEVEL SAFETYCOMMON

MEASURE

LV POWER

SUPPLY

CONTROL

LV_ENABLE

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

CMD1

CMD1 CMD1

HEATERCMD2

ROTCTL

ROTCTL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

ROTOR FUNCTION : Cureent Control & HS Mode Test

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ


ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

È

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

RUN

SPEED SELECTION

BRAKE

ROTCTL STATE

CLOCKS

2 PHASEMEASURE

IGBT CMDSEPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

3 PHASE REBUILD

LEVEL DETECTION+

HIGH SPEED

RELAY COMMAND

U35

Q6

U3–U16–U15

U15

U12–U25–U26

U30–Q19–>Q22

CMD2.BOARD

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ DIAG COMMANDHEATERCMD2

U4


TUBE SELECTIONCOMMANDAND STATE

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ


PU_CTRL HS RELAY RETURN

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ U26

U11

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–162

Error 224, 225, 226, 227

MPH ROTOR CONTROLLER

CMD2 Current Control and HS Mode test

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Command Buffers passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Read Buffers passed OK.

Purpose : Drive the current return with the IGBT commands so as to simulate two phases of the normal rotor controller current.The third missing phase is created by the measurement system which is tested as well (this is the same method used as Applica-tions). At the same time, this test allows to check the high speed selection mode and the sequence of the EPLD state machine asregard to the change of mode.

Test type : No manual interaction. LOOP–ON allowed.

Sequence :


� PU_CTRL_CPU sets CMD_DIAG bits to indicate test status.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the speed selection to Low Speed and sends a Run command toCMD2 rotor controller EPLD in Acceleration mode.

� EPLD drives, through IGBT commands, the current return.

� EPLD checks the current detection after the three phase rebuild and indicates aROTOR_ON status to the PU_CTRL_CPU.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the ROTOR_ON status from CMD2 and changes theAcceleration mode to the Running mode

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the acknowledgement from CMD2 of the mode change andwaits for the new ROTOR_ON indication before setting a Brake mode.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the ROTOR OFF indication during the Brake mode and thenstops driving the Rotor Controller function.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the speed selection to High Speed and sends a Run command toCMD2 rotor controller EPLD in Acceleration mode.

� EPLD sets the High Speed relay command and checks the corresponding return whichis short circuited directly on CMD2.

� EPLD drives, through IGBT commands, the current return.

� EPLD checks the current detection after the three phase rebuild and indicates a ROTORON status to the PU_CTRL_CPU.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the ROTOR ON status from CMD2 and changes theAcceleration mode to the Running mode

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the acknowledgement from CMD2 of the mode change andwaits for the new ROTOR ON indication before setting a Brake mode.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the ROTOR OFF indication during the Brake mode and thenstops driving the Rotor Controller function.

� PU_CTRL_CPU resets the CMD_DIAG bits to come back in the original position.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–163

CMD2 CURRENT CONTROL AND HS MODE CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board Current Control and HS Mode Failure



225 Rotor safety error : START_OVLUser Status : 3 Signal initial status error

10h Signal activated in low speed acceleration mode11h Signal activated in the 200ms following low speed run mode12h Signal activated in low speed run mode13h Signal not reset after change from low speed run mode to low speed brake mode20h Signal activated in high speed acceleration mode21h Signal activated in the 200ms following high speed run mode22h Signal activated in high speed run mode23h Signal not reset after change from high speed run mode to highspeed brake mode

226 CUR_ST_ON errorUser Status : 3 Signal initial status error

10h Signal not activated in low speed acceleration mode11h Signal not reset after change from low speed acceleration

mode to low speed run mode12h Signal not activated in low speed run mode13h Signal not reset after change from low speed run mode to low speed brake mode20h Signal not activated in high speed acceleration mode21h Signal not reset after change from high speed acceleration

mode to high speed run mode22h Signal not activated in high speed run mode23h Signal not reset after change from high speed run mode to highspeed brake mode

227 High speed relay command errorUser Status : 3 Signal initial status error

10h Signal not activated in low speed acceleration mode11h Signal not activated in the 200ms following low speed run

mode12h Signal not activated in low speed run mode13h Signal not activated after change from low speed run mode to low speed brake mode20h Signal activated in high speed acceleration mode21h Signal activated in the 200ms following high speed run mode22h Signal activated in high speed run mode23h Signal not activated after change from high speed run mode to high speed brake mode24h Signal activated 200ms after rotor OFF command

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–164

RECOMMENDED ACTION



� Action :




226

227

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–165

ROTOR FUNCTION : Max Current Safety

NETWORK LEVEL

LV_EN

CONTROL

LV POWER

SUPPLY

CONTROL

LV_ENABLE

CMD1

CMD1 CMD1

HEATERCMD2

ROTCTL

ROTCTL

PU_CTRL

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ


ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ


ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

RUN

SPEED SELECTION

BRAKE

ROTCTL STATE

CLOCKS

2 PHASEMEASURE

IGBT CMDSEPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

3 PHASE REBUILD

LEVEL DETECTION+

HIGH SPEED

RELAY COMMAND

U35

Q6

U3–U16–U15

U15

U12–U25–U26

U30–Q19–>Q22

CMD2.BOARD

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

DIAG COMMANDHEATERCMD2

U4

ÈÈÈÈ


ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ


HS RELAY RETURN

ËËË

ËËË

ËËË

ËËË

NEW

CCT R2

È

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ


U26


ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ COMMON

MEASURE

ÈÈÈÈ MAX CURRENT

LEVEL SAFETY

U26

U11

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–166

Error 228, 229, 230, 231


CMD2 Max Current Safety test


– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Command Buffers passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Read Buffers passed OK.

Purpose : Set a reference voltage in place of the normal measurement shunt in order to trigger the Maximum current safety cct.Test type : No manual interaction. LOOP–ON allowed.Sequence :


� PU_CTRL_CPU sets same CMD_DIAG bits as in ROTOR 2.0 to indicate test status.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a Run command to CMD2 rotor controller EPLD and checks ano fault condition ( starter_overload ) from CMD2 Rotor Controller.

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets CMD_DIAG bits specific to this test to trigger the maximumcurrent fault on CMD2.

� EPLD checks the STARTER_OVERLOAD fault and indicates it back to thePU_CTRL_CPU.

� PU_CTRL_CPU checks the STARTER_OVERLOAD fault indication and stops the Runcommand.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then resets the CMD_DIAG bits and the maximum current fault driving bit.

CMD2 MAX CURRENT SAFETY ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board Max Current Safety Failure



229 Rotor safety error : START_OVLUser Status : 1 start_ovl active

2 start_ovl non activated3 Signal initial status error

230 CUR_ST_ON errorUser Status : 1 cur_st_on non activated

2 cur_st_on active3 Signal initial status error

231 High speed relay command speed errorUser Status : 1 _ls_rtn non active

2 _ls_rtn active3 Signal initial status error

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–167




� Action :




230

231

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–168

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–169

ROTOR FUNCTION : IGBT Drivers test

NETWORK LEVEL

LV_EN

CONTROL

MAX CURRENT

LEVEL SAFETYCOMMON

MEASURE

LV POWER

SUPPLY

CONTROL

LV_ENABLE

CMD1

CMD1 CMD1

HEATERCMD2

ROTCTL

ROTCTL

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ


ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ


ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

È

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

RUN

SPEED SELECTION

BRAKE

ROTCTL STATE

CLOCKS

2 PHASEMEASURE

IGBT CMDSEPLD

COMMANDS

AND

SAFETIES

3 PHASE REBUILD

LEVEL DETECTION+

HIGH SPEED

RELAY COMMAND

U35

Q6

U3–U16–U15

U15

U12–U25–U26

U30–Q19–>Q22

CMD2.BOARD

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

DIAG COMMANDHEATERCMD2

U4

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ


ÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ


HS RELAY RETURN

È

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ U26

U30–U13ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

U11

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

PU_CTRL

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–170



CMD2 IGBT Drivers test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Command Buffers passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Read Buffers passed OK.

Purpose : Drive all the Rotor Controller IGBT drivers in high speed mode and check if they are properly working.Test type : No manual interaction. Loop_on allowed.Sequence :


� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the CMD_DIAG bits indicate the test status.


� PU_CTRL_CPU sends a RUN command to CMD2 Rotor Controller EPLD.

� Rotor Controller EPLD sends IGBT commands to the drivers, checks the designedreturns and indicates _START_DRIV_OKD to the PU_CTRL_CPU.

CMD2 IGBT DRIVERS ERROR CODES

Error MPH CMD2 Board IGBT Drivers Failure

Description



233 START_DRIV_OKD status errorUser Status : 1 _start_driv_ok not activated

3 Signal initial status error

244 CUR_ST_ON errorUser Status : 1 cur_st_on non activated

3 Signal initial status error

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–171




� Action :




244

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–172

Blank page.

DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–173

115 Vac

ROTOR TUBE SEL

TUBE SEL RETURN

OVER CURRENT

COMMON MEASURE

COOLING CMD

OIL PUMP OR BLOWER

MAINPS

DC_PS

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CMD2

CASING

CASING

240 Vdc – 370 Vdc± ±

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

ÈÈ

Nb 2

Nb 1


ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈ

IGBT CMDS

HS RELAY CMD

HS RELAY RETURN

ÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ROTOR CONTROLLER

INVERTER

WITH 6 IGBT’S

HIGH SPEED

RELAY AND

CAPACITORS

ROTOR TUBE

SELECTION

2 PHASE

MEASUREMENT

Q1–Q2–Q3–Q4–Q5–Q6

X5

X2

X1

T7–T8 T9

ROTCTL.BOARD

ROTOR FUNCTION : Final Cross Check

T1–T2–T3–T4–T5–T6

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–174

Error 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239


Final Cross check

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.– DC Power Supply function passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Command Buffers passed OK.– Rotor ctrl Read Buffers passed OK.– CMD2 Current ctrl HS mode.– CMD2 Max current safety.– CMD2 IGBT drivers.

The purpose of these tests is to verify that the ROTCTL.BOARD actually receives the commands from CMD2 and drives correctlythe stators of the tubes.

Purpose : Check the Rotor Controller function on an overall basis, by driving both tubes stators. The aim is to get as many infor-mation as possible by a cross check so as to decide whether the ROTCTL board or the tube is faulty.



� PU_CTRL_CPU ask operator the room configuration (Two tubes, tube1 only or tube2only).

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the tube selection to tube 1 if connected.

� PU_CTRL_CPU drives the Rotor Controller function in High Speed with a normalAccelerating and Running sequence.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then accelerate the Rotor Controller to Low Speed, keeps Running andbrakes consequently down to 0 rpm.

� Wait rotor cooling

� PU_CTRL_CPU sets the tube selection to tube 2 if connected.

� PU_CTRL_CPU drives the Rotor Controller function in High Speed with a normalAccelerating and Running sequence.

� PU_CTRL_CPU then accelerate the Rotor Controller to Low Speed, keeps Running andbrakes consequently down to 0 rpm.


� Wait rotor cooling

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–175

FINAL CROSS CHECK ERROR CODES

Error MPH ROTOR Board final Cross check Failure

Description


2 DC_BUS remains ON after the OFF command235 DC_BUS not ON after the ON command236 Rotor tube switch error

User Status : 1 rotor tube1 switch error2 rotor tube 2 switch error

237 CUR_ST_ON errorUser Status :

tube 1 10h signal not active in high_speed_acceleration mode11h signal active after change to high_speed_run mode12h signal not active in high_speed_run mode13h signal active after change to

high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration mode14h signal not active in high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration

mode15h signal active after change to low_speed_run mode16h signal not active in low_speed_run mode17h signal active 30ms after low_speed_brake command mode18h signal active in low_speed_brake mode1Fh Signal initial status error

tube 2 20h signal not active in high_speed_acceleration mode21h signal active after change to high_speed_run mode22h signal not active in high_speed_run mode23h signal active after change to

high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration mode24h signal not active in high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration

mode25h signal active after change to low_speed_run mode26h signal not active in low_speed_run mode27h signal active 30ms after low_speed_brake command mode28h signal active in low_speed_brake mode2Fh Signal initial status error

238 High speed relay command error User Status :

tube 1 10h signal active in high_speed_acceleration mode11h signal active after change to high_speed_run mode12h signal active in high_speed_run mode14h signal not active in high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration

mode15h signal not active after change to low_speed_run mode16h signal not active in low_speed_run mode18h signal not active in low_speed_brake mode19h signal active in OFF mode1Fh Signal initial status error

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–176

tube 2 20h signal active in high_speed_acceleration mode21h signal active after change to high_speed_run mode22h signal active in high_speed_run mode24h signal not active in high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration

mode25h signal not active after change to low_speed_run mode26h signal not active in low_speed_run mode28h signal not active in low_speed_brake mode29h signal active in OFF mode2Fh Signal initial status error

239 Rotor safety error : START_OVLUser Status :

tube 1 10h signal active in high_speed_acceleration mode11h signal active after change to high_speed_run mode12h signal active in high_speed_run mode13h signal active after change to

high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration mode14h signal active in high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration

mode15h signal active after change to low_speed_run mode16h signal active in low_speed_run mode18h signal active in low_speed_brake mode1Fh Signal initial status error

tube 2 20h signal active in high_speed_acceleration mode21h signal active after change to high_speed_run mode22h signal active in high_speed_run mode23h signal active after change to

high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration mode24h signal active in high_speed_to_low_speed_acceleration

mode25h signal active after change to low_speed_run mode26h signal active in low_speed_run mode28h signal active in low_speed_brake mode2Fh Signal initial status error

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–177

RECOMMENDED ACTION ERROR


� Check on ROTCTL the following connections :– Between ROTCTL (XJ1) and CMD2 (XJ2)– Between ROTCTL (XJ4) and TUBE 1 Stator– Between ROTCTL (XJ5) and TUBE 2 Stator (If there is two tubes)

� Action :

If there is only one tube connected :



236


237 Any No conclusion : ROTCTL or connection or tube Statorf lt ( Bl Di )239 faulty.(see Bloc Diagram)

If there is two tubes connected :



236


237 01X and 02X

239

237 01X only ROTCTL OK. (Connection to tube 1) or (Tube 1 Stator)f lt ( Bl Di )239 faulty..(see Bloc Diagram)

237 02X only ROTCTL OK. (Connection to tube 2) or (Tube 2 Stator)f lt ( Bl Di )239 faulty..(see Bloc Diagram)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–178



CMD2 IGBT Drivers test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–179

SCC3

TAVConsole

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPIDriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAMCS2


I/O

I/O

I/ORS485Drivers

DECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardSwitches and LedsTest

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–180

Error 250


PU_CTRL_CPU Switches and LED’s test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – PU_CTRL_CPU Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK.– ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.

Purpose : Its purpose is to verify the reading of the switches position and the writing to the LED’s. The principle is to ask theoperator to position the switches, then to start running the test and verify visually that the code displayed on the LED’sis the same as the one written on the switches.As this test requires operator checking of the LED’s status it is an interactive test and it is asked to the operator todecide if the test passed or not.

Test type : It is an interactive test. LOOP–ON allowed.Sequence :The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) executes the following steps :Sequence :

– Ask the operator to move PRD’s switches, ”Select a switch code and press DONE or EXIT”.

– On DONE answer of the operator, PU_CTRL_CPU software copies switches combination on PRD’s leds.

– On EXIT answer of the operator, ask the operator to visualy check if leds and switches combinations are equal,”Was the value shown correct?”.

– If YES, display message ”Return switches in their original positionpress DONE to continue”

PU_CTRL_CPU SWITCHES AND LEDS ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board Switches and LED’s Failure

Description

250 The operator has seen an error on the PU_CTRL_CPU board and has answered : ”NO” .

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Action :


250 – PU_CTRL_CPU faulty. Replace PU_CTRL_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–181

SCC3

TAVConsole

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPIDriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAMCS2


I/O

I/O

I/ORS485Drivers

DECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardXilinx 1 ms InternalTimer Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–182

Error 256, 257


Xilinx 1ms internal timer test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – PU_CTRL_CPU Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK.

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to check software sequence 1ms timer. This test includes clock multiplexer, clock divisionand interrupt loopback with 68360.


Sequence : The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :– Check if the signal ”DONE” (port PB13 of 68360) is high (configuration complete) or low (no avaible configuration) : if”DONE” is high, the sofware can read the internal revision register and check if it is compatible with both software and hardwareconfiguration.– Select CLK_INT = CLK_TEST (software clock driver).– Enable 1ms timer : TIMER_ENABLE = active.– Enable 1ms timer interrupt– Generate 25000 software clock pulses (write CLK_TEST=’0’, CLK_TEST=’1’)– Check BUSY_LOOP interrupt (PC11 on 68360) activated only one time.– Restore initial configuration.

PU_CTRL_CPU COMMAND BUFFERS ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board Xilinx 1ms internal timer test

Description256 Xilinx configuration not completed.

257 Xilinx 1ms internal timer failure

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Action :


256 Any Xilinx or associated logic failure.Replace PU_CTRL_CPU

257 Any Xilinx or associated logic failureBUSY_LOOP signal error.Replace PU_CTRL_CPU

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–183

SCC3

TAVConsole

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

SCC2

SCC4 SMC2

SMC1

SRAMsave + clock

Bus 68360

CS0

CS6

RO

OM

_IF

_CP

U b

oard

UART UART

DAC ADC


68360

Flash Eeprom

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

Drivers

RS485

debug

CS3

PRD switches

PRD leds

EPLDOUTBUF

MUX

CHIP–SELECT

Bus I/O


DriversRS485

V/F

Adress decod


UART

HDLC

UART

UART

UART

SPIDriversRS485

CS5 CS4

DC–DC

–15V +15V

+5V

DC–DC

+5V

+12V Flash

SRAMCS2


I/O

I/O

I/ORS485Drivers

DECODBP Abort

Supply control

Timers

CS

CSCS

CS CS

CS

Input register

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

PortC

Background

XILINX

Input register

PU_CTRL_CPU boardRS 485 InterfaceDrivers Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–184

Error 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269


PU_CTRL_CPU Serial Interface Drivers Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to check RS485 interface drivers between Xilinx or 68360, and ROOM_IF_CPU board.For direct (no Xilinx interface) serial links (SCC2, SCC3, SCC4, SMC1 & SMC2), outputs are connected to inputs.For Xilinx interfaced inputs (EXT_CUT_OFF, EXP_CMD, GRID_CMD, BRIGHT_VID, BRIGHT_ION), a serialdata is injected on the input line. For Xilinx interfaced outputs (ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET, RESET_AEC, HV_ON),the output line states are simply read on a test register.

Note: For all input lines, there is no data contention when test is active because driver ofROOM_IF_CPU board are tri–stated by ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET line.For reasons of safety, it is not possible to force EXP_EN line by software. This line canonly be driven by a manual action of the operator.

Test type : No manual interactions if it succeeds.Sequence :The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :


– Save exposure and interrupt configuration.

– Disable exposure : VAL_EXP = ’0’.

– Enable ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET (drivers of ROOM_IF_CPU board are tri–stated).

– Check TEST_IF_CPU_RESET loopback.

– Test direct serial links (SCC2 : ROOM_IF_CPU, SCC3 : MADRID or GPX, SCC4 : TAV, SMC1 : APR, SMC2 :debug console) : send message and check the received message.

– Test other output drivers (RESET_AEC, HV_ON).

– Enable input loopback : REBOUCLAGE = ’1’.

– Test input drivers : RS_BIT_TEST is generate by loopback of SPI_CLK line (allow to check signalsBRIGHT_ION, BRIGHT_VID, GRID_CMD, XI_EXP_CMD, XI_EXT_CUT_OFF)

– Restore initial configuration.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–185

PU_CTRL_CPU SERIAL INTERFACE DRIVERS ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board Serial Interface Drivers Failure

Description258 ROOM serial communications error

259 PUP serial communications error

260 TAV serial communications error

261 APR serial communications error

262 DEBUG Terminal serial communications error

263 BRIGHT_ION signal error

264 BRIGHT_VID signal error

265 GRID_CMD signal error

266 EXP_CMD signal error

267 EXT_CUT_OFF signal error

268 TEST_IF_CPU_RESET signal error


RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Action :


258 – 269 Any PU_CTRL_CPU faulty, replace it.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–186

Error 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278Error 302, 303

See Error 48



DIAGNOSTICS

GE

Medical S

ystems

MP

H 50 V

2 - MP

H 65 V

2 - MP

H 80 V

2

RE

V 4

asm 2165118–100

4–187

PU_CTRL_CPU

ROOM_IF_CPU

II_SENSOR

II_SENSOR TEST

HDLC

FREQ_IPM

TEST_HVPM

HVPM_ASSIG

683028bits

DAC

V/F

IPM

HT

REGUL.

68360X2

B1

B5

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–188


MPH II_SENSOR BOARD

II_SENSOR HTPM test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK on both CPU.– ROOM_IF_CPU analogic test passed OK– PU_CTRL_CPU RS485 interface driver test passed OK

Purpose : This test checks ii_sensor board HTPM measurement. This signal is read on PU_CTRL_CPU board as a frequencyproportional to the current measured.

Test type : No manual interactions.Sequence :The PU_CTRL_CPU software executes the following steps :


– Asks operator if II_SENSOR board is on the extensionrack.

– The software select 68360 timer3 to measure thebright_vid frequency

– The software initialises timer1, to count 100ms delay,and timer3.

– Sets TEST_HTPM signal on II_SENSOR board

– Checks loopback signal TEST_TEST_HTPM activated

– Sends an HTPM test value = 500V.

– Waits 1s and starts 100ms timer and bright_vid counter

– Checks BRIGHT_VID frequency equal to250kHz +– 10%

– Sends an HTPM test value = 900V.

– Waits 1s and starts 100ms timer and bright_vid counter

– Checks BRIGHT_VID frequency equal to 450kHz +–10%

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–189

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check connection between ROOM_IF_CPU, DISTRIBUTION and II_SENSORboardsROOM_IF_CPU (J1/J10) and DISTRIBUTION (J7), DISTRIBUTION (J8) andII_SENSOR (J3)

� Action :


279 – Replace II–SENSOR board

280 – Replace II_SENSOR board

318 – ROOM_IF_CPU faulty. Replace ROOM_IF_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–190

CPU–68302


AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE


– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ALIM_OK


SUPPLY TEST LEDS


– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER


– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V



– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS



CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU boardRS485 Interface Drivers

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–191

Error 285, 286, 287Error 308, 309, 310

MPH ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD

ROOM_IF_CPU Serial Interface Drivers Test

TEST DESCRIPTIONPre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK on both cpu boards

– RS485

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to check RS485 interface drivers between logic or 68302, and PU_CTRL_CPU board. ForManchester encoded HDLC link, serial output is connected to the serial input. For digital outputs (EXT_CUT_OFF,EXP_CMD, GRID_CMD, BRIGHT_VID, BRIGHT_ION), the output line states are simply read on a test register.For digital inputs (ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET, RESET_AEC, HV_ON), a serial data (signal ”DATA_TEST_1”) isinjected on the input line. The serial links coming from PU_CTRL_CPU are loop on ROOM_IF_CPU board.

Note: For all input lines, there is no data contention when test is active because of serial resistorson differential lines.For reasons of safety, it is not possible to force EXP_EN line by software. This line canonly be driven by a manual action of the operator.Note that when ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET is active (in local test or by a PU_CTRL_CPUrequest), output drivers are forced to high impedance states. So, this diagnostis must not bedone when ROOM_IF_CPU reset is active.

Test type : No manual interaction.Sequence : The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) executes the following steps:

– Set ”DATA_TEST_1” signal to prevent spurious ”ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET” switching.– Set ”REBOUCLAGE_1” signal to connect HDLC and input lines loopback. Note that this action breaks commu-

nication between both CPU boards, and TAV, PUPITRE and PROG_X serial links.– Wait 100ms.– Test HDLC (with Manchester encoding) loopback. Send a message on the transmit line and check it on the receive

line.– Test logic input drivers with ’1’ level test data. Reads the ”RD_TEST” register and check if

”ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET”, ”RESET_AEC” and ”HV_ON” are on ’1’ level.– Reset ”DATA_TEST_1” signal. This action must cause a high to low transistion on ”ROOM_IF_CPU_REST”

line and must cause a ”NMI” (level 7 interrupt with autovector).– Test logic input drivers with ’0’ level test data. Reads the ”RD_TEST” register and check if

”ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET”, ”RESET_AEC” and ”HV_ON” are on ’0’ level.– Set ”EXT_CUT_OFF”, ”GRID_CMD”, ”RESET_CAP”, ”TEST_CAP” and ”REBOUCLAGE_2” signals.

Reset ”SEL_EXP_CMD_0” , ”SEL_EXP_CMD_1”, ”CLK_TEST_CAP” and ”DATA_TEST_2” signals on”WR_TEST” register.

– Wait 150ms– Test logic output drivers with ’0’ level state. Read the ”RD_TEST” register and check if

”TEST_EXT_CUT_OFF”, ”TEST_GRID_CMD”, ”TEST_BRIGHT_VID” are on ’0’ level. Read signal”TEST_BRIGHT_ION” (port PB3 of 68302) and check if it is on ’0’ level.

– Reset ”RESET_CAP” signal to enable ”BRIGHT_ION” edge–toggle.– Reset ”EXT_CUT_OFF”, ”GRID_CMD” signals. Set ”CLK_TEST_CAP” and ”DATA_TEST_2” signals on

”WR_TEST” register.– Wait 100ms.– Test logic output drivers with ’1’ level state. Read the ”RD_TEST” register and check if

”TEST_EXT_CUT_OFF”, ”TEST_GRID_CMD”, ”TEST_BRIGHT_VID” are on ’1’ level. Read signal”TEST_BRIGHT_ION” (port PB3 of 68302) and check if it is on ’1’ level.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–192

– Reset ”TEST_CAP”, ”REBOUCLAGE_1” and ”REBOUCLAGE_2” signals. Restore previous states of”EXT_CUT_OFF”, ”GRID_CMD”, ”SEL_EXP_CMD_0” and ”SEL_EXP_CMD_1” signals.

– Wait 100ms

– Set rebouclage_2 which loopback serial link signals and wait 100ms

– Send a byte thru PRINT’X link (SCC2 of 68302 in uart mode)

– Check interrupt detection and the received byte


– Ask PU_CTRL_CPU to start the test

– Test direct serial links (SCC2 : ROOM_IF_CPU, SCC3 :MADRID or GPX, SCC4 : TAV, SMC1 : APR : sendmessage and check interrupt detection and the receivedmessage.

– Reset rebouclage_2 signal

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–193

ROOM_IF_CPU SERIAL INTERFACE DRIVERS

Error MPH ROOM_IF_CPU Board Serial Interface Drivers Failure

Description285 PU_CTRL_CPU control desk link

User Status : 1 : interrupt not serviced2 : message contents error

286 PU_CTRL_CPU TAV/GPX link User Status : 1 : interrupt not serviced

2 : message contents error

287 PU_CTRL APR link User Status : 1 : interrupt not serviced

2 : message contents error

308 Serial link communicationsUser Status : 1 : PU_CTRL_CPU link (HDLC) interrupt detection error

2 : PU_CTRL_CPU link (HDLC) message length error3 : PU_CTRL_CPU link (HDLC) message contents error10 : PRINTX link (UART) interrupt detection error30 : PRINTX link (UART) message contents error

309 Read in loop ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET, RESET_AEC and HV_ON User Status : 1 : signals not reset

2 : NMI interrupt detection error3 : signals not set

Actual Data : value read Expected Data : value expected at this selection

310 Read in loop User Status : 1 : signals TEST_EXT_CUT_OFF, TEST_GRID_CMD and

TEST_BRIGHT_VID not reset2 : signal TEST_BRIGHT_ION not in right state3 : signals TEST_EXT_CUT_OFF, TEST_GRID_CMD and

TEST_BRIGHT_VID not set4 : signal TEST_BRIGHT_ION not in right state

Actual Data : value read Expected Data : value expected at this selection

RECOMMENDED ACTION

* Check pre–requisites are completed (see above)

* Action :


285–287 Any ROOM_IF_CPU faulty or cable between ROOM_IF_CPUand PU_CTRL_CPU boards.Note: Do not take into account if error is not recurrent.

308–310 Any ROOM_IF_CPU faulty. Replace ROOM_IF_CPU board

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–194

Error 299

COMMUNICATION TEST

PU_CTRL_CPU ROOM_IF_CPU communication test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK on both CPU.– PU_CTRL_CPU RS485 interface driver test passed OK

Purpose : This test runs during diagnostic each time the 2 cpus are involved.


Sequence : During diagnostics, each time the PU_CTRL_CPU sends a message to ROOM_IF_CPU board, it starts a 15s time–out(ROOM_IF_CPU diagnostics, exposure enable and exposure command tests, kv diagnostics). At the end of time_out, if no answerfrom ROOM_IF_CPU board, generate error 299

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU ROOM_IF_CPU communication test ERROR CODES Failure

Description

299 No answer from ROOM_IF_CPU 15s after PU_CTRL_CPU sent last message

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Check connection between PU_CTRL_CPUand ROOM_IF_CPUPU_CTRL_CPU (J3) and ROOM_IF_CPU (J5)

� Action :


299 – replace ROOM_IF_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–195

Error 300, 301See Error 44, 45, 46, 47


PU_CTRL_CPU and ROOM_IF_CPU EXP ENABLE Signal Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–196

Error 302, 303Error 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278

See Error 48



DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–197

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–198

CPU–68302


AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE


– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ALIM_OK


SUPPLY TEST LEDS


– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER


– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V



– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS



CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU boardRoom Interface Inputs

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–199

Error 304, 305, 306


Inputs Buffers Test

TEST DESCRIPTIONPre–requisites : – PU_CTRL_CPU Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK

– PU_CTRL_CPU Coomand buffer and Read buffer passed OK– ROOM_IF_CPU Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK.– ROOM_IF_CPU Command Buffers passed OK.

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to check room interface inputs (optocouplers). The software first checks global ”off” stateof all the optocouplers by cutting +15VRF. Second, the software check the global ”on” state by forcing active all optocouplersinputs.


Sequence : The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) executes the following steps :

� The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) reads the”RD_SALLE_1” register and check if ”_VRF_TEST” signal is on ’1’ level

� Set the ”TEST_OPT_OFF” signal. Wait 100ms.

� Read ”RD_SALLE_2” and check it is equal to 0.

� Read ”RD_SALLE_3” registers, mask DOOR_INTERLOCK signal and check other bitsare equal to 0.

� Reset the ”TEST_OPT_OFF” signal and set the ”TEST_OPT_ON” signal. Wait 100ms.

� Read ”RD_SALLE_2” and ”RD_SALLE_3” registers check if they are both equals to0xFFFF.

� Reset the ”TEST_OPT_ON” signal.

ROOM_IF_CPU INPUT BUFFERS ERROR CODES

Error MPH ROOM_IF_CPU Board Input Buffers Failure

Description304 VREF signal failure

305 buffer rw_salle2 failureUser Status : 1 : signals not all 0

2 : signal not all 1Actual Data : value read Expected Data : value expected at this selection

306 buffer rw_salle3 failureUser Status : 1 : signals not all 0

2 : signal not all 1Actual Data : value read Expected Data : value expected at this selection

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–200

RECOMMENDED ACTION� Check pre–requisites are completed (see above)

� Action :


304 Any Check VREF power supply (DS28 ON). If OK replaceROOM_IF_CPU board

305 Any ROOM_IF_CPU faulty. Replace ROOM_IF_CPU board.

306 Any ROOM_IF_CPU faulty. Replace ROOM_IF_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–201

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–202

CPU–68302


AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE


– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ALIM_OK


SUPPLY TEST LEDS


– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER


– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V



– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS



CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU boardRoom Interface Ouputs

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–203

Error 307


Output Buffers Test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK on both cpu boards.

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to check room interfaces outputs (relays or open collector drivers). Each digital output hasa test readback input.

Test type : No manual interaction.

Sequence : The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) executes the following steps :

� Save register values.

� Write a test pattern word on ”WR_SALLE_0” and ”WR_SALLE_1” registers.

� Wait 100ms.

� Read and check ”RD_SALLE_0” and ”RD_SALLE_1” (except VREF signal).

� Restore initial register values.

PU_CTRL_CPU OUTPUT BUFFERS ERROR CODES

Error MPH ROOM_IF_CPU Board Output Buffers Failure

Description307 Read write failure

Actual Data : value read Expected Data : value expected at this selectionActual Address : Address of the failure

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Action :


307 Any ROOM_IF_CPU faulty. Replace ROOM_IF_CPU board

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–204

CPU–68302


AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE


– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ALIM_OK


SUPPLY TEST LEDS


– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER


– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V



– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS



CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU boardAnalogic Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–205

Error 311, 312, 313, 314, 315


ROOM_IF_CPU Analogic test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK on both cpu boards.

Purpose : The purpose of this test is to check if the 12 bits DAC used in the ”tracking counter” of the AEC function is correct. This DACis driven by a software controled command clock in ”test mode”. The analog output value of this DAC is compared with an internalvoltage reference (1.24 V). The comparator’s transition must occur when DAC output voltage is up to 1.24 V.This test checks if +15V/–15V supply voltage and +10V analog reference voltage are correct.This test checks if +15VRF supply voltage is correct.The purpose of this test is to check programmable gain (x10) used in the AEC ”tracking counter”. The analog output value of the12 bits DAC is compared with an internal voltage reference (0.62 V). The comparator’s transition must occur when DAC outputvoltage is up to 6.2 VThe purpose of this test is to check 8 bits DAC output. ”HVPM_ASSIG” analog signal is loopbacked into the analog multiplexerof the ”tracking counter” (unity gain). That signal is compared with the output value of the 12 bits DAC (driven by a softwarecontroled command clock in ”test mode”).Note that this test can check analog inputs of AEC (”VOUT1”, ”VOUT2”, ”VOUT3” and ”VOUT4” signals) because the analogmultiplexer is directly wired on the frontier of the board.The purpose of this test is to check ”BRIGHT_ION” generation by the ”tracking counter” which is configured in ”normal mode”excepted that the analog input is switched on the HVPM_ASSIG signal (8 bits DAC loopback). ”BRIGHT_ION” pulses are mea-sured by the ”timer3” of 68302.

Test type : No manual interaction.

Sequence : The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) executes the following steps :12 bits DAC for ”tracking counter”

� The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) reads the ”test”register and check if ”ALIM_OK” and ”REF10V_OK” are on ’1’ level

� The ROOM_IF_CPU software (via PU_CTRL_CPU sofware request) reads the”RD_SALLE_1” register and check if ”_VRF_TEST” signal is on ’1’ level

� Set ”RESET_CAP” and ”TEST_CAP” signals to initialize the ”tracking counter” in ”testmode”.

� Select 1.24 V reference input on analog multiplexer by encoding channel 5 on”SEL2_CAP”, ”SEL1_CAP” and ”SEL0_CAP”.

� Select unity gain (”GAIN_CAP” signal=’0’).

� Wait 100ms

� Check ”AEC_COMP” signal (output of the comparator, port PB2 of 68302). This signalmust read at ’0’ level.

� Reset ”RESET_CAP” to enable counting.

� Repeat software controled command clock (set and reset ”CLK_TEST_CAP” signal)and count the number of these occurences.

� Check number of software controled command clock when ”AEC_COMP” goes high.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–206

Analog programmable gain


� Select 0.62 V reference input on analog multiplexer by encoding channel 6 on”SEL2_CAP”, ”SEL1_CAP” and ”SEL0_CAP”.

� Select ”x10” gain (”GAIN_CAP” signal=’1’).

� Wait 150ms





DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–207

8 bits DAC (HVPM)

� Program the test value on the 8 bits DAC register.

� Enable the 8 bits DAC reference input. Set ”VAL_DAC” signal.


� Select HVPM_ASSIG loopback input on analog multiplexer by encoding channel 4 on”SEL2_CAP”, ”SEL1_CAP” and ”SEL0_CAP”.


� Wait 150ms





BRIGHT_ION test

� Select HVPM_ASSIG loopback input on analog multiplexer by encoding channel 4 on”SEL2_CAP”, ”SEL1_CAP” and ”SEL0_CAP”.


� Program the test value on the 8 bits DAC register.

� Enable the 8 bits DAC reference input. Set ”VAL_DAC” signal.

� Reset the ”tracking counter” in ”test mode” (”TEST_CAP”=’1’, ”RESET_CAP”=’1’).

� Initialize the ”timer 1 input” of 68302 (”TEST_BRIGHT_ION”signal).

� Configure the ”tracking counter” in ”normal mode” (”TEST_CAP”=’0’,”RESET_CAP”=’1’).

� Wait until timer 1 count > 4000H or 1S

� Check if the ”timer 1” count register is correct.

� Restore initial configuration.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–208

ROOM_IF_CPU ANALOGIC ERROR

Error MPH ROOM_IF_CPU Board Analogic Failure

Description

311 Power supply failureUser Status : 1 : ALIM_OK or REF10V_OK

2 : VREF_TEST

312 12 bits DAC tracking counter failureUser Status : 1 : AEC_COMP initial value

2 : counter failure

313 programmable gain failureUser Status : 1 : AEC_COMP initial value

2 : counter failure

314 8 bits DAC HVPMUser Status : 1 : AEC_COMP initial value

2 : counter failure

315 bright_ion failure

RECOMMENDED ACTION ERROR


� Check on CPU the following connections :

� Action :


311 any Check power supplies on ROOM_IF_CPU (DS3DS4,DS5,DS28 ON) and see power supply bloc Diagram. IfOK replace ROOM_IF_CPU board

312 – 315 – ROOM_IF_CPU faulty. Replace ROOM_IF_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–209

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–210

CPU–68302


AEC interface

SCOPIE interface

Supply control

Room interface

Operator interface

CLK_CAP

CLK_SCOPIE


– RS445 DRIVERS

– TEST REGISTERS

ALIM_OK


SUPPLY TEST LEDS


– VOLTAGE CONTROL

HDLC

REF10V

REF1V24

BRIGHT_VID

TAV

PROG_X

FLUORO_PREP_A

EXP_REQUEST_A

RAD_PREP_A

PRINT_X

ROOM_IF_CPU_RESET

HV_ON

EXP_EN

EXP_EN

PUPITRE

BRIGHT_ION

RESET_AEC

RS232 DEBUG

PB–RESET

PB_ABORT

SWITCHES PRD

LEDS

STRAP WATCHDOG

– 68302

– EPROM

– SRAM

– EPLD

– DATA BUFFER


– PRD REGISTERS

START_EXP_A

START_FLUORO_A

EXP_CMD

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

D(15:0)

– INPUT FILTERS

– ANALOG MUX

+5V

GND

+15V

–15V



– AEC REGISTERS

VOUT1–4

DG, DC, DD

GAIN

– 8 bits DAC

– Power on SAFETY

OPERATOR CONNECTOR

HVPM_ASSIG

TEST_HVPM

FLUORO

D(15:0)

– RS484 DRIVERS

– SCOPIE REGISTER


– RELAY CONTACTS

– TEST REGISTERS

(ANALOG.)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(UART)

(TIMER+EPLD)

(SCC)

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

(IRQ7)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(BUS D)

(ANALOG.)

RF CONNECTOR

RF SUPPLY CONNECTOR

EXTENSION CONNECTOR

EXPOSURE CONNECTOR

RAD CONNECTOR

SWITCH RAD

LEDS

– OPTOCOUPLERS

– RELAIS



CLR_CAP

AEC_COMP

(EPLD)

(EPLD)

ROOM_IF_CPU boardSwitches and Leds Test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–211

Error 316


ROOM_IF_CPU Switches and LED’s test

TEST DESCRIPTION

Pre–requisites : – Power_On Reset Diagnostics passed OK.– ON/OFF function passed OK.– Low Voltage function passed OK.

Purpose : Its purpose is to verify the reading of the switches position and the writing to the LED’s. The principle is to ask theoperator to position the switches, then to start running the test and verify visually that the code displayed on the LED’s is the sameas the one written on the switches.As this test requires operator checking of the LED’s status it is an interactive test and it is asked to the operator to decide if thetest passed or not.

Test type : It is an interactive test. LOOP–ON allowed.

Sequence : – Ask the operator to move PRD’s switches, ”Select a switch code and press DONE or EXIT”.– On DONE answer of the operator, PU_CTRL_CPU software copies switches combination on PRD’s leds.– On EXIT answer of the operator, ask the operator to visualy check if leds and switches combinations are equal, ”Was the valueshown correct?”.– If YES, display message ”Return switches in their original position

press DONE to continue”

PU_CTRL_CPU SWITCHES AND LEDS ERROR CODES

Error MPH PU_CTRL_CPU Board Switches and LED’s Failure

Description

316 The operator has seen an error on the ROOM_IF_CPU board and has answered : ”NO” .

RECOMMENDED ACTION


� Action :


316 – ROOM_IF_CPU faulty. Replace ROOM_IF_CPU board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–212

Error 317See Error 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 Current Meas & IGBT FPS test

Error 317See Error 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 kV Rise and Regulation test

Error 317See Error 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147

MPH KV COMMAND

CMD1 kV MAX Safety test

Error 317See Error 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156

MPH KV COMMAND

INVERT Power Components tests

Error 317See Error 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165

MPH KV COMMAND

Final Cross check

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–213


MPH II_SENSOR BOARD

II_SENSOR HTPM test

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–214

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–215

SECTION 5OPTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

�� "�� % ��!�

�� "�� !�� &$

�� "�� !�� &$

�� "��

�� "�� #��

�!��

�� "�� !� "�� !�

�� "�� !�

�� "�� !��

�� "��

��!��

DIA

GN

OS

TIC


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–216

Blank page.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0

MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2 Job Card VF 001 1 of 2

Purpose: CONSOLE DISPLAY FAULTDate:

Time: Personnel:


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–217

SECTION 1SYMPTOM

Troubleshooting without display error code.

SECTION 2CAUSE

SECTION 3POINT TESTED

SECTION 4ACTION

RUN THE CONSOLE SELF–TEST.

Console self–test.

To enter the self–test, hit and hold down the following keys together for 1 s:

� Small focal spot,

� Technique 1,

� kV– (kV minus).

This test allows the operator to check the operation of the keys, indicator lamps, readouts and buzzer (alllocated on the console).

The connection with the generator is interrupted for the whole test period.

At the start of the test, the software version is displayed in place of the mA and ms values (eg. 2–10):

� all indicator lamp are lighted for 2 s,

� all seven segments and the decimal point of each readout are lighted successively,

� the console buzzer gives three beeps.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF 001 2 of 2CONSOLE DISPLAY FAULT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–218

The operator can access four tests as follows:

TEST 1: Hit the Technique 1 and Technique 5 keys together.The test checks the pushbutton contacts. If the test is OK, the key backlights.

TEST 2: Hit the Technique 2 and Technique 6 keys together.The test is used to light or out the backlit keys by hitting these keys. A second hit outs thebacklighted key.

TEST 3: Hit the Technique 3 and Technique 7 keys together.This test check the 7–segment readouts. The –kV and +kV keys select the readout to bemodified. The mA or mAs keys increment or decrement the values on the selected readout.

TEST 4: Hit the Technique 4 and Technique 8 keys together.Not used.

To exit from the self–test, use the entry procedure given above.

SECTION 5SUBASSEMBLIES CONCERNED

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0


Purpose: TROUBLESHOOTING ON PROGRAM-XDate:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–219

SECTION 1SUPPLIES REQUIRED

SECTION 2TOOLS REQUIRED

� Service Terminal.

� PROGRAM-X om disk.

SECTION 3SAFETY, PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN

Before all work on the screen, switch off the screen (HV of 300 V provided from 12 V/300 V converter).


SECTION 5TASK DESCRIPTION

Check that the straps are in right position indicated on job card DR015.To change battery, see Service Manual chapter 4 (preventive maintenance).Install Service Terminal and switch it on.

5.1 Running the Self–test

As the PROGRAM-X has an integrated self-test from switch-on with pressed, all the principalfunctions are checked.

If the oval pattern appears on the PROGRAM-X screen, the test is OK.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF 002 2 of 6TROUBLESHOOTING ON PROGRAM-X


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–220

ILLUSTRATION 1

��

��

If eight vertical stripes appear on the PROGRAM-X screen, a fault or faults have been found as follows:

� If bar 1 (at right edge of screen) flashes, the Checksum test for the PROM (B18) has failed. Correctiveaction: Check PROM contacts, or replace PROM.

� If bar 2 (from right edge of screen) flashes, RAM System (B8) has failed.

Corrective action: Check RAM contacts, or replace RAM.

� If bars 1 and 2 flash, the serial connections between PROGRAM-X and MPH have failed.

Corrective action:

– Check line reception and emission.

– Check DUART contacts (B28), or replace them, or reverse the two DUARTs (B28 and B34).

� If ”Buzzer DUART B34 not installed” message appears, install a jumper across ST13 onPROGRAM-X board.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–221

5.2 RAM Clear

To clear the RAM:

� Hit any key on the PROGRAM-X Control module

� Switch on the generator. The screen (see Ill. 1) appears on the PROGRAM-X.

� To clear the RAM, hit: <key> – <delete> – <family> – <0>

on the PROGRAM-X Control module

ILLUSTRATION 2START–UP SCREEN

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� 0�� &��'��+�, ��&&��(�-)'$��*+)"+�',

*��/�� ,-�*.,#��.--)(,��)+�- ,-�, +$�&�&$(%

��'��#�(" �!)(-,�,$1

(��"��)��#�(" �!)(-,�,-0&

��,��-�+-�,-)*��&$(%$("

��-��$(�+ �, �)+�� + �, �-+�� & / &

��.$-�- ,-��(��

� ��

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–222

5.3 Testing the Pushbutton on PROGRAM-X Control Module

1. Press and hold down any key on the PROGRAM-X Control module and switch on generator.

2. On alphanumeric keyboard, hit ”P”.

3. Check that each pushbutton on PROGRAM-X Control module lights when pressed. To terminate thetest, press the ”Key Button”.

4. To exit from Test function, hit <key> “g” on the alphanumeric keyboard.

SECTION 6PROGRAM-X ERROR MESSAGES

� Messages indicating correct running of tasks

– Transferring fileTransfer terminated Service Terminal/PROGRAM-X transfer statusReading language file

� Messages of fault in performing tasks

No more communication with PROGRAM-X

Possible faults:

– PROGRAM-X/Service Terminal cable is damaged or connection is not continuous (line E/R)

– Program run on Service Terminal when PROGRAM-X was not configured in TRANSFER Menu.

Error during read: fault may be due to disk (damaged track) or from Service Terminal.

� Message indicating file problem on disk

NO SUCH FILE: No such program on disk for technique selected.

NO SUCH DIRECTORYFaulty disk

NO VERSION FILE

VERSION FILE NOT GOOD

FILES WERE MANUALLY MODIFIED:

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–223

SECTION 7MAIN CAUSES OF FAILURE OF PROGRAM-X

7.1 Screen

7.2 Keyboards

��

�21642/�02(7/)

�,)'.

��

�,)'.+)1)4%624�-5-1�%33/-'%6-21

02()

"� ��! � �#

328)4�5733/9

.)95�/%035/-+,6-1+

$��

��

�%&/)�"��*%7/69

�)3/%')�6,)�5'4))1

$��

�71��!� �� 16)4*%')��

�,)'.�-*��5��%1(��/-+,6��

�1(-'%624/%03�/%035

276

$��

�%03��5��*%7/69

��:#��21642/��2%4(�5733/9�*%7/6

�%&/)�"��*%7/69

�2�(-%/2+�8-6,%/3,%170)4-'.)9&2%4(

$��

�,)'.�"��)9&2%4(��:#��21642/��2%4(

�)3/%')��42+4%0:#��2152/)��2%4(

�)3/%')�.)9&2%4(

�75)��21��

��:�� !��2%4(

��:�� 220��!

�,)'.�-*��5��%1(�� /-+,6��/-+,6��

-*�126��'%&/)�"��*%7/69

��62��42+4%0:#�

�,)'.�*75)��21��

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–224

7.3 PROGRAM-X control board

��8!

�/.31/,�#/"1%/0&1"3&2

��/�%*",/(�6*3)�2&15*$&�3&1-*.",��)&$+�*'��2��".%��,*()3

�)&$+�0/6&1�2400,7��)&$+��42&��/.��

�/�%*",/(�6*3)�(&.&1"3/1

��".%��

�4.��

��.3&1'"$&��

��8��/"1%

��8��//-��/"1%

�)&$+�*'��2��".%��,*()3��".%��

�)&$+�*'��2��".%��,*()3�� *'�./3�$"#,&� ��'"4,37

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0


Purpose: TROUBLESHOOTING OF PRINT-XDate:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–225



� � ��



SECTION 5TASK DESCRIPTION

5.1 Power Supply Fault (if ON LINE LED is not lighted)

1. Check AC Supply from MPH A6 A3 – XJ1A/B to the DC power supply (115 Vac).

2. Check +12 V between + and – pins on DC supply (XJ1 disconnected).

3. If +12 V is not present, replace the power supply.

4. If +12 V is present, check fuse F1 and replace if required.

5. Check printer supply cable.

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

DC Supply XJ1 Printer

6. Replace cable if required. If not, connect XJ1.

7. Check =12 V on printer cable plug (across Pins 2 and 3).

8. If correct, replace the printer.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF 003 2 of 4TROUBLESHOOTING OF PRINT-X


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–226

5.2 Printer Fault

�$.* "$

�� /(,1$/ ��

�� --+��

�4(1"' -%% ./(,1$/ 3(

�� 04(1"' -, ./(,1$/

�/$00 ,# '-*# #-4, ��

!211-, -, ./(,1$/ ,# 04(1"'

-, ./(,1$/

�/(,1$/ (0 ./(,1(,&

�$.* "$ ./(,1$/ �4(1"' -%% ./(,1$/

�'$") 4(/(,& ��

�$.* "$ " !*$�4(1"' -%% ./(,1$/

�4(1"' -%% &$,$/ 1-/

�-,,$"1 " !*$ !$14$$, ��

-% " !*$ 1- ./(,1$/ 1- � -%

�--+��

�4(1"' -, &$,$/ 1-/

�4(1"' -, ./(,1$/

�'$") 4(/(,& ��

�$.* "$ % 2*15 4(/(,&

�� !*$ -/ � ")0�

�$0�-

�)� 2*1

�/(,1$/ (0 ./(,1(,&�$0 �-

�$.* "$

�� -,1/-* �-,0-*$ ��

�� --+��

�- �)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–227

,'* �

,'*

,'* �

,'* �

,'* �

,'* �

��

�-'*/#- ��0 � � ,'*.�

��

�+*/-+( �+*.+(#

�� 0 � ,'*.�

�&'. !� (# '. '* #)#-%#*!3 �% ��0 � ,'*. ��(# � �0 � ,'*.

�#)�(#� 0.#" $+- �#-1'!# �#-)'*�(

�

�

�

�

��

��

�2�

�2�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�+*/-+( �+*.+(#

��

�++)��

��

��

��

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–228

Blank page

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0


Purpose: DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSDate:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–229

��

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� None

SECTION 2TOOLS

� None


� None


� None

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 HEAT ANOD HIGH Tests

Three tests are programmed in Menu 1:

1. HEAT: focal spot heater test with a 3 A, 4 A or 5 A current,this test is used to check the entire heater sequence,the microprocessor awaits the return of 3 A, 4 A or 5A data.

2. ANOD: anode rotation test for a 3000 or 9000 rpm x-ray tube,this test is used to check the radiography enable sequence delivered by the starter,the microprocessor awaits the return of starter enable.

3. HIGH: high voltage test without filament heater (no x-ray) or anode rotation,his test is used to check if there is arcing in the x-ray tube, HV cables or HV unit,it is also used to check inverter operation.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF 004 2 of 8DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTS


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–230

5.1.1 Implementing the HEAT test

1. Enter Maintenance mode (asm floppy).

2. The display reads:

MENU 1 HEAT ANOD HIGH

3. Select the HEAT test by pressing the F1 key below the “HEAT” display.

4. The display then reads:

HEAT TEST T1 L OFF 3A

5. Select the x-ray tube to be tested by pressing the key below “T1” readout (F3 key).

6. Select the focal spot by pressing the key below the “L” (F5 key),L = Large focal spot,S = Small focal spot,

7. Select the heating value (3 A, 4 A or 5 A) on F9 key located under the “3A” readout.

8. Strike to start the test, a display informs the technician of the test status:

� if operation is normal, the display will show:

HEAT TEST T1 (T2) L(S) ON 3 A

� if a fault is detected, the display will show:

Err XXX

in this case, see the Troubleshooting procedures.

9. Once the fault has been identified, press a second time to stop the test.

Note: During the test, selection of the x-ray tube or the focal spot is inhibited.

V

V

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–231

5.1.2 Implementing the ANOD test

1. Select Maintenance mode.



3. Select the ANOD test by pressing the F3 key below the “ANOD” display.


HEAT TEST T1 3K OFF

5. Select the x-ray tube to be tested by pressing the key below “T1” readout (F3 key).

6. Select the focal spot by pressing the key below the “3K” (F5 key),3K = 3000 rpm,9K = 9000 rpm,

7. Start up the test by pressing .

� The display reads:

ANOD TEST T1(T2) 3K(9K) ON

8. The starter begins anode rotation until it reaches the speed selected.

9. The program checks emission of the Radiography or Fluoroscopy enable signal by the starter. Thesignal is normally emitted when the anode reaches its nominal speed. To obtain this data, wait a fewseconds until anode starter speed is stable, then press “F1” below the “TEST” readout.


� If the microprocessor receives the signal:

ANOD TEST T1 (T2) 3K(9K) ON OK

� lf the microprocessor does not receive the signal:

ANOD TEST T1(T2) 3K(9K) ON ERR 7xx

in the last case, defective operation may stem from the Rotor Controller or Command 2 Board.

11. Refer to the Diagnostic and to the Error Code displayed.The display “ERR” can also be due to a premature request or continuing to hold the key down, whichwould inhibit display refresh.Press the key and release it several times to make sure that the display remains the same.

V

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–232

12. To halt the test, press again.

Note: X-ray tube or speed selection is inhibited during the test.

5.1.3 Implementing the HIGH test




3. Select the ANOD test by pressing the F5 key below the “HIGH” display.


HV TEST T1 40KV OFF

5. Select the x-ray tube (or direction if testing the HV unit) to be tested by pressing the key below the “T1”display (F3 key).

6. Select the kV value by pressing the key below the “40” display several times (F5 and F6 keys).The values which can be selected vary between 40 kV and 150 kV in increments of 10 kV.Selection is looped, i.e. after 150 kV, pressing the key will select 40 kV.

Note: Do not exceed the maximum value authorized for the x-ray tube.

7. Start the test by pressing the Radiography exposure key and holding it down.

8. the inverter is then operational.


� if operation seems to be normal:

HV TEST T1(T2) 40(to 150) ON 40KV(to 150KV)

� If an error is detected:

ERR XXXX

... refer to the Diagnostic and to the Error Code displayed.

Note: After selecting the other tube for testing, reset the kV value.

10. To stop the test, release the Radiography exposure key.

Note: To detect an arcing fault, increase the kV value, without exceeding the maximum value authorized forthe x–ray tube.

V

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–233

5.1.4 If arcing occurs during the HIGH test

If arcing occurs during the HIGH test:

1. Disconnect HV cables from HV unit.

2. Try to take an exposure at the kV value at which arcing occured.

3. If arcing occurs, replace HV unit and stop here.

4. If arcing does not occur:

a. Reconnect cables to HV unit and disconnect HV cables from x–ray tube.

b. Connect the free ends of the HV cables to a suitable voltage divider.

c. Try to take an exposure at the kV value at which arcing occured.

d. If arcing occurs, replace both HV cables.

e. If arcing does not occur, replace the x–ray tube.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–234

5.2 List MENU

The List MENU is available in MENU 2.

It is designed to store error codes.

When in read, it returns the codes of the last sixteen errors which occurred.

5.2.1 Implementing the LIST MENU


2. Select MENU 2.


MENU 2 TEST LIST NEXP DATE

4. Select the LIST Test by pressing the F3 key below the “LIST” display.


Error n 0= XXXX Nb 1 Jan 30 1996

Error No. 0 is the most recent.

Error No. –15 is the oldest.

XXXX = error code.

The date displayed is the date of the first appearance.

Nb is the number of times the error has appeared since the first appearance.

The U key is used to scroll the errors obtained in Diagnostic Mode (Test Menu).

The Z key us used to return to the application errors.

6. To increase or decrease “n”, press the keys below the “n 0” readout (F3/F4 key):

Increase = F3,

Decrease = F4.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–235

7. It is possible to clear all the error codes stored by pressing the keys “CTRL” and “H” simultaneously.


CLEAR all errors

9. To reply to this question, press the keys “CTRL” and “H” simultaneous to clear the memory contents.


Error n 0= 0 Nb

11. To quit the test, press the key “R”.

5.3 MENU DATE AND TIME

To enter the Date and Time:

1. Go to Service Mode, and call Menu 2 using the arrows on the keyboard.

2. Call MODA by pressing 7.

3. Hit F1 three time.

4. Enter date (MM DD YYYY) via numeric keypad.

5. Hit W to confirm.

6. Hit F1.

7. Enter time (HH MM) via numeric keypad.

8. Hit W to confirm.

When replacing the battery in the CPU Board, clear the year-counter display on the righthand side via F7and F9 to confirm.

IMPORTANT: Checksums must be validated. Enter the Workstation Parameters (in Chart 1 of Job Card IST013,Chapter 1, Section 6, End of Installation in the Service Manual).

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–236

Blank page

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0

MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2 Job Card VF005 1 of 6

Purpose: DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSON/OFF AND POWER SUPPLIES Date:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–237

��

Run this procedure if CT1 MPH A1 K2 does not switch ON.

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� None

SECTION 2TOOLS

� Standard tool kit.


� None


� None

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF005 2 of 6DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSON/OFF AND POWER SUPPLIES


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–238

ILLUSTRATION 1

Yes No

Generator does not power ONCT1 MPHA1 K2

Does not switch ON

PhaseR.S.T.OK

Check roompower supply

on MPH A1 SW1PowerONOK?

END

See B page 2

DS15 ONCMD1 boardMPH A4–A1

”ON”

Mains switchMPH A1–SW1

ON

Switch ONSW1

PowerONOK?

END

Check fusesF1 – F2 – F3 on

mains PSMPH A3–A2

DS7–8–9on mains PSMPH A3–A2

ON?

See A page 2

DS12on mains PS

boardMPH A3–A2

ON?

Check 220 Vacon transformerMPH A3–T1plug 0 and

220 V

Replace mainsPS board

MPH A3–A2

Replace brokenfuse

Check voltageson primary oftransformer

MPH A3–T1

Replacetransformer

MPHA1–AT1

Check cable betweentransformer and mains PSBoard MPH A3–A2 XJ3

Replacetransformer

MPH A3–T1

Check cable betweentransformer and mains

PS–Board MPH A3–A2 XJ1

Check cables between:1) MPH A3–A2 XJ2 and

MPH A1–AT12) MPH A3–A2 XJ5 and

MPH A3–A3 XJ5

Replace mainsPS MPH A3–A2

Checkthermal safetyon transformerMPHA1–AT1

No

No

No

No Yes

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OPENcircuit Short circuit

SEE ON/OFF AND LV POWER SUPPLIESBLOCK DIAGRAM

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–239

ILLUSTRATION 2

Check cable between:XJ5 CMD1–Board – MPH A4 A1

and XJ5 mains PS Board MPHA3–A2

Replace fusesF2–F3 or and F4

Replace cable

DS19 – DS20DS21 on CMD1

BoardMPH A4–A1

ON?

No

Yes

OK

From page 1 A

DS11 – DS12 –DS13 on CMD1

BoardMPH A4–A1

ON?Checkconnection

between XJ7MPH A4–A1

andMPH A3–PS1

Replace powersupply

MPH A3–PS1

From page 1 B

Verify the connections (6–19–1–25–24) between:XJ2 on control console MPH A7–A2 and XJ12

on distribution board MPH A6–A3

Test if powerON with BP1 on

distributionBoard

MPH A6–A3

Check cable between:XJ9 distribution Bd MPH A6–A3 and XJ4

command Board MPH A4–A1pins: 2–6–7

Controle console failure:change MPH A3–A2 or

MPH A3–A1

NoOK

No

No

OK

Yes No

C page 3

Replace cableNo

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–240

ILLUSTRATION 3

Check cable between XJ5 ofcommand 1 Board MPH A4–A2and XJ5 of mains PS Board MPH

A3–A2 pin 3 and 4

Replace command 1Board MPH A4–A1

Check if 24 V ispresent on XJ4 ofcommand 1 Board

MPH A4–A1 betweenpin 7 (0 V) and

pin 6 (24 V)

YesCheck if DS6 onmains PS BoardMPH A3–A2 is

ON

OK No

C from page 2

Check if 230 Vac ispresent on XJ2 pin 3and 6 of mains PS

Board MPH A3–A2

Check if CT1MPH A1–K2 is

ON

END

Check connection pin 24 XJ1 ofmains PS Board MPH A3–A2 and

plug. 220 V of transformerMPH A3–T1

Check 220 Vac voltagebetween plug 0/480 and

220 V of transformerMPH A3–T1

Replace transformerMPH A3–T1

Replace mains PSMPH A3–A2

OK

NoYes

Yes No

No

OK No

Check cable betweenmains PS Board and

CT1

Replace CT1MPH A1–K17

OK

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–241

ILLUSTRATION 4

Check fuseF12–F13–F14 on

Distribution BoardMPH A6–A3

Check if 230Vac is present onfuses F16–F17

in roomdistribution

MPH A1–A1

CT1 on MPH A1–K2

Check fuseF1–F2 on

Distribution BoardMPH A6–A3

Check onDistribution

BoardMPH A6–A3

DS5 ON

Check cable between XJ7 –Distribution Board MPH A6–A3 and

XJ1 room if CPU MPH A6–A1

Check XJ3 plug onDistribution Board

MPH A6–A3

ReplaceTransformer

MPH A6–A7

Replace fuseF16–F17

Replace fuse

Replace fuse F7

No Power on Extension RackMPH A6

Check voltage ontransformer

MPH A6–A714 Vac – 19 Vac –230 Vac – 115 Vac

– 200 Vac

Yes

OK

No

No

Check onDistribution BoardMPH A6–A3 if led

DS7–DS9–DS10 ON

Replace PowerSupply MPH

A6–PS1

No Yes

No

OK

OK

No Yes

Yes No

OK

See ON/OFF Faulty treepage 2 thru 4

SEE ON/OFF AND LV SUPPLIES BLOCK DIAGRAM

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–242

Blank page

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0


Purpose: DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSDC BUS VOLTAGE FAULT Date:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–243

��

Run this procedure if NO DC BUS VOLTAGE (Err 410 in Application Mode) .

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� None

SECTION 2TOOLS



� None


� None

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF006 2 of 4DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSDC BUS VOLTAGE FAULT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–244

ILLUSTRATION 1

CT2MPH A3–K1

No DCBUS voltage

OFFONTo page 3 A

SEE ON/OFF AND LV SUPPLIES BLOCKDIAGRAM AND DCPS BLOCK DIAGRAM

ON OFFCTMPH A3–K2

See ON/OFF faulty tree

Erreur62

Check IN1 in positionON on command 1board MPH A4–A1

Check connectionbetween CT2 and

mains PS

Replace mains PSboard MPH A3–A2

DS11on mains PS

boardMPH A3–A2

ON

Run diagnosticmenu 2 test (F1)ON/OFF (F1)

Erreur63

Check if220 Vac is presentON XJ2 pin 1–4 of

mains PS board MPH A3–A2

Replace CT2MPH A1–K1

Check ifDS1 off onDC FILTERMPH A3–A2

Check ifCT2

MPH A3–K1switch 21–22

normallyclosed

Replace DC FILTERMPH A3–A1

ReplaceMPH A3–K1 (CT2)

Checksignal on enable oncommand 1 board

MPH A4–A19–U20 = 0

Replace mains PSboard MPH A3–A2

Replacecommand 1 board

MPH A4–A1

Check cables between XJ2DC FILTER and XJ6 mainsPS and XJ5 mains PS andXJ5 COMMAND 1 board

OK

OK

Yes Yes No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

OK

Yes

OK

No

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–245

ILLUSTRATION 2

DS1”ON”

on DC FILTERMPH A3–A1

Check cablebetween XJ2–DCFILTER and XJ6

MAINS–PS

Check fusesF4–F5

Replace fuses broken

Check if voltagepresent onF1–F2–F3(380 Vac to480 Vac)

Yes No

OK

From page 2 A

Replace DCFILTER BoardMPH A3–A1

Checkfuses

F1–F2–F3 on DCFILTER

MPH A3–A1

No

Replace MPH A3–K1CT2

Replace DC FILTERboard MPH A3–A1

YesNo

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–246

Blank page

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0


Purpose: DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSSERIAL LINKS FAULT Date:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–247

��

Run this procedure if Errors 522, 523 or 524 appears in Application Mode.

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� None

SECTION 2TOOLS

� None


� None


� None

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF007 2 of 4DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSSERIAL LINKS FAULT


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–248

ILLUSTRATION 1

Leds DS3 andDS4 in controlconsole MPHA7–A2 Flash

Check cable between control consoleMPH A7–A2 XJ2 and distributionboard MPH A6–A3 XJ12 and cable

between distribution board MPHA6–A3 XJ11 and room if CP4 MPH

A6–A1 XJ2

Control console(MADRID)Serial link

See instruction inerror code sheet

OK

No

SEE SERIAL LINKS BLOCK DIAGRAM

Yes Erreur?

Run DIAGNOSTICMenu 2 Test (F1)

Interface (F5)

Replace controlconsole boardMPH A7–A2

Replace room ifCPU MPH A6–A1

Yes No

1)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–249

ILLUSTRATION 2

Leds DS7 andDS8 Flash oncontrol boardMPH A8–A1

Check cable between XJ10 – MPHA6–A3 distribution board and XJ1 –

MPH A8–A1 control boardprogram-X check cable between XJ11– MPH A6–A3 distribution board and

XJ2 – MPH A6–A1 Room if CPU board

PROGRAM-XSerial link

See instruction inerror code sheet

OK

No


Yes Erreur?


Interface (F5)

Run JOB CARDVF 002

Replace room ifCPU board

MPH A6–A1

Yes No

2)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–250

ILLUSTRATION 3

Check cable between control consoleMPH A8–A2 XJ1 and distribution

board MPH A6–A3 XJ12Check cable between distribution board

MPH A6–A3 XJ11 and Room IF CPU board MPH A6–A1 XJ2

TAV ServiceTerminal Serial Link

Check sub D9 pincable used toconnect TAV

OK

Yes


No TAVOK?

Connect TAV onXJ18 plug on

PU CTRL CPUMPH A4–A3

Replace Room IFCPU board

MPH A6–A1

3)

Check TAV seriallink port

Replace Pu CTRLCPU board

MPH A4–A3


Interface (F5)

Erreur?

See Instruction inerror code sheet

Print-X Serial link

See JOB CARDVF 003

4)

OK

OK

YesNo

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.:


Purpose: TROUBLESHOOTING 0-POINT MODEDate:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–251


None.


None.


None.


None.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF008 2 of 12TROUBLESHOOTING 0-POINT MODE


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–252

SECTION 50-Point Mode – Calibration and Programmed Settings

Correct operation of the 0-Point Mode depends on:

� Correct system calibration,

� A system properly adapted to the customer.

Failure to comply with these two requirements may give the customer the impression of abnormaloperation. It is up to the Field Engineer responsible for the site to determine whether this impression isreally due to 0-Point or to some other source.

5.1 Calibration

The following notes summarize the calibration procedures.

5.1.1 Fluoroscopy Calibration

This calibration allows the system to measure the equivalent radiology thickness of the patient. Withoutthis, 0-Point Mode cannot operate.

It requires five plates of 50 mm plexiglass, or the equivalent in water thickness.

5.1.2 Setting the Radiography Dose/Fluoroscopy Dose Rate Ratio

This is a new calibration.

The doses used are as shown below (in closed loop operation):

IIR 32 40

Radiography 0.876 µGy 1.14 µGy in front of the grid

(100 µR) (130 µR)

Fluoroscopy 0.53 µGy/s 0.68 µGy/s in front of the grid

(60 µR/s) (78 µR/s)

Field 22 32

Note: The röntgen (R) is no longer used; use the gray (Gy).

The ratio Radiography Dose/Fluoroscopy Dose Rate is 1.67. This ratio affects the mAs calculation in0-Point Mode.

If the Radiography Dose or the Fluoroscopy Dose Rate are not as specified, the system gives an erroneousvalue, even if the ratio is 1.67.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–253

5.1.3 Calibrating Field Ratios

This is a new calibration, which gives the system the ability to determine the mAs required even if theradiography is done on a different field to the fluoroscopy, because MPH operation must not be paralyzedby an unforeseen change of the image intensifier field.

It is, however, only an estimation, not a calculation, and the kV display flashes as a warning when the fieldhas been changed (flashing kV indicates that fluoroscopy is required for thickness measurement).

The calibration calculates mAs ratios (using 75 kV, 2 mm copper, minimum SID) between the referencefield (22 for II 32, 32 for II 40) and the other available fields.

Note: All other calibrations are made on the reference field.

Ensure that the user is aware that a fluoroscopic exposure must be madewhen the kV flashes.

5.1.4 FILM/Calibrating the Ionization Chamber

This is a new calibration.

This calibration is identical in principle to the fluoroscopy calibration, but it allows the system to recognizethe response of the chamber regardless of the screen–film pair.

5.1.5 FILM/AEC Calibration

A new procedure is available allowing much faster calibration and, above all, systematic: the calibrationtime is not random.

5.1.6 Other calibrations

For the remaining calibrations, it is assumed that the calibrations described above have been madeaccording to the procedures described.

Moreover, the entire system is assumed to be correctly adjusted (generator, image system, mechanicalalignment, etc.).

CAUTION

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–254

5.2 0-Point operation

Operation of the 0-Point Mode requires:

� Curves relating the radiography kV to the thickness calculated by the fluoroscopy,

� Time or kV priority to define to the MPH whether the type of examination is motion blurring priorityor contrast,

� Time and kV limits to adapt these curves to the user’s requirements.

An exposure is said to be CORRECT when the parameters conform to the limits (by default or userselected) and the programmed curves.

Note that each of the curves (three digital, and three screen–film pairs) is associated with a particular type ofexamination, for which they have been designed.They are expected to cover the requirements of most radiology examinations.

The programmed default limits are designed to suit the majority of users; those with specific roomapplications may wish to modify the limits.

If the radiologist wishes to totally redefine the type of examination for which the MPH will function, anattempt should first be made to satisfy the requirement by modifying the limits only.

The curves relating the radiography kV to thickness should not normallybe modified. Any person taking the responsibility of changing these curvesrisks loss of control of the system in 0-Point Mode.

CAUTION

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–255

5.3 Programmed Curves and Limits

5.3.1 Time Priority

Time priority is intended basically to avoid motion blurring; kV is allowed to vary up to kVmax before anexposure time greater than tsup is accepted. Similarly, the kV can vary down to kVmin before an exposuretime less than tinf is accepted.

Illustration 1 shows the operation of Time Priority limits.

ILLUSTRATION 1


t

t Max

t sup

t inf

t min

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

t

t

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

t

t priority:Degraded kVOptimal t


Optimalzone

t priority

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–256

5.3.2 kV priority

kV priority is normally used for examination where contrast is more important than the exposure time (e.g.bone examinations).

Illustration 2 shows the operation of kV Priority limits for increasing thickness.

ILLUSTRATION 2


t

t Max

t sup

t inf

t min

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ



kV

kV

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

kV


Optimalzone

kV priority

kV priority:Optimal kVDegraded t

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–257

5.3.3 kV Limits

The hierarchy of kV limits is defined as follows:

Required range

Tolerated range

kVmin kVinf kVsup kVmax

This indicates that the user wishes to work in the range [kVinf, kVsup] but will, in this case, accept workingin the range [kVmin, kVmax].

5.3.4 t Limits

The hierarchy of t limits is defined as follows:

Required range

Tolerated range

tmin tinf tsup tmax

This indicates that the user wishes to work in the range [tinf, tsup] but will, in this case, accept working in therange [tmin, tmax].

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–258

SECTION 6RECOMMENDED PROCEDURES

6.1 Recommended Checks for specific problems

1. Radiography kV in DRS and Fluoroscopy kV not matched to thickness(e.g., 60 kV for 200 mm of water, 100 kV for 50 mm of water):

– Check the fluoroscopy calibration.

2. Radiography kV in DRS not matched to thickness, fluoroscopy kV correct:

– Check the Radiography Dose/Fluoroscopy Dose Rate Ratio.

– Check the kV and time limits.

3. mAs in DRS insufficient:

– Check the Fluoroscopy calibration.


– Check the Field Ratio calibration.

4. mAs in DRS: calculated backup very high. No mAs displayed and the kV and time limits are exceeded;kV too high.




– Check the field ratio calibration.

5. Radiography kV with film and fluoroscopy kV not matched to the thickness (e.g., 60 kV for 20 cm ofwater, 100 kV for 5 cm of water).


6. Radiography kV with film not matched to the thickness, fluoroscopy kV correct


– Check the ionization chamber calibration.


7. Film mAs insufficient

– Check that the thickness remained constant between the preparation fluoroscopy and theradiography. If the thickness increased, the low mAs is normal.




– Check the field ratio calibration.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–259

8. Film mAs: calculated backup very high. No mAs displayed and the kV and time limits are exceeded;kV too high.





– Check the field ratio calibration

9. The optical density of the film is consistently poor:

– Check that the correct chambers are used and are not covered by shutters or blocked by a slice.

– Check that the Field/Chamber combination is good.

– Check the film development.

– Check the film AEC calibration.

The thickness is now measured in the center of the image.

If the fluoroscopy field is too small the anatomic zone seen by the measurement zone is very different fromthat seen by the ionization chambers.

There is, therefore, a possibility that the mAs is too low, or too high, limiting the number of exposuresavailable.

The same problem is encountered when the lateral ionization cells are selected without the central cell.

The following table shows the usable configurations and recommended combinations of IIR field/Selectedionization chambers.

IIR field (cm) 40 32 22 16

Chamber selection

X (X) / /

(X) / / /

X (X) / /

(X) / / /

X X X X

X X X X

X: possible configuration(X): configuration may sometimes work but not recommended/: non functional configuration, definitely not recommended.

Note: It is possible to solve an IIR field/Ionization Chamber problem by adjusting the CVN.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–260

10. AEC not satisfactory in DRS operation with linear mode.

– Check the ratio of mAs (Mag 1, 75 kV, two mm Cu, minimum SID):

mAs AEC linear

mAs AEC EDR

– If the ratio is other than 2.7 �5%, check the camera adjustment.

– If the problem persists, check that the DSA mode request is received by the MPH.

11. Blurred films due to too long an exposure:

– Check that the type of examination used is time priority.

– Reduce tsup (kV increases, mAs falls).

– If the problem persists, reduce tmax (kV increases, mAs falls).

12. Insufficient contrast due to too high kV:

– Check that the type of examination used is kV priority.

– Reduce kVsup (time increases, mAs increases).

– If the problem persists, reduce kVmax (time increases, mAs increases).

13. DRS images over exposed when using short times and small thicknesses under AEC:

– Check that tmin is � 5 ms

– If not, set tmin to 8 ms (kV falls, mAs falls).

Note: Many other causes totally independent of the 0-Point can result in an over-exposed image.

14. The MPH thermal cut-out operates too often:

– Check the possibility of increasing tmax without degrading the system behavior with respect tomotion blurring (motion blurring is liable to occur with tmax >150 ms). Increasing tmax reduces kVand increases mAs.

– If this is not possible, ask the user if he will accept degraded contrast at high thicknesses. If yes,increase kVmax 10 kV.

Note: Before taking any action, check that the patient population involved is not composed of all thin peopleor overweight people.

15. Too much contrast due to kV too low (causes too-long exposures, motion blurring):

– Check that the type of examination used is kV priority.

– Increase kVinf (time falls, mAs falls).

– If the problem persists, increase kVmin (time falls, mAs falls).

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–261

6.2 Other Possible Problems

6.2.1 Occasional under- or over-exposure.

The user must be aware that when keys on the generator control panel are flashing it is because thecalculated parameters are outside the range he considers to be correct, or because he is required to take someaction or other.

� kV flashing: the user must run a fluoroscopy to measure the thickness,

� Focal spot flashing: the small spot has been selected manually when the large spot is required to makea good exposure. It is usually a thermal problem.

(Manual focal spot: programmed by the Laptop, or following an operator action).

� Z flashing: the calculated constants are outside the limit window. The film may be correctly exposed,but the exposure will not be made with the parameters selected by the user.

� Screen–film pair flashing: the selected screen–film pair has insufficient sensitivity, or is too sensitive,for the exposure, and the parameters are outside the limits. The proposed substitute screen–film pairflashes, the user must select it manually.

6.2.2 The CVN changes the kV!

The advice to give when the user makes this comment is: “With 0-Point, don’t watch the kV, look at theimage”.

The CVN modifies the thickness seen by the system. There is, therefore, a calculated kV value that isdifferent from that initially determined with a nil CVN.

6.2.3 Problem during a sequence

A typical procedure which may provoke a backup mAs cutoff during a sequence is the following:

� FLUOROSCOPY (measurement and positioning),

� RADIOGRAPHY: sequence made on a variable patient thickness,

� SEQUENCE CUTOFF.

This cutoff is caused by the thickness increasing too much after the measurement made under fluoroscopy;the backup mAs cuts out before the AEC.

The solution is to systematically run a MANUAL FLUOROSCOPY at the start of a sequence (the AEC isdisconnected, and the machine works at constant mAs).

The ABC (automatic fluoroscopy) must then be re-selected at the end of the sequence to restore theautomatic measurement of the patient’s equivalent radiographic thickness.

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–262

��

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Version No.: 0


Purpose: DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSINTERFACE RAD AND FLUORO Date:

Time: Personnel: 1


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–263

��

Run this procedure if no exposures available and diagnostics run well.

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� None

SECTION 2TOOLS



� None


� Test (menu 2 – F1) Interface Test (F5):

– Room Input (5),

– Room Output (6).

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S

Job Card VF009 2 of 14DIAGNOSTIC–HELP TESTSINTERFACE RAD AND FLUORO


REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–264

ILLUSTRATION 1RAD_PREP_A SIGNAL (LED PG1 ON ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Replace Room_If_CPU(MPH A6–A1)

Led PG1on Room_

IF_CPU BoardMPH A6–A1

lighted

Press prep pushbutton oncontrol console generator or

Remote Table

See illustration 2–36 page 2–48See illustration 2–20 page 2–32

Led PG2on Room_If_CPU MPH

A6–A1light

END

Room doorclosed (if safety

switch)Close the door

Check connection between:1) MPH A6–A1 J2 and MPH

A6–A3 J72) MPH A6–A3 J12 and

control consoleMPH A7–J2

Replace faultycables

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Run diagnosticmenu 2 – TEST

ALL TESTS

Workstation 1or 5 selected?(DIR–Tube 1

SPE Tube 1) orDIR Tube 2

Yes

Yes

Select WorkstationDIR or SPERad Room

orRF Room

RF

See Page 3

RAD

Verify ifrelay K13 isenergized

No Yes

Replace Room_If_CPU (MPH A6–A1)

Connect a pushbutton on J7pin 1.3 of Room_If_CPU

Board MPH A6–A1

Press pushbutton

Led PG1light

No Yes

END

No

A

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–265

Replace TableInterface BoardMPH A6–A2

Press PrepPushbutton

Checkif LED DS1 light

on TableInterface BoardMPH A6–A2

No Yes

From A page 2

CheckFlat cable

beetween TableInterface Board XJ5(MPH A6–A2) and

Room_If_CPU BoardXJ9

(MPH A6–A1)

Replace cable

OKNot

ARF

Check if RelayK23 on Table

Interface BoardMPH A6–A2 is

energized

YesNo

Checkcable between

Remote Table andInterface Table Board

MPH A6–A2/XJ2

OKNot OK


Check RemoteTable

CheckFlat cable

beetween TableInterface BoardJ5 and Room_

If_CPUBoard J9

OKNot OK


ReplaceRoom_If_CPUMPH A6–A1

OK

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–266

ILLUSTRATION 2END_PREP SIGNAL (LED PG2 ON ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Run Faulty TreeRAD–PREP–A

Led PG1 onRoom_If_CPU Board

MPH A6–A1 light?

YesNo

Press Prep pushbutton oncontrol console generator or

Remote Table

Led PG2Room_If_CPU Board

MPH A6–A1 light?

No

Run TestMenu 2 – Test (F1)Heater (9) Rotor (0)

END

Yes

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–267

ILLUSTRATION 3EXP_REQUEST_A_SIGNAL (LED GR1 ON ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

RAD ROOMor

RF ROOM

Connect two Push Button on J7–pin 1and 3 and Pin 2 and 3 on

Room_If_CPU Board MPH A6–A1


Press Prep and exposure pushbuttonon Control Console Generator or

Remote Table

LedPG1–PG2

Light?

LedGR1 light on

Room_If_CPUBoard MPH

A6–A1

END

Yes

OK No

Run Faulty TreeRAD_PREP_A and

END_PREP

No

To A page 4A

RF RAD

Press bothpushbuttons

LedGR1light

YesNo

Check connections between:1) MPH A6–A1/J2 and MPH

A6–A3/J72) MPH A6–A3/J12 and

control consoleMPH A7–A2

Replace faultycable

Relay K23on

Room_If_CPUenergized?

Yes

Check inhibition bycollimator

Block diagram 15 Chapter 2

Replace Room_If_CPUBoard MPH A6–A1

No

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–268

Replace TableInterface BoardMPH A6–A2

Checkif LED DS1 light

on TableInterface BoardMPH A6–A2

No Yes

From A page 5

CheckFlat cable

beetween TableInterface Board XJ5(MPH A6–A2) and

Room_If_CPU BoardXJ9

(MPH A6–A1)

Replace cable

OKNot

ARF

Check if RelaysK22 and K13 onTable InterfaceBoard (MPHA6–A2) areenergized

YesNo

Checkcable between

Remote Table andInterface Table Board

MPH A6–A2/XJ2

OKNot OK

Replace faultycable

Check RemoteTable

CheckFlat cable

beetween TableInterface BoardJ5 and Room_If_CPU Board

J9

OKNot OK

Replace faultycable

ReplaceRoom_If_CPU

Board MPH A6–A1

OK

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–269

ILLUSTRATION 4EXP_DEMANT SIGNAL (LED GR2 ON ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Led PG1,PG2, GR1 lighton Room_If_CPU Board

MPH A6–A2?

Press prep and exposurepushbutton


END

Led GR2light on Room_If_CPU MPH

A6–A2

Yes

No

Run previousFaulty Trees

Erroron control

console MPH A7ERR = xxx

?

No

Yes

Yes

Runcorresponding diagnostic

see Chapter 4.1 Resetpushbutton

flash oncontrolconsole

No

No

Release two pushbuttonsexposure and prep. andRe–run this Faulty Tree

Yes

Reset by pressingReset pushbutton

Re–run thisFaulty Tree

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–270

ILLUSTRATION 5START_EXP_A SIGNAL (LED GR3 ON ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Replace faultycable

Check RemoteTABLE

Signal M/T andSignal F/H

Replace InterfaceTable BoardMPH A6–A2

ReplaceRoom_If_CPUMPH A6–A1

Led PG1,PG2, GR1, GR2light on Room_If_CPU BoardMPH A6–A1

?

Press prepared exposurepushbuttons


RADRoom or RF Room

?

RAD

Yes

RF

No

Set Workstation 1Direct or Special


Test ifK27–K14

on Interface TableMPH A6–A2 are

energized?

No Yes

Not OK OK

Not OK OK

OK

Checkcable betweenInterface Table J5 and Room_

If_CPUJ9

Not OK OK

Checkwiring between6/J2 and 7/J5

InterfaceTable

No Yes

Replace InterfaceTable Board MPH A6–A2

Replace Room_If_CPUBoard MPH A6–A1

Checkcable betweenInterface Table

board MPHA6–A2 andremote table

Checkcable between

Interface Table J5and Room_If_

CPU J9

Replace faultycable

Replace faultycable

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–271

ILLUSTRATION 6BEGIN_END_EXP SIGNAL (LED GR4 ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Reset error andRetry at thebeginning

Led PG1,PG2, GR1, GR2 andGR3 light on Room_

If_CPU BoardMPH A6–A1

?

Press Exposure and Prep.pushbuttons

See illustration 2–37 page 2–49

YesNo

Run previousFaulty Tree

Error onControl Console

ERR = x x x?

Yes No

Run diagnosticMenu 2 – Test (F1)Interface Test (F5)

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–272

ILLUSTRATION 7FLUORO_PREP_A SIGNAL (LED SC1 ON ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Led SC1,on Room_

If_CPU BoardMPH A6–A1

light

Press Fluoro Foot switchPedal on Remote Table

Console


WorkstationNumber 2selected(SETE)

?

No

No

Yes

END

Yes

Select Workstation 2

Led DS1 onTable InterfaceMPH A6–A2

light ?

No Yes

Checkcable between

J5 Interface TableMPH A6–A2 andJ9 Room_If_CPU

MPH A6–A1Check if K5 is

energized onInterface TableMPH A6–A2

No Yes

K5 not energized: ReplaceInterface Table Board MPH A6–A2

OK

ReplaceInterface Table Board

MPH A6–A2

See Page 11

A

Replace faultycable

Not OK

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–273

Checkif K24 is

energized onInterface

Table Board

From Page 10

A

Checkcable betweenJ2 InterfaceTable and

Remote Table

NoYes

ReplaceRoom_If_CPU

Board MPH A6–A1

Checkcable betweenJ5 Interface

Table Board andJ9 Room_If_CPU Board

Not OK OK

OK Not OK

Check RemoteTable

Replace faultycable

Replace faultycable

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–274

ILLUSTRATION 8FLUORO_DEMAND SIGNAL (LED SC2 ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Led SC1,on Room_If_CPU Board

MPH A6–A1light

?


Console


No Yes


Run Test Menu 2 (F1)– Interface Test (F5)– Heater (F9)– Rotor (F10)

ILLUSTRATION 9START_FLUORO_A_SIGNAL (LED SC3 ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

See Page 13

A

Led SC1,SC2 on Room_If_CPU BoardMPH A6–A1

light ?


Console

No Yes


Check ifRelay K1 on

Interface TableMPH A6–A2is energized

?

Checkcable betweenJ5 InterfaceTube and J9

Room_If_CPUBoard

?

Not OK

No

OK

ReplaceFaulty cable

Replace InterfaceTable board MPH A6–A2

Yes

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–275

Checkif relay K21

is energized onInterface

Table BoardMPH A6 A2

?

From Page 12

A

Check RemoteTable

Checkcable betweenJ2–Interface

Table board andRemote Table

NoYes

Replace InterfaceTable BoardMPH A6–A1

Checkcable betweenJ5 Interface

Table Board andJ9 Room_If_

CPU?

Replace faultycable

Not OK OK

OKNot OK

Replace FaultyCable

DIA

GN

OS

TIC

S



REV 4 asm 2165118–100

4–276

ILLUSTRATION 10BEGIN_END_FLUORO (LED SC4 ON ROOM_IF_CPU BOARD MPH A6–A1)

Reset error andRetry at thebeginning

Led SC1, SC2,SC3 light on

Room_If_CPUBoard MPH

A6–A1?

Press Fluoro Foot SwitchPedal on RemoteTable Console


YesNo


Error onControl Console

ERR = x x x?

Yes No

Run diagnosticMenu 2 – Test (F1)Interface Test (F5)

MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2Advanced Service Manual2165118–100 Revision 4

MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2Advanced Service Manual2165118–100 Revision 4

TechnicalPublications

2165118–100Revision 4

MPH 50 V2 - MPH 65 V2 - MPH 80 V2asmAdvanced Service Manual

do not duplicate

Copyright� 1999, 2002 by General Electric Co.

Advanced Service DocumentationProperty of GEFor GE Service Personnel OnlyNo Rights Licensed – Do Not Use or CopyDisclosure to Third Parties Prohibited

Date post:	03-Oct-2014
Category:	Documents
Upload:	philip-lewis
View:	1,431 times
Download:	34 times

MPH Advanced Service Manual

Documents